Leveraging AI-Powered Prompt Generators for High-Impact Content Creation – with April Beach and Bob Dietrich

    Leveraging AI-Powered Prompt Generators for High-Impact Content Creation

     

     

    Summary:

    Unlock the Power of Personalized Content to Level Up Your Coaching, Consulting, or Expert Business
     
    In today’s fast-paced digital landscape, coaches, consultants, and experts need to consistently produce high-quality content that resonates with their audience. In this episode, we dive into the world of AI-powered prompt generators and how they can transform your content production process. We’re thrilled to have Bob Dietrich, founder of Unleash AI For Business Summit, as our guest expert to share his insights and experience in leveraging AI for content creation.
    Join us as we explore how to develop clear prompt generators for personalized outputs, learn the latest advancements in AI, and discover the hottest software currently used for video, audio, and content creation. By the end of this episode, you’ll have the knowledge and tools you need to level up your content production game!
     
    Specifically, we discuss the hottest software for video, audio, and content creation
    • Top AI-driven tools and platforms for various content formats
    • Integrating AI-powered tools into your content production workflow
    • Success stories: AI in action
    • And real-life examples of coaches, consultants, and experts who have successfully implemented AI in their content strategy

     

    At the end of this episode, you will:

      1. Have a clear prompt generator that produces personalized outputs
      2. Learn the latest in AI and the hottest software currently used for video, audio, and content creation
    Resources mentioned: 
     
     
    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    280

     

    [00:00:43] April: Hi guys. Welcome to podcast episode 280 and we are diving back into talking more about AI in your business. Why are we talking about AI and business? Because we are content creators. We are experts, we are leaders, and [00:01:00] we’re all people who lead other people. That’s why you’re listening to this show, and in the process, what we do is creating teachings and training and materials to help other people elevate according to our area of expertise, right?

    [00:01:12] April: However, It’s very, very time consuming to do. And historically engineering your offers, your programs, your content, has been one of the longest consuming tasks that we manage as CEOs in our company. Whether you’re still doing it yourself or you have a team that helps you create your content, it’s expensive and is time consuming.

    [00:01:34] April: And so with the inception of AI into our business, we can. Become more productive and create more transformational content according to our authentic voice and genius. And so that’s why it’s so important that we are continuing to talk about this because this show is dedicated to helping you level up your business.

    [00:01:54] April: And that’s why we’re bringing you more episodes on ai. Here’s what you can expect from this episode. [00:02:00] We are going to talk about how to engineer prompts, how to actually use AI correctly in a way that is going to save you time and still sound exactly the way that you need it to sound so you don’t sound like a robot.

    [00:02:13] April: And we’re also talking to today’s guest about the new AI is called Unleashing AI four Business Summit. And by the way, take a second right now. Pause this and go get your free ticket. I will be a speaker at the Unleashing AI for Business Summit coming up here in May of 2023, and I’m gonna be breaking out the framework on how to use AI to engineer transformational programs.

    [00:02:39] April: It’s gonna be amazing. You can get your free ticket by going to unleash AI for spelled f o r business.com/. So pauses for a sec. Go grab your ticket, sign up for that, and then come back and listen to the show. At the end of this show, you are gonna know a very [00:03:00] simple, prompt generation acronym that Bob Dietrich, our amazing guest, who is the creator of Unleashed AI for Business Summit, walks you through.

    [00:03:09] April: It’s gonna save you hours and hours of creating the output you’re looking for. We’re also talking about the latest in. And Bob uncovers some really cool secret tools that I didn’t even know about that after we recorded this show, I immediately went and tested them on some of the content from this episode.

    [00:03:28] April: So if you are ready for all of this, then you are in the right place. You can find all of the show notes, a link to the behind the scenes video. Bob Screen shares in this. If you are not following us on YouTube, make sure you’re following us at Sweet Life Company on YouTube where you can see the behind the scenes.

    [00:03:46] April: But all of this will be available right at your hands in our show notes, which can be found by visiting sweet life co.com/podcast. Or you can just go directly to sweet life [00:04:00] podcast.com. This is episode number two 80. Let’s go ahead and dive in. Hey everybody. Welcome back to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur and Online Business podcast.

    [00:04:09] April: I am here. A new friend Bob Dietrich, and he has come into our orbit in all things ai. I’m super excited to have been introduced to him from Amy Yamada. You all heard Amy’s episodes a couple of weeks ago, and we are diving in more to AI for content creation. Bob, can you introduce yourself, let our friends know how you got into this world of everything AI over the last couple of months or maybe years. How, how long have you been diving into this?

    [00:04:42] Bob: Um, you know what, how long have we all been in it and not known it? Right? Right. That’s a real question because we’ve all been in it for so long and we’ve not known it. Um, everything from our Facebook feeds to the Google searches. I mean, as soon as the internet came out, AI was pretty much invented.

    [00:04:56] Bob: So, uh, so we’ve all been in it for a while. Uh, [00:05:00] but today, I mean, Now that we’re in it, now we’re more aware of what we can do and we have things like chat, g p t available. Um, but we got some really important questions like how do we get it to work properly? How do we implement it into our business? Um, I was at a party, uh, last weekend and I’m telling people about chat, G P T, like they should know.

    [00:05:18] Bob: And it’s like most people don’t know. I mean, we are literally at the bottom of the upswing of the curve, uh, you know, the bell curve of, of a product’s life, right? And. Just at the beginning, it’s like the.com ages when, you know, dot coms are just about to start. So if you’re watching this, you’re just at the beginning of this huge bell curve that’s happening and it’s very exciting,

    [00:05:39] April: What a remarkable actually time in, in the world to live. And I know that there are a lot of people that are scared of it. Uh, in, in our entrepreneur world that we are part of, we tend to be total go-getters. We love the newest things. We love diving into them and. Why what you’re doing is actually so cool because you have [00:06:00] created these amazing summits that are all about unleashing the power of AI for thought leaders, for entrepreneurs. Tell us a little bit about those summits that you have been hosting and, and the ones to the, in the ones that are to come.

    [00:06:14] Bob: Yeah. So, um, a summit, if you’re not aware or familiar with them, is basically a group of interviews. A set of interviews anywhere from 10 to 15 to 30. I mean, even 60 interviews, depending on how about how large it is.

    [00:06:27] Bob: Uh, ours tend to be about a full day, so about 16 interviews, and we bring on top experts. And our, our strategy is really, To, um, we all know that chat G P T exists. If you’re watching this, you’re probably familiar with that. The question is, how do you make it work the way you want it to and what other AR tools are out there?

    [00:06:43] Bob: And so our program, our summit, is designed to bring in business owners and say, Hey, you’re using chat G P T, how are you using it to get. Information out to make your business run more efficiently, to, to reduce your cost, to increase your profits, to gain that competitive [00:07:00] advantage. Um, and also what other tools are you using that also help you, uh, excel in your business.

    [00:07:06] Bob: And so it’s been remarkable because each. Person, although, hey, we’re using chat G B T, here’s how I’m using it. And your mind is blown. Just like you first used, you know, first time you saw Jet Chat G v t, it was like, wow, my mind just got blown. Well, get get ready. It’s gonna get blown again and again and again.

    [00:07:21] Bob: Every time you see chat, G B T and somebody else use it in a different way, it’s just. It’s phenomenal. It’s, it’s, um, it’s the magic eight ball of the 21st century .

    [00:07:30] April: It’s, it’s so funny as you say that, I’m thinking that, uh, my husband and I were talking last week and he was having, um, his bio generated and then he had his bio generated in the Voice of Yoda, and it was absolutely hysterical.

    [00:07:42] April: I mean, just these funny things too that you don’t think about. And he goes, this is it. This is what I’m gonna put on my LinkedIn profile. This is it. This is what it’s gonna be. You know, so it it, like you’re saying, I mean, you just don’t even think of some of the things. I was just in a meeting prior to this with somebody who was talking about doing their whole entire task list and actually having [00:08:00] chat actually organize their order of operations of all the things they had to do in a day.

    [00:08:03] April: It wasn’t even. Externally facing content. It was literally helping them organize their own thoughts and ideas to be a more productive person. So I agree with you and I can’t wait to be a part of speaking at your upcoming summit that we’re gonna be having here in a couple weeks and, and we’ll be sharing information about that as well.

    [00:08:22] April: Me too. So one of the things that I’m most excited to hear about is what also tends to be stumping people, right? I’m of course, excited to learn your solution like all of our listeners are, and that is how do we actually know the correct inputs to get the right outputs for what we need? And. AI to do for us in our business.

    [00:08:47] April: And you call that prompt engineering. Can you explain just first of all, high level, what is prompt engineering and why is it so important for our users to under or our listeners to understand?

    [00:08:58] Bob: Sure, sure. [00:09:00] So prompt engineering, not my word, not my phrase, but I’m gonna give it to you anyway, because here’s what it means. Prompt engineer engineering basically means the creation of the prompt, the input that goes into an AI so you can get the output. Right. So that is the input, the prompt is the input, whatever you’re inputting in there. And, uh, if you input, you know, it’s kind of like the first time you, you went to computer class and you started learning about computers.

    [00:09:24] Bob: It’s like garbage in, garbage out. That was like one of the first thing you learned. And so if you put garbage into the chat, cheap pt, guess what? It’s not magic. It’s not gonna spit out good stuff. It’s gonna give you garbage out, right? So you have to give it, um, the right input, the right prompt to. Pull out the stuff.

    [00:09:39] Bob: When you pull out the inform information you want, when you give it the right prompt, it’ll blow your mind, right? And that, and if you don’t give it the right, uh, right prompt, uh, it’ll be a big disappointment. . Right.

    [00:09:50] April: Just, just can create more content. Yeah. And I would say nobody needs more content. Right? We need a transformation or, or what is the clear outcome of what we’re looking for.

    [00:09:58] April: Exactly. Uh, [00:10:00] really great to know about prompt engineering, and you actually have a very special formula that you guide people through in order to understand how to create prompts. Can you tell us a little bit about.

    [00:10:12] Bob: and, yeah. And it, and it’s not a hard, fast rule, um, but it is something that, uh, that I think it, it’ll be a good guide. So let, let’s go through it. Um, I’ve created this acronym. It’s not a pretty acronym, but it’s something you can remember. and I, I like acronyms because every letter stands for something, right? And so the word is Cats Paww, right? Uh, Cats Paww. Right, right. And so Cat, if you reme can remember Cats Paww, then you can probably remember every step here.

    [00:10:39] Bob: So let’s go through the, what is Cats Paww? So the first thing you wanna do when you’re generating a, a command, and probably by the way, I’ll probably get Cats Paww replaced with something cool. But for now, , I actually think

    [00:10:49] April: that’s, I, I remember it already. Right. There’s nothing in the coaching space that’s called Cats Paww, so nobody’s gonna go

    [00:10:55] Bob: forget that .There we go. All right. So, uh, so the first thing in the C [00:11:00] stands for command, right? You want to give it a command, like, write this or write code for this, or Correct this, or explain this or analyze this, right? So, A command, right? So C is the command. Um, a is the adjective. Write this emotional or compelling, or outrageous or thrilling or heartbreaking or whatever, right?

    [00:11:19] Bob: So write this adjective, right? So ca a is for adjective, right? Um, T is for tone. . So write this adjective in the tone of, right, and this is kind of your writing voice, right? This is it, the flavor of the, of the, uh, of the conversation. So you’re gonna write an email, uh, that is compelling in the tone of, um, a casual tone or a, uh, perspective tone.

    [00:11:42] Bob: Um, inter perspective or passionate tone. Or enthusiastic tone, right? So T is for tone. So it’s c a t s is for the subject. What is the subject, right? Um, write this adjective. Uh, write this emotional, enthusiastic sales letter [00:12:00] or email or subject or landing page, right? So s is for the subject. What is the subject?

    [00:12:05] Bob: What are you gonna gonna have it, uh, produce, right? Um, and then you wanna say, uh, from the perspective of. Who, the customer, the product, the competitor, the ex, you know, the storyteller, uh, the advocate, the influencer. The performer. Right? Who’s, who’s it in the perspective of, right? So now we’re at the P. So let’s go to the A.

    [00:12:26] Bob: So Katz, Paul A is for, uh, uh, the A and K Paul. And, uh, and then we’re saying what’s the, the ambition or the goal, right? Mm-hmm. . . And so the g the ambition or goal is to, uh, to have it sell or have it to maybe reverse the risk or make it easy to buy or make it impossible to say no or, or give it a sense of urgency or a sense of scarcity maybe, or, um, offer a guarantee or, you know, what’s the goal of the.

    [00:12:56] Bob: um, of the communication of the prompt, right? [00:13:00] Um, then w and w are with and without, right? So with this person, with this thing, with this qualifier, um, or with, and or without it, without being upsetting people, or without being salesy, without being boring, or without being dull, or without being tedious or without offending people or whatever it is.

    [00:13:22] Bob: Um, so that’s basically cat’s paw. So let’s go through it again. The command. The adjective, the tone, the subject, like sales letter, email, whatever, the perspective of from who, right? And the perspective of the goal, uh, like, like what do you want it to do? Make a person feel a certain way or produce a certain result. Um, and with or without something, with, with a qualifier and without being, say, salesy or boring or pushy.

    [00:13:50] April: Wow. What a framework. Yeah. I see as you, as you are breaking that out. In playing with AI in, in starting to [00:14:00] use it more regularly, I absolutely see the power in your structure and I wish I had had that before I had started playing with it because I think I have spent hundreds of hours just wondering what was coming up from what I was putting in.

    [00:14:14] April: So that is really incredibly powerful. What, in your experience do you find that entrepreneurs are using ai. For I, is it email marketing, social marketing article? Like what, what are the trends? I mean, I can’t even say trends. It’s also new, right? Yeah. What are the most common uses of the outputs of the content that you have seen so far?

    [00:14:38] Bob: Okay, so, um, uh, I’m gonna answer that before I do I wanna say, Most business owners are not using it, right? So this is your advantage right now if you’re watching it, right? Most businesses aren’t using it. The ones that are aware of it, maybe half of ’em are using it, maybe less than that. Um, and they’re not, so they’re not using it properly.

    [00:14:55] Bob: They haven’t figured it out. Some business owners are using it. So let’s talk about those people. [00:15:00] Who are you, who’s using it? How are they using it? Um, so those people who are using Chat G P T, most people are using, you know, uh, some form of it in Google and whatever, but when you really talk about, say, chat, G P T or some of the audio or video programs out there, um, they’re using Chat G P T for, you know, things like emails, things like sales letters, um, but you know what really is cool? Totally overlooked is the research. Um, do we have the ability to do screen share anything here? Um, yeah,

    [00:15:30] April: absolutely. Okay. We, we love, uh, let me make sure that you have power. Yeah. Can you, can you power it up from below?

    [00:15:37] Bob: I certainly

    [00:15:38] April: can. Awesome. And we’ll make sure this is on YouTube for you guys. Those of you’re listening in audio, make sure that you cruise over to YouTube and we’ll put a link to that in the show notes.

    [00:15:48] Bob: Okay. So I’m just gonna find the, uh, Uh, the entire screen. There we

    [00:15:52] April: go. Oh, this is so cool. This is so cool. Okay.

    [00:15:56] Bob: So, um, I am going to share my screen and what I wanna show you here [00:16:00] is, can you see my screen right now with chat g p t up? Yep, sure can. Okay. So I was working with somebody, uh, earlier and she was saying she wanted to create her program.

    [00:16:09] Bob: She’s, uh, she’s working with. People in recovery who want something more out of life, uh, to stay sober. Like they’re, in other words, they’re sober already. They’ve gone through the process of, of being through a rehab and now they wanna get really jump into life, right. Um, and really make something outta life.

    [00:16:25] Bob: So she’s doing a next level course. It’s like after you’ve conquered. Recovery, what do you do now? And so we put in something saying, uh, you know, that said, I’m working with people in recovery, want something more out of life now that they’re sober. Please write, uh, what people in recovery are most interested in.

    [00:16:40] Bob: And so what it does is it puts all the information out. This is what they’re all interested in, right? These are what they’re interested in after recovery. It’s like, okay, great. So please gimme some statistics around this. Right? And so what it did was it spit out all these statistics. I just did this this morning.

    [00:16:54] Bob: So this is fresh information. Um, so it says, okay, uh, 88% [00:17:00] of people, uh, reported making positive changes in their personal life since becoming sober, right? 62% uh, said that they pursued a new career. 67% said they had made new friends after becoming sober, 72% re reported spirituality or faith was improved.

    [00:17:16] Bob: Um, 80% of the people reported that they had positive changes in their diet, so on and on, and. . Um, you can use this if you’re building a recovery program to show people, Hey, you guys have a very, very good chance of succeeding if the right things are in place. So now the next problem is prompt, is what are some things that will help people be successful to continue their recovery and help them, you know, to help them become successful?

    [00:17:40] Bob: And so what it does is here are some things that individuals in recovery. Be successful and maintain their sobriety over the long term. So they need a strong support system. They need healthy coping mechanisms. They need a sense of purpose. They need avoiding triggers and accountability. I mean, that sounds like everybody, but especially people in [00:18:00] recovery, right?

    [00:18:00] Bob: Because without some of these things, they may go back to, you know, drinking or taking drugs or alcohol or whatever. Right? So, . So this is, this is where they focus, so this is what her course should be focusing on, right? And then we said, okay, well what are the pain points they’re experiencing? Well, they’re, the pain points are cravings.

    [00:18:17] Bob: Oh my gosh. Social isolations, financial and legal issues. Mental health issues, right? So mind blowing already, right? This is, and so, okay.

    [00:18:26] April: Right. So keep

    [00:18:26] Bob: going, keep going. Yeah, yeah, yeah. So it’s like, okay, so now create an outline for a program called Next Level Recovery. That’s her program. Right? So look for it.

    [00:18:34] Bob: It’s coming. It’s coming soon. It’s coming. It’s coming. And so it says, here’s the outline for your program based on everything we just talked about, right? And so it basically flows this outline, it gives you seven points to it. It’s like, you know what? We want a little bit longer, add three more modules to this outline.

    [00:18:49] Bob: And so now it’s 10 modules long and it spits out 10 modules of, of. Of, of, you know, her program based on what we, what we wanted to do. Now. She said, well, I wanna start, you know, [00:19:00] nurturing my email list before I start getting out there. I said, okay, well let’s do this. Um, but this is an email, uh, by the way, uh, I, I asked that, write me an email to potential expert speakings, inviting them to speak on a summit for this.

    [00:19:13] Bob: Product. So, or for this, uh, for a program about recovery. So, so we said, okay, make an announcement for this event and rewrote the announcement. And then we said, okay, write 20 subjects I can email to my audience in recovery in the next 10 weeks. You know, that would kind of, kind of get the email list warmed up a little bit.

    [00:19:29] Bob: Mm-hmm. , and it gives me these 10, uh, these 20 different, um, subjects that I could be talking about. And I, and I took the first one, the power of gratitude. I said, write me a, a blog PO. A 10 point blog. , right? You have 10 benefits of the power of, of gratitude in recovery and how they can implement these principles and it produces this blog post.

    [00:19:49] Bob: Now I can cut and paste this into my email and start warming up my list right away while I’m building out my program, right? And I did all this in about 10 or 20 minutes, right? And then, [00:20:00] um, and then, I mean, it goes on and on, so, so, Yeah, that’s, that’s what I wanted

    [00:20:05] to

    [00:20:05] April: show my mind is just absolutely blown.

    [00:20:07] April: I hope you guys are watching this video. If you’re listening to the audio, make sure you also watch the video replay of this. What a, as you were saying this, cuz what I’m gonna be speaking at, on, at your summit is offer engineering and how we actually extract genius to, to create methodologies and transformational programs.

    [00:20:26] April: I’m really excited to talk about that and mm-hmm. , we’ve been testing that a lot and, but what. made me think of was earlier today I was in with a group of businesses, so just kind of another use case where we are licensing their courses to corporations and our goal this morning was to come up with the sales deck and part of coming up the sales deck are coming up with statistics.

    [00:20:50] April: And numbers and pain points for the organization or corporation. And that was a, a real sticking point that has always in the past required a lot [00:21:00] of exhausting research. And I never once in this whole entire morning, so now based on this, I need to go back and tell all of our clients, you need to input this into chat G P T, because exactly.

    [00:21:11] April: We were struggling with coming up today is exactly what you just showed. Mind blown, absolutely

    [00:21:17] Bob: amazing. And so when I say research, it’s like start from the beginning. Start from your, you know, what are you, who is it that you’re wanting to talk to? What are their pain points? What are their, their, what are they looking for?

    [00:21:28] Bob: What you know, and where do you want to take? Them and what’s the name of your program? And insert all this information in, in a, in a, in kind of a, a logical chronological flow. And it’ll start to, you know, build it for you cuz it’s remembering what you just input. It’s remembering what, it just outputted based on all the information inputs that it got.

    [00:21:45] Bob: And then it, it kind of builds on itself. Builds on itself, builds on itself.

    [00:21:49] April: Unbelievable. Unbelievable. Um mm-hmm. , I’m literally, I am speechless. And this episode is dropping right away and even eight weeks from now [00:22:00] after. , there’ll be, there’ll be so many more use cases. And so I’m excited to be here talking to you and experiencing these things and learning from you and learning from the other experts you bring in.

    [00:22:12] April: And then hoping to, to spread the word on how we all can use this before we wrap up. And we’re gonna make sure you guys know how to get access to Bob’s Unleashing the Power of AI Summit. We need to make sure you guys get in there. Uh, they’re, I mean, I’m just so excited to be part of just. An incredible group of people that are spearheading this and we wanna make sure you guys are involved.

    [00:22:36] April: Can you share with us what are, what are just, we always talk about chat g P two, we’ve been talking about that a lot. But what are the other hot AI tools that are, are on the rise and people are using in addition to, um, hoping to ai.

    [00:22:50] Bob: Okay, so, so this is really, uh, fun to talk about because, uh, chat g p t I mean, I, I, I can tell you that, that without a doubt, somebody’s gonna [00:23:00] come up with this party game, uh, for chat G P T and you, and you just, you know, maybe you pull a card or something and then you type it into chat G P t and you know it does something, right?

    [00:23:08] Bob: Yeah. And it’s Cards Against Humanity on chapter media or something like that, right? Uh, although it won’t give you any information like that. So I don’t know exactly what it’s gonna be, but if it’ll be very fun. Anyway, so, um, some of the, um, , I know the idea right there. That’s funny, right? Yeah. So, uh, some of the things that, that you’ve seen out there, that I’ve seen out there, I mean, descript is, is popular if you’re not using descript and you haven’t looked it up, D e s c r i p t descript.com.

    [00:23:36] Bob: It, it is amazing. It’ll take your videos, right? It’ll pull it up into the system, it’ll cut out all the ums and ahs in, you knows, and whatever all the filler words if, if. It’ll transcribe everything. And if you didn’t like something you said, you can take it out. And if you wanna say something different because you misspoke, you said, oh, it’s on April 15th, when you meant April 27th.

    [00:23:59] Bob: You can take the [00:24:00] 15th out, put the 27th in and it will change the video and it’ll change, even change your mouth a little bit. Look, you make it look like you said the 27th, right? And so, um, it is a super cool tool. For editing. Uh, it’s editing on steroids. It’s editing for a, you know, with ai. Oh my goodness.

    [00:24:17] Bob: And it’s super cool. So, . Yeah, it’s, it’s makes editing a lot more fun. And that’s kind of their theme. Um, I could even show you a, a link to a video, two minute video that’ll show you what, uh, what it does. Uh, even the video’s fun. Um, there’s another tool that I really like, Otter ai. Some of you have probably used it, but, um, and I have, I’m not using it yet.

    [00:24:37] Bob: This is like, I’m super excited to unwrap this. Christmas present. So Otter AI is basically a transcription tool where you put it on your computer and you, you flip it on and it’s on all the time. It’s transcribing everything, right? If I had it on right now, I’d be transcribing this, and when we’re done, I can go back and take what we just talked about and create a video on it, create a little excerpt on it, you know, whatever I want.

    [00:24:59] Bob: But it’s all [00:25:00] on. It’s all recorded audio and transcription on auto ai. So that’s another tool that’s pretty cool. Um, one of my favorites though is called Video ai. Now, video ai. If I was recording this, for example, what I would do is I could take this, uh, conversation, upload it onto video ai, and what it will do is it will cut it down into like small 32nd.

    [00:25:23] Bob: Reels. Now I can post those reels on Instagram and it, it, it’s already got an algorithm in there to say, Hey, what’s the, what’s the, uh, most interesting points of the conversation between April and Bob? And it’ll give me a little highlight reel and then I post it on, on Instagram and I don’t really need to do much of anything.

    [00:25:40] Bob: It’ll tell to give 10 of ’em. It’ll take 10 of ’em and it’ll just post it. It won’t post it for you, but you know, you do it yourself, but still it’s creating these. , these little video clips. And, uh, it is, it is super cool. And, you know, other people talk about like synthia and these other, uh, avatar things where you can get this, you know, animated looking [00:26:00] version of you to start speaking like, uh, like you.

    [00:26:03] Bob: Um, but that’s not quite there yet. And it’s kind of a little creepy and people don’t really want, that’s too comfortable with it. You know, . And so, uh, it’s like, yeah, okay. Um, it’s like the max head max headroom of, of 2023. Right?

    [00:26:18] April: Oh my gosh. How funny. Remember that? You have to, you have to be a certain age to remember that.

    [00:26:22] April: Yes, I remember that. Our, our listeners are of the age they remember, they remember Max Headroom. That’s so funny. Right. Um, you know, I’m gonna go to video AI after this and upload all this there, and Please do. I’m going to, and we don’t ever do this for the podcast, you guys. , but we will put these clips and then we’ll put it in the show notes of like what we came up with. Just playing with that. I totally am excited to do. Yeah. How amazing. ,

    [00:26:47] Bob: yeah. Yeah, do that and send them to me. Please tag me if you put ’em on Instagram or Facebook. I would love to see those. And, um, uh, and the more you know, the more I find out, the more I’ll be sharing with you. And that’s the beauty, by the way, of these events.

    [00:26:59] Bob: Unleash [00:27:00] ai for business.com. Go there. You can register now. Um, and even though the summit’s over, you can still buy the summit for 27 bucks. I mean, it’s a, it’s a deal for that. And then you. Uh, you’ll be on the list to receive the invite for the next free summit and the free one after that, and the free one after that.

    [00:27:16] Bob: The more people I interview, the more applications I see. The more AI tools that come out, the better they get. I mean, by the time May tw, May 9th comes out, oh, let me tell you this. So we had it scheduled for May 9th, right? That was our original scheduled date. Mm-hmm. for a, uh, unleash ai. And this was in February.

    [00:27:32] Bob: And, and things were moving so fast and so many people were coming up and saying, Hey, I got this tool, I got this tool, I got this and that. We said, we gotta do it faster. So we moved it up to April and. And it was still like, April’s like a month, you know, a month and a half away. Let’s move this up to March now.

    [00:27:47] Bob: March was very ambitious and it still turned out killer. It was so good and, uh, and, and I’m kind of glad we did now that it’s over because, you know, it was a lot of work to produce it, but, um, it’s so. [00:28:00] Poignant right now, it’s so on target and it’s gonna change. And by May or yeah, by May 9th, it’ll things, some things will be different.

    [00:28:07] Bob: And by August or July some things will be different, right? So it’s moving that quickly. Things are moving so fast and things are changing so fast that um, you know, you wanna get it now and, but you know, things are gonna change. The rest of the world’s gonna catch up, then you’re gonna be ahead. Ahead of the curve, you know, in front of the wave. Right, right,

    [00:28:24] April: right. And I mean, and just the productivity for our team alone has just been incredible. Mm-hmm. , I’m the, the person where it, it will have taken me two hours to write an email. I’m just not naturally a writer and mm-hmm. . So some of these tools just in productivity and business are just gonna get so much faster and learning how to make it very authentic to who we are and not robotic and true to our brand voice and our, our leadership voice and our personality.

    [00:28:48] April: It. Absolutely amazing. I can’t wait to be a part of your upcoming summit and speak at your summit. And I know that I’m so excited about the other speakers you have there that I can’t [00:29:00] wait to learn from as well. It’s just gonna absolutely be epic and um, thank you so much for coming on the show and yeah, I’m so glad we get.

    [00:29:07] April: Get this in here while we’re talking about AI on the show, and of course unleash, unleash AI for business coming up slash April. We can get you guys that ticket signed up. And uh, Bob, thank you so much. This has been awesome. I can’t

    [00:29:22] Bob: wait to much. You’re very welcome. I, I’ll see you guys all on Unleash AI four, not the number four, but f o r business.com.

    [00:29:29] Bob: Sounds

    [00:29:29] April: good. Thanks. Sure. What an amazing time talking to Bob. I learned so much and I already opened up some of the tools we talked about on this show to play with in order to produce this show for you guys. So here are your action items at the end of this episode. First of all, go get your free ticket.

    [00:29:47] April: I would love to pour into you as I’m going to be a speaker at the Unleash AI for Business Summit coming up here. I want you to get your free ticket to that, and I’m gonna teach you how to embark on offer engineering [00:30:00] using ai. Super cool. Grab your free ticket to the next summit by visiting Unleash AI for business.

    [00:30:07] April: Spelled out.com/april, and we’re gonna make sure you get that free ticket and dive into all the things Bob talked about on today’s show. Play with them. Go to the show notes@sweetlifepodcast.com slash two 80 and we’re gonna have a recap of all this, including links to all the resources Bob talked about.

    [00:30:27] April: So I hope you do those two things. I hope you. Free ticket to this. This is new to me. This is new to you, but we’ve been playing with it a lot and we’re getting amazing results. Engineering transformational coaching programs and offers with the help of ai, and I can’t wait to show you that, and so I can’t wait to see you at the upcoming summit as well.

    [00:30:46] April: Again, unleash AI for business.com/april. No, I don’t make money from this. I just want you to be part of it. I can’t wait to see you there. Hope you guys have an awesome day.[00:31:00]

     
     

    How Web3 and NFTs Can Grow Your Coaching Business and Build Loyal Fans – with April Beach and Brain Fanzo

    How Web3 and NFTs Can Grow Your Coaching Business and Build Loyal Fans - with April Beach and Brain Fanzo

    Summary:

    This episode is for coaches, consultants, authors, speakers and niche service providers who want to learn about how you can utilize Web 3.0 in your business, to grow your following and to create loyal fans who love and support you. 
     
    By now you’ve heard of Web 3.0, NFTs, and blockchain, but you’re still unsure of how to use, create or overall tap-into these technologies for your coaching, consulting, writing, speaking or creating business. On this week’s show my friend Brian Fanzo returns to help you understand NFTs and how these digital currencies can further your business and movement. 
     
    In the past, we’ve spoken of using NFTs as a currency for clients who hold your coin to gain exclusive access to content, trips, and access to you! In today’s podcast, we start there but take our conversation further as Brian guides our thinking to a much broader and more important (in my opinion) consideration. We dive into how your long-time super fans can truly be part of the change and movement you’re creating, by holding your NFT and thereby investing in the future of your business. These concepts are new to most, but in this show we start with the basics and end with the ideals of how you can get started in Web 3.0 for your coaching, consulting, or creator economy business too. Brian also walks us through his journey creating the $ADHD Coin and the realities of his learning process that lead to even greater consideration for the Coins potential than what he originally expected. 

     

    At the end of this episode, you will:

      1. Have 100 ideas for creating your own NFT
      2. Know where to start in Web 3.0 to get your feet wet
      3. Learn about how NFTs enable your movement, expand your reach, and get the people going…
    Resources mentioned: 
    Listen to the episode where Brian walks through the different terms:
     
     
     
     
    Listen about NFTs from the beginning:
     
     
    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    279

    [00:00:44] April: Hi you guys, and welcome to episode 279 on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. All the show notes and everything we talk about can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.com.

    [00:00:56] April: Click on the podcast and we have a really cool show [00:01:00] in store for you today. We’re kind of wrapping. Three show series on AI and how to use these things to build and grow and scale your coaching business. If you don’t know me, I’m April Beach. I’m an online business architect and I’m an offer engineer, and I help coaches as consultants, authors, speakers, and experts scale their business online by creating million dollar programs, courses, trainings, content licensing, certifications, retreats, and VIP..

    [00:01:27] April: So everything we talk about here in the show is always gonna be driven back to creating your genius creating world-class programs so that you can surpass seven figures and grow your business. Now, today’s episode is really, really cool. We’re talking with a friend of mine, Brian Fanzo. He’s been on this show before.

    [00:01:46] April: All right. But we’re bringing Brian back, especially around these episodes that we’re diving in with chat, G P T and AI, because I wanted to talk about NFTs in web three for your coaching business. [00:02:00] So in this show, we dive into how you can actually. Build super fans by using NFTs. We know Web three, we’ve talked about this before and I am sure that you’ve heard about this before.

    [00:02:12] April: We’ve spoken about it in the past, but in this show, Brian actually goes into the use of NFTs to grow your consulting business to. Build superfans in a community and we talk about how to engineer offers or engineer a community of followers. If you have a podcast as an example, where you can actually create superfans and give them extra access by creating a custom N F T.

    [00:02:40] April: So at the end of this episode, you’re gonna have a hundred ideas. Probably way too many. I know we’re entrepreneurs. We never have a shortage of ideas, do we? Uh, you’re gonna have a hundred ideas for creating your own N F T. You’re gonna know where to start with Web 3.0 to get your feet wet. It’s really web three.

    [00:02:58] April: not Web 3.0, web three, [00:03:00] to get your feet wet. Clearly, I need to be getting my feet wet a little bit more, and you are gonna know how NFTs enable your movement, your message, your people to actually join you in your mission to grow and scale your coaching business more. So all of this is coming up here with my friend Brian Fanzo on the show, and I’m so excited for you to dive in with.

    [00:03:23] April: and all the show notes and everything that we talked about can be found again by visiting sweet life co.com. Click on the podcast, and this is episode number 279. All right, let’s do. All right, you guys. Well, my friend Brian is back on the show again. I think the last time he was here was about, oh gosh, like four or five years ago.

    [00:03:41] April: And Brian is, is really, truly always the tip of the sword when it comes to, um, the future of work in a way that. Actually matters. And so I’m super excited to have him back on the show this week as we dive into the next gen of the podcast, talking all about NFTs and, and what [00:04:00] they mean for us as creators.

    [00:04:02] April: And so first of all, I know you’re super busy and your girls are growing up and, and life is spinning. So thank you so much for hanging out with me again for a little bit here on this show. Let’s dive right in today and talk about. For those listeners that still don’t know how to wrap their head around it, actually, what is an N F T and why should they care about this in their business?

    [00:04:24] Brain: Excited to be back. Uh, you know, it was great to hang out again. Um, I’ll say, you know, like, you know, a year and a half ago I had no care or interest in NFTs or cryptocurrency. It felt very Ponzi scheme ish. It felt very like Crypto bros. So I just put that out there as like, if it’s foreign or you’re kind of polarized by it.

    [00:04:43] Brain: I understand I was in that same boat, uh, not too long ago. But for me, one of the things that I’ve always looked at was, How do we, how can we, you know, really grow a community where there is a shared ownership between us as either creators, entrepreneurs, authors, [00:05:00] speakers, with those that are our audience, right?

    [00:05:02] Brain: The, that whole a thousand True Fan, uh, essay by, you know, Kevin Cruz, I think that’s like one that we’ve all referenced, but in a weird space digitally. We didn’t really have a way other than like maybe we were monetizing, giving them early access to something. And so NFTs to. Of course it stands for non fungible token, but in, in the bigger sense of this, it allows us to have digital ownership in, in, in things that, that are, we traditionally wouldn’t have.

    [00:05:30] Brain: And, and I, most people are like, well, what does that even mean? Because. We haven’t had ownership of anything, of data or information or products or services online, but we have offline, right? Like if you own a car, you know that you own the car, you have the keys, you have the deed to the car, you, you know that it’s sitting in your, in your driveway.

    [00:05:50] Brain: But if you think about it digitally, what have we, what do we even own? Like. One could even argue we don’t own our website, we don’t own our email addresses, right? Like we are technically like [00:06:00] leasing them from Google. We are, we own a domain for a certain amount of years and we’re using, you know, and so this idea of ownership, the underlying technology and the technology won’t matter in a couple years, is kind of like cell phone towers.

    [00:06:14] Brain: Like we don’t care the techno, we don’t care if it’s 5g, LTE. We just want the fastest service we can get and we want it to be everywhere and not to. That’s what this all is. The blockchain is technically the, the underlying technology. But for those that are interested in NFTs, what NFTs mean to me is it’s proof of ownership online.

    [00:06:34] Brain: That is, it cannot be disputed. And what, and the beauty of that is when an NF. When an NFT is created, it’s, it’s, it’s put onto the blockchain and everyone can see it, and nobody can edit it. Nobody can delete it. Nobody can. And so there’s an element of like kind of transparency and ownership online that we’ve never had before.

    [00:06:55] Brain: Now the question becomes what do you do with that? How do you use them? What are do they kind of [00:07:00] represent? And I’ll just say for those that you know, you might have heard about like bored apes or crypto punks or some of these ones, like Jimmy Fallon has one and all. Those are like kind of like 1% of what the value of NFTs are.

    [00:07:13] Brain: That is much more in the collectible space, but where we’re moving is community ownership, and it’s really valuable when it comes to like personal branding and that kind of space. Yeah.

    [00:07:24] April: Thank you for explaining all that. And that’s a perfect transition for people to understand, cuz they do, they see those and they’re like, why, you know, why do I need to own a collectible piece of art in, what does that have to do with my course or my mastermind or my book that I’m writing?

    [00:07:38] April: And, and what does that actually have to do with that is totally irrelevant. So thank you for, uh, creating that, you know, separation in that. So when we talk about community ownership, and of course every single leader. Entrepreneur, um, service-based professional, like we [00:08:00] want our people to grow as we grow, and the goal is to create this long-term journey so clients continue to grow with us.

    [00:08:07] April: They continue to be a part of what we’re doing, and we can create that journey, obviously with our offers and our programs. But what you’re explaining in this kind of all hands in village, Ownership is, I don’t thi think people have really have ever thought about this if they have not already been listening to your podcast every single day, which by the way, you guys, you need to make sure that you’re tuning into Brian’s podcast, , because this is where we learn, me and my boys, we binge Brian’s podcast to learn all about this.

    [00:08:40] April: But let’s talk about what, what do you mean by community ownership and, and why should we care about that as, as leaders?

    [00:08:49] Brain: Well, yeah. No, I think, I mean, it’s, it’s a beautiful thing. There wasn’t really a reason to care about it previously because we kind of separated online and offline. But if you think about it, like I’ll, I’ll use the [00:09:00] reference of the car and then I’ll tie it to the Mastermind, but there, there’s a reason that the emblem of our car is on the front of the car.

    [00:09:06] Brain: It says the name of the car that we own in the back, right? Like we we’re technically marketing for Mercedes, for Lexus, for Tesla. Every time we pull up. And part of that is because it’s like, Hey, we’re proud of what we own. Right. It’s a little bit of peacocking and like the, you pull in, you’re like, I’m, I’m a Jeep guy.

    [00:09:22] Brain: Right. Anyone that has a Jeep. Yeah. I like, it’s like a family. Like we feel like we’re that world, but interestingly enough, The things we own digitally. Where do we like peacock? How do we show up? If someone has followed you for all these years, how do they know what masterminds you belong to? How do they know what books you’ve bought?

    [00:09:40] Brain: How do they like, other than like someone coming in my house and seeing all these books in my bookshelf, there’s really no way for us to show well, who we belong to, what are the things that we’re about? And so what NFTs do in in one beautiful way, Is it turns word of mouth marketing into an actual powerful thing digitally.

    [00:09:59] Brain: Because [00:10:00] I, I use this example all the time. You know, I’m part of the National Speakers Association. I will walk into rooms with, you know, at an event, 500, you know, a thousand people. I have no idea of anyone in there, is part of the National Speakers Association. I can show up in a Facebook. Engaged for a year, have no idea of anyone else in there.

    [00:10:20] Brain: Is part of the National Speakers Association. Maybe they put it in their bio, maybe it’s a logo on their website. But imagine if you had a representation of that on your profile photo or in your digital wallet where I said, Hey, I’m gonna go check what April belongs to. And all of the things that you belong to are represented there.

    [00:10:40] Brain: and the proof of ownership exists because, let’s face it, I don’t believe everything I read on LinkedIn, right? Like there’s a lot of people that graduated from Harvard. I don’t believe they graduated from Harvard, right? , because how? How do we prove that they did? Like you literally just put in the years and the thing in the LinkedIn, like we don’t have to submit something, but imagine, and this is where we’re going.[00:11:00]

    [00:11:00] Brain: When we, in, let’s just say three to five years, every single thing, every time we, we, we finish, uh, a training. Every time. Let’s say you finish your master’s degree, you’re gonna get an N F T into your wallet that says, on this date, this person, we verify. And the beautiful thing about that is it’s on the blockchain.

    [00:11:19] Brain: Nobody can edit it. It shows that this university gave it to you in your wallet. And so now like proof of experience, proof of what we’re doing. And that’s gonna go into things like an author, right? Like we’ve seen, you know, people that make claims. Like I’m a, you know, ti you know, I’m a New York Times bestselling author.

    [00:11:37] Brain: Like how do we even prove that, right? Like, I mean like right. You know, if someone does pretty good content marketing, you can pretty much make all the Google results. Say that I’m the bestselling author, but imagine if when you became a New York Times bestselling author, they gave you an N F T that represented and proved that you did that.

    [00:11:55] Brain: That’s where we’re moving this. And so the things that we’re hearing right now, a lot of it’s collectibles, a [00:12:00] lot of it is like this kind of investment strategy, but where we’re moving that matters for the audience is that if you. Good person doing good things, and you want to have proof of all of the good things you’ve done.

    [00:12:12] Brain: NFTs and the blockchain are gonna make that possible.

    [00:12:16] April: Oh my gosh. As an entrepreneur, I have a, now, based on what you just said, I have a hundred different NFTs. I wanna create for our people. Yeah. Uh, this, this is, and again, you know, we actually as a team have been talking about this for a long time when we took our break on the podcast, is that, you know, there’s these people that are like these sweet.

    [00:12:37] April: Business engineers that we would love to identify who they are that have been listening to this show forever, because they believe in what they’re doing and in our relationship with them and helping them do that. And so, uh, of course, I know our listeners now have so many ideas. They’re like, oh, I, I wanna create this for my really cool, you know, retreat that I’m doing to identify the people that are gonna go in there, go there.[00:13:00]

    [00:13:00] April: First of all, I’ve, I have a million questions, but I think the first two most important questions are where does somebody display their NFTs? Like it, do they get, obviously they get something to put on their website, because you’re right, we’re trained to go to the website and look at their bio page, but like, where, where do we put them to display?

    [00:13:21] April: Where could I go to check out your, like what you own and, and what identifies you as a person?

    [00:13:29] Brain: Yeah, so like, and this is, you know, this is where one of those things like the technology’s kind of keeping up with us as we go, and you know, just for context as well, like, you know, Starbucks just announced that they’re moving their entire reward system.

    [00:13:40] Brain: They, they’ve added on an N F T component. They call ’em, they call ’em digital stamps. Those are NFTs. Um, on Instagram, they’re calling ’em digital collectibles at the moment, so I can post my digital collectible on, actually, if you go to my Instagram account, my last three posts, two of them are actually NFTs that are verified.

    [00:13:59] Brain: So you can click [00:14:00] on the photo, it’ll pop up and tell you what the photo is. But if you say, I wanna more information, you’ll click a button and it’s gonna open up a marketplace that’s called open. And so right now open c.io is the most popular marketplace. But I want you to think of opens. See, kind of like Amazon, where Amazon doesn’t really own any of the products that we, we go to Amazon for.

    [00:14:23] Brain: They’re owned, they’re somewhere else, but it’s like kind of like that display dashboard front door. But the ownership component is a tied to what we are, what is referred to as a digital wallet. And this is where right now on like I, I tell people a lot of times, I want you thinking about the use cases and thinking about the value and start building, okay, how do we, how do we get this to our audience?

    [00:14:45] Brain: What, who are the people that we would want to create? But some of the technology is still a little bit hard. The barrier to e entry is a little high because there’s this wallet that you know that it most people know. The wallet’s called Meta Mask is the name of the wallet that is most. [00:15:00] But the thing about meta mask wallet is that like I could, I could technically send you to a, a, a portfolio landing page and you could see everything that is in my meta mask, but it would feel very like disconnected cuz you would see like a picture of a monkey.

    [00:15:15] Brain: You’d see some of my own art. You’d see art that I’ve bought. From like a collector. And so where we’re moving is that we are going to be able to display these in a more transparent way. And some of the tech is coming, like right now, like even Instagram, when I open Instagram to post my digital collectible, it says Connect your wallet.

    [00:15:34] Brain: I collect that, it, it opens up a pop-up and says, do you wanna authenticate like your wallet to Instagram? Which is what I’m doing technically in that, like posting there to Instagram. But that’s where things get a little bit overwhelming because it’s like, well, how do I see someone else’s? How do I, you know, get some on my own?

    [00:15:51] Brain: And then I, I know the question that comes afterwards is like, well, how do I create my own NFTs? Right? Like, now I wanna, I wanna create like that, that same piece. And [00:16:00] the beauty of it. There’s lots of different options and ways to do it. Just recently, just this week, Reddit, which is, you know, Reddit is one of the largest social communities in the world.

    [00:16:11] Brain: They just rolled out NFTs over the last three months that they deal it all natively in the Reddit platform. So if you’re a Reddit user, you could click on your avatar and say, I wanna create a digital collect. That represents me and they would actually allow you to buy it. You could buy it with us dollars, you know, and they were ranging from like 15 to a hundred dollars.

    [00:16:31] Brain: Now it feels weird cuz you’re like, wait, why am I buying my avatar? But we also have to remember our kids are buying Roblox skins and, you know, halo, uh, avatars and I mean, everything Yeah. In this world is very digital skin. Like, and I will just tell anyone, once you do it, once you’re kind of. Oh, I kind of like that I get to purchase and own something that represents me, right?

    [00:16:55] Brain: Because like if someone went to my Twitter account route right now, you’ll see that like my [00:17:00] Twitter account is a, is a, my photo is an octagon, not a circle. The reason that is, is because I’ve verified that what I’m displaying is an N F T that I own. And so it’s actually built into Twitter as well right now.

    [00:17:13] Brain: But I think the bigger picture of this is where we’re going is eventually digital wallet. Will be the new single sign on for everything. So rather than saying, do you wanna log in with your email, your Facebook, or your Gmail, what it’ll say is, do you wanna log in with your Facebook, your email, or your digital wallet?

    [00:17:31] Brain: And what the beauty of that digital wallet is, which is different than Facebook, different than Google is, I own the wallet. No one has the keys to it. Now here’s the downside of. I, if I lose the password, I lose access to my wallet cuz I, I own it, right? There’s no like, there’s no digital place that I can call up and say, can you reset my password?

    [00:17:52] Brain: It’s like I am the owner of it. And so we’re moving toward the, the framework of this is called decentralization, but we’re not there and like, [00:18:00] That’s where I think everyone can get very overwhelmed. I, I’m not like a crypto, like massive crypto fan. Like I look at cryptocurrencies as kinda like investing, like kind of stock market investing.

    [00:18:09] Brain: But I don’t look at crypto in the same way that I look at NFTs for entrepreneurs. So for those that are thinking about this, I always say, like, my number one tagline is, I got lots of taglines. That’s kinda what we do. But, um, the, the one that I always say is, you wanna be a collector. Before you’re a creator, and that’s very hard for someone that preaches, press the damn button.

    [00:18:28] Brain: Like I, I will promise you, once you buy your first N F T and like Starbucks is rolling it out here in the United States over the next two months, all of a sudden you’re gonna be like, oh, I can buy this in Starbucks. It’s gonna give me a discount, and I’m also gonna have a chance to be sent. To Peru on this exclusive, you know, expedition to share how Starbucks does their copy process.

    [00:18:50] Brain: Like that’s how they’re kind of doing it. So we’re seeing the onboarding coming in lots of different ways. But yeah, it’s a very, um, the tech, the tech simplifying the technology is where [00:19:00] we’re at right now in this onboarding, you know, kind of N F T world.

    [00:19:04] April: That explains so much. Um, can you share a little bit about your process in going through, in creating your A D H D coin?

    [00:19:13] April: Can you talk a little bit about like the learning curve that you went through? Um, share with everybody what that coin is and you know, the. How you came to decide that that was what you wanted to do, and really just H how did you actually do that? I know we don’t have a ton of time, but kind of high level so people at least understand it’s like we don’t know what we don’t know, and so I think that would be really helpful.

    [00:19:35] Brain: Yeah, so there’s so NFTs. Technically, if you think about it this way, it’s a token that has a piece of art that is the front door, like the demonstration of it, right? So if you think about that non fungible token, well, there’s also tokens that are creator coins that allow you to create your own economy.

    [00:19:52] Brain: And so I was actually looking at Patreon. I’m a huge fan of Patreon. Love what Patreon can represent. I’m a big fan of like Mighty [00:20:00] Networks and a lot of these, uh, you know, really nice, uh, communities that we can build the problem, become. When you’re monetizing or you’re creating some kind of, you know, uh, economy there, you’re attached to the platform, right?

    [00:20:12] Brain: So like, if you’re building on Patreon, someone’s, it’s a subscription model. Well, goes back to my first comment on like, I wanna reward my super fans and I don’t want it to be just pay to play. And so in the, what I created, uh, a little over, uh, 19 months ago, 20 months ago, was a crater coin. Now I will tell you, I was gonna launch on Patreon and someone presented this option of a coin and I was like, I’ll try it.

    [00:20:36] Brain: I’ll, I’ll sure, I’ll, I’ll see if that works. Um, it took me eight months of trying it to figure out like what the hell this whole thing is, but what is beautiful about it? Different than what? Like a traditional subscription model is, is I have a coin that is backed by a 16 z, one of the largest venture capital companies in the world.

    [00:20:56] Brain: And what the beauty of that is, it allows people to [00:21:00] buy and sell coin. Kind of like, if you think about it, it’s investing in, in the community that I am building, but you don’t actually have to buy or sell to, to benefit from it. So here’s the examples that I would use is, If you engage in our discord, which is where our community hangs out, or if you listen to our podcast, I will often give away coins and, and reward people for saying, Hey, what anyone that clicks on this link, you’re gonna get five d h ADHD coins.

    [00:21:28] Brain: Now, A D H D just happens to be the name that I use. The coin could be named anything. But what works out really neat on this is that there are people in my community that have spent $0. On my coin, but they’ve been actively engaged supporting me and they’ve, they’ve been rewarded with coin and they’ve been able to get to a certain level of coin and based on what they’re holding, it unlocks certain things.

    [00:21:53] Brain: So, and this is where it’s like a real big difference between subscription and non-subscription is that you don’t send me the coin. [00:22:00] To partake in the things that you get. So one of the examples is, uh, every Friday I do a co a call for those that hold 93 coin or more. 93 happen to be my hockey number. So I just use that as the benchmark.

    [00:22:12] Brain: And the beauty of it is I have people that join that call. They have spent $0. On the coin, but they’ve been active in my commuting. I have others that joined the call that found out about it a week ago, and they said, Brian, um, I wanna get on that call, but I don’t, I’m not gonna spend months going in your discord.

    [00:22:29] Brain: I don’t got time for that. I’m like, okay, well, you can buy 93 coins. Now, the beauty of it is all you have to do is hold them. You don’t send them to me as a, as the entrepreneur, as the creator. Now you might be saying, well, well Brian, how do, how do you get rewarded? Like, how do I benefit from that? Well, I hold.

    [00:22:46] Brain: Over 50% of the coin. And the more people that hold the coin, the more the coin’s value goes up. Now, on top of the fact that I can transact in it, actually anyone can transact in it. So I had someone in my community that said, [00:23:00] Hey, I just brought some brand new LeBron James sneakers and I would love to trade them for a D H D coin because I wanna join that call.

    [00:23:09] Brain: But I don’t have a financial means. Well, they happen to be my size, but it could have been anyone. And I said, okay, I will send you a certain amount of a D H D coin. He sent me those sneakers. He’s now able to participate on the call and join. And the beauty of it is if he no longer wants to be a part of my community, he can actually sell those coins and move forward.

    [00:23:30] Brain: And so, like unlike what you know, like I, I think of it like from like a gym membership or even like your favorite online course, we’ve all bought online courses. We we’re about 30% complete and we’re like, you know what? I no longer need this, or I’ve changed, or I, my life is gone. The, the hardest part of that is you kind of felt like it’s a waste, right?

    [00:23:48] Brain: Like I bought it, it’s over, but what if you owned one of those limited seats or a certain amount of coin? Got you. That access, well, now there’s like that ownership exchange, which is that same ownership that exists in aee, [00:24:00] so the crater coins is, I would. There’s a few, there’s not many of us that have it.

    [00:24:04] Brain: Uh, one of the better use cases out there is Joe Peli, who’s kind of known as the godfather of content marketing. Um, he does it to where if you, if you share his newsletter, he’ll give you $20 of the coin for every person that signs up. And then if you have a hundred of his coin, You get free merchandise and you get access to an exclusive chat that he replies to on a regular basis.

    [00:24:28] Brain: For him, he’s using it as affiliate marketing, uh, play, but rather than just giving someone dollars that they can go spend somewhere, he’s giving them like investment into his brand, the tilt coin. And so those are like, to me, the tilt coin. It’s probably the best use case other than myself and, and Joe and I have worked together on kind of building our arenas, but these are the things that are moving forward.

    [00:24:48] Brain: And if it sounds a little foreign and complex, it is, but we are moving to a world where much like Patreon or membership sites seem very foreign for many years. Eventually [00:25:00] it’ll become the native piece that says, you know what? I wanna, I wanna be a part of the Sweet Life community. I wanna hold the sweet life coin and I want to, I wanna invest in what we’re building as a whole.

    [00:25:10] Brain: And the beauty of it for us as entrepreneurs is you don’t need thousands and thousands and thousands of people. It’s really just your core group of people that are allowing you, kind of explore and grow from, you know, your coin. That is so

    [00:25:21] April: fascinating and I, uh, great examples. Thank you for putting them in a way that helps for us to understand.

    [00:25:27] April: And I know that immediately our, our listeners are going, okay, well what do I currently have? What value am I creating? How well am I doing, bringing in community? Uh, and it’s really a good almost. Check for how we are as businesses saying are, are we continuing to create things that are community driven?

    [00:25:46] April: Are we, you know, crowdsourcing type of things that we’re doing? Are we caring about those people that did buy that course and that didn’t finish it? Cuz 98% of people don’t finish ’em anymore. And, you know, are we actually caring about [00:26:00] what’s happening with our content and making sure that our content and our teachings are, are actually being immersed into the world in a way where other people can.

    [00:26:09] April: Participate in it. Thank you for sharing your experience in this. And I also, I mean, that is exactly what you were saying. So it’s important, it’s important for our listeners to know that immediately people are like, oh my gosh, I wanna create my own thing. Right? But I don’t hold any coin. And I was even confused when you were saying, because I, like, I have my Coinbase wallet where like my, my Bitcoin and you know, my Ethereum and stuff is, but that’s not even what we’re talking about here.

    [00:26:35] April: Right. And so, So many different, I think that a glossary. Um, do you have a glossary of terms ?

    [00:26:42] Brain: I I have a podcast. One of the, one of the episodes that’s super popular is it’s 41 terms of web three that everyone should know. And I literally go through all 41 terms. There’s, there’s a YouTube video on it as well.

    [00:26:52] Brain: I’ll send you the link so you can put it, uh, in the show notes for anyone that wants cuz it trust me. Okay. The terms are as just as Confus like I worked in the government [00:27:00] and everything has an acronym and was confusing in terms and when I got in this space, I was. What is like, I was like, I need a wallet.

    [00:27:06] Brain: And then what’s the difference between a coin and a crypto and is it exchange the same thing as a, it, it, it blew my mind. So I did an entire episode, uh, you know, and I’ll give you that link so you guys can share that out as well.

    [00:27:18] April: Okay. For sure. So we’re gonna share that one, and then I’m also gonna share your very first, your very first, you know, n F T 365 podcast episode that you dropped.

    [00:27:26] April: I mean, li I, Sam, my youngest and I listened to it all the way, driving down from the mountains and we kept like hitting pause and then rewinding it and we’re like, wait, wait, wait. Let me hear that again. Let me hear it again. And by the time we got down the mountain, we totally understood the importance of our brand identity.

    [00:27:42] April: In these NFTs and it was, it was so cool and it was just so, it was just such a great way to understand and wrap our head around it. So yes, the glossary one, we’ll make sure all of you guys have it in the show notes. And just if you aren’t really sure where to start, then just start at the beginning and just go with Brian and [00:28:00] grow with Brian.

    [00:28:01] April: Um, thank you so, so, so much. And is that the best place for people to connect with you and follow what you’re doing here because you truly are a thought leader in this space. So how is the

    [00:28:10] Brain: best way. Twitter is like my, you know, my favorite. I’m active everywhere. So literally wherever your favorite platform is, they can find me.

    [00:28:16] Brain: Um, but, you know, I did, I have done a daily podcast now, 300 and today’s date, 346. So 346 days in a row out, missing a day. But that’s a lot of content, right? And so I always tell people, you know, starting at the beginning, I’ve purposely made it evergreen. I purpose. It’s not news heavy, it’s not crypto bro heavy.

    [00:28:33] Brain: It’s not like my goal is to t. What is going on? And so, you know, start at the beginning and then you can kind of pick and choose, like kind of going through the, the titles of the episodes. The podcast is in every platform. We also do it if you’re not like a, uh, if you wanna like learn with some visual represe.

    [00:28:50] Brain: Representation. Uh, we also have the YouTube, uh, as well that I do a video. Some of them I put like, you know, video with like, you know, a lot of instruction on the screen. Others, I just kind of [00:29:00] try to talk through things at, at, at that level. But yeah. Uh, NFT 365 is the, is the podcast and we’re counting down, we’re almost to a a year.

    [00:29:08] Brain: Uh, and that’s where the 365 came from is, uh, I. I blindly thought, well, what if I did a daily show and I didn’t think I could do it? But now we’re close to the finish line and, uh, I kind of proving myself wrong, but yeah, NFT 365 is the best place for sure.

    [00:29:21] April: Are you gonna stop on 360 6? So are you gonna take a day

    [00:29:25] Brain: off?

    [00:29:25] Brain: Off?

    [00:29:25] Brain: Off

    [00:29:26] Brain: So there will be an episode on day 360 6, but I, I am not continuing every day. The, the podcast will continue. We’ll have a couple episodes a week, kind of as we move into season two. Um, but yeah, I can never do, uh, it, it’s the, it’s the craziest, most exciting, most overwhelming, most sacrifice I’ve ever had to do for any content.

    [00:29:45] Brain: But, um, great. I, yeah, I’m very glad that, uh, season one will be coming to our finale Very.

    [00:29:51] April: Oh my gosh. Yeah. Yeah, I’m sure. I’m sure you did. You did more than what I’ve done in five years and in a year. It’s crazy. And I needed a year off from that. [00:30:00] Right. So I can only imagine. Thank you so much for creating all that though, because that’s where I learn and that, I mean, that’s where all of us learn is you forging the way and making it in a way that’s easier for us to understand.

    [00:30:10] April: Because you came from this space too. Like you have the ability to explain it to, you know, the, the knowledge, the. Economy as well and being in, you know, the, the, the, also like the government background and the speaker and the millennial stuff and you just have the ability to just bring it all the, be together and explain it in a way that actually makes sense to us.

    [00:30:30] April: And I appreciate you so much for that. Thank you so much for being back here on the show and we will be following along and tapping into all of your faucet of wisdom more and more. Thank you. I appreciate you.

     
     

    How To Personalize ChatGPT AI To Create Authentic Content To Grow Your Coaching Business – with April Beach and Amy Yamada

    How To Personalize ChatGPT AI To Create Authentic Content To Grow Your Coaching Business - with April Beach and Amy Yamada

     

    Summary:

    This show is for established experts, coaches, consultants, authors, and speakers who want to learn more about how you can grow your business, streamline your marketing, speed up your content creation, and reach more clients using ChatGPT AI. ChatGPT and AI are quickly changing the world of content creation. From the way we create courses, to social media, to expert content, using AI is a powerful tool to save time and gain more eyes on your brand. In this episode, we’re diving in with Amy Yamada, ChatGPT expert on how to get started using AI in your business.
     
    In this episode, we cover the first 3 steps to customize ChatGPT to sound like your authentic voice including a bio-generator to train AI to know and sound like you, how to find your writing style, and the importance of using prompts to customize the software for your business.

     

    At the end of this episode, you will: 

     
    1. Know the first 3 steps to get started with ChatGPT
    2. Understand how to use ChatGPT to interview you so it gets to know you and generates authentic content
    3. How to use your AI authentic generated content to expand your use of ChatGPT and stream your content, course creation, and marketing copy faster. 
    Resources mentioned: 
    Download The Ultimate Guide To ChatCPT 
     
    Download The Ultimate Guide To Million Dollar Online Offers™ https://www.sweetlifeco.com/onlinebusinessguide
     
    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    278

    [00:00:45] April: Hi you guys. Welcome to episode number 278 here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. I’m April Beach, founder of the Sweet Life Company, host here on this. Sweetlife podcast, and we are known for delivering business trainings and coaching that you would [00:01:00] pay thousands for if you went to buy them somewhere else. If you and I have never met before, I’m an online business architect and an offer engineer, and I help experts, coaches, consultants, authors, and speakers scale your business past a million dollars by creating million dollar programs, courses, training programs, retreats, as well as content licensing and certification programs for high profit, deep impact lifestyle freedom.

    [00:01:26] April: So if you’re ready to level up your business and build your next level of your offer ecosystem and your million dollar genius programs, you are in the right place. And this episode is brought to you by our complete online guide. Two engineering million dollar online offers.

    [00:01:44] April: You can download the guide completely free by texting the word guide to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0, or simply by going to [00:02:00] sweetlifeco.com/onlinebusinessguide. Welcome to the show. This is part two. Like, I’m gonna whisper . We had an amazing episode last week with our guest, and so frankly, if you’re here and you’re dropping in and you didn’t listen to episode number 277, you should actually take a second and go listen to that because last week. On the show, we dove into all of the foundational very important things that coaches and consultants and service-based providers should know about using Chat G P T to scale your systems and create authentic content.

    [00:02:36] April: This part two, and I’m so excited about having our guest, Amy Yamada back here on the show. If you do not know Amy, she’s a seasons business coach who empowers established coaches to grow their business in a way that is fully aligned with their authenticity and their desired lifestyle. And she has been doing this for 11 years.

    [00:02:58] April: What makes Amy so [00:03:00] special besides all the other things that she does, is she has, she has this model, okay, you’re going to hear about this today. She has a method, a proven method. You know, we talk about creating proven methods all the time. Here on the podcast. Amy has one, and her proven method helps coaches and consultants really develop a brand of authentic.

    [00:03:20] April: That that is lives its fullest, right? What is interesting, what we’re talking about here in the show is she is turned that framework of hers into using artificial intelligence, which frankly, you and I both know, we don’t have to say it here. That’s one of our concerns about AI is how do you make it authentic?

    [00:03:39] April: How do you make it unique to you? How do you keep it in your voice? And those are all of the things that we are talking about here on today. So I’m gonna stop talking so we can get right to Amy. Again, thank you so much for being here. This is one of those great episodes we would really, really love for you to share.

    [00:03:56] April: We don’t have any advertising on here. I have refused advertisers for six [00:04:00] years on this show, frankly, cuz they annoy me when I’m listening to podcasts. But we really rely on you guys to up arrow and share this episode on LinkedIn and Instagram. Please tag Amy, tag me and use the hashtag Sweet Life podcast because this show. Is a game changer and it would really mean a lot to us if you took a second to share it. Okay, we’re gonna dive in episode number 278 with Amy Yamada. All about getting started in setting up chat G P T to be your authentic voice. Let’s dive in.

    [00:04:34] April: All right, you guys, we are back for part two. This is episode number 278. I wrote down 288 on my notes, so sorry if I confuse you guys in the last episode, but this is episode number 278 with my friend Amy Yamada, who is a ushering us into the world of AI content creation and using, uh, Chat GPT. And listen, guys, frankly, I’m so new to this, I [00:05:00] was calling it chat like G B T for at least three weeks, and one of my kids had to correct me.

    [00:05:05] April: So, um, if you’re like me and you are as new to this as I am, then you’re definitely in the right place. If you missed last week, All right, so last week’s show we talked with Amy about what is this tool, um, special use cases right now for coaches, consultants, and service-based experts, what to be ready for, uh, the importance of, of, as Amy says, bringing.

    [00:05:30] April: Um, the human voice into AI, but, so we do want you to go back and listen to last week’s show, but we’re just gonna do a little catch up here and I want my friend, Amy to introduce herself again and share with you about what we’re diving into here on this show. Yeah.

    [00:05:45] Amy: Thank you for having me back for this second episode. I’m super excited about today’s episode. Um, uh, as I mentioned last time, I’ve been a business coach for the past 11 years and my, the core elements of what I’ve taught over the last 11 years have been all. Your authentic [00:06:00] voice, deep connection, and really having a message that is from your heart to your ideal client’s heart.

    [00:06:05] Amy: So I’m just all about the human element of being a, uh, of being a coach, a mentor and expert influencer. And what, cause I would notice that even when humans were writing their own copy or creating their own content, I would look at it, I’m like, wait, like you’re not connecting deeply enough. So I always love to bring in this deep connection element, like bring in who you are.

    [00:06:23] Amy: So when AI came to be what it is today with all the rage on Chat G P T. I initially was resistant to it. I’m like, this is artificial, right? It’s like this little robot that has no heart about, hold on. What if I was open to this technology and brought in everything that I’ve been teaching for the last 11 years, and bring in the messaging, the authenticity, the humanizing elements into this tool, and my mind was literally blown over and over and over again, and still is to this day.

    [00:06:52] Amy: So I am taking a stand. Ironically, humanizing ai, bringing in our authentic voice and knowing how to use this tool so [00:07:00] that we’re optimizing the input. And for those of you haven’t used it yet, don’t worry, you’ll get there in order to get the most quality output from the tool. So I’m excited to dive in today.

    [00:07:10] April: Uh, I’m excited too. So, and, and this is so important because. Of be besides the obvious, uh, a use case for me is when, uh, the very first time I tried to use it, before I started learning from you, I think I plugged in something like write me, uh, an article on licensing content. Right. And it, I mean the, the quality, the information in there was good.

    [00:07:31] April: But it would never be in a voice I used. And I thought, I, I said, my people would immediately know that that was never me that wrote that. I would never say it that way. It, this is absolutely not gonna work. And so I stopped and I was like, I’m not using this thing, this thing that’s never gonna work for me because it’s clearly actually not me.

    [00:07:48] April: And, and then you came along and, and you were talking about No, no, no. I’m gonna actually show you how to use it and have it really truly become your authentic voice. And that’s what we’re diving [00:08:00] into to today. Yes. Which I’m so excited about . So you know, which is also why, you know, my kids can’t use it to write their school papers cuz they’re teachers would be like you.

    [00:08:09] April: I know you don’t know that word. You really don’t know that word, right? , you know, so, so let’s go ahead. Let’s talk about what we’re gonna talk about today. Today. It’s super exciting. We’re talking about getting started with chat G P T in the way that Amy helps you humanize it and make it sound like you.

    [00:08:28] April: And by the way, before we get started, you all listen to me here. Look at me. If you’re watching this video. Pause this for a second and go download the guide. Okay. So if you haven’t yet downloaded Amy’s ultimate Guide to Chat GPT, you’re gonna want it because it’s gonna be important to combine what we’re learning about today with that guide, and it’s just gonna explode your results with this.

    [00:08:50] April: So you can text ChatGPT to 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0 or you guys can go to [00:09:00] where the show notes are for the show@sweetlifepodcast.com slash 278, and you can download it right there. And it’s, believe me, it’s worth your time to pause us and then come back to us. So let’s imagine you just did that. All right, carry on, Amy. Let’s talk about W what are, how do we get started with this? You know where you’re in there and you’re looking at this prompt. I, it’s just like, and I, you know, it’s kind of this blank, what do I do now?

    [00:09:24] Amy: And that’s, that’s, that’s how I initially used it. I think that’s how most people initially used it. They put in some like, quick prompt and then what it, what it creates is like not us at all, and truly sounds like a robot because it is. And, uh, and so one, once I got really deep into this, I, I really thought about, okay, how can we make sure that it sounds like us? And so, just like anything in life, what you get out of it is truly what you put into it.

    [00:09:51] Amy: It’s a reflection, it’s a direct re reflection. And so ultimately, uh, I designed what I call the Heart speech model. And that’s all [00:10:00] outlined in the ultimate guide to Chat GPT for online coaches, which all of you now have access to. And um, and so I’m not gonna go into the all of it cuz we would need like a full day, but I’m gonna give you the highlight reel of what I consider the most important elements, uh, three elements that I’m gonna go through. So,

    [00:10:14] April: yeah, and it is important. So if you guys, if please, if you have the guide, make sure you have it handy. Otherwise, just pause and take notes while Amy’s taking you through this, because this is, this is direct implementation. Yes.

    [00:10:26] Amy: Yes. So, so the the, what we really wanna do is have ChatGPT get to know you. Okay. And you know what’s funny? When, when you were talking about even having a hard time, like saying Chat GPT or saying it, Uh, when I was doing a little voice transcription, I said it so quickly that the way it was transcribed was Chachi Petite . So ever since then, my community and I have nicknamed Chat GPT, Chachi

    [00:10:53] April: That’s why I’ve heard you say that. I like why they come up with it. That’s awesome.

    [00:10:57] Amy: Yeah. And so now I think of ch actually, [00:11:00] I, I think there’s like a deeper meaning. I would say there’s a deep meaning to. I’m like, oh, maybe I, it accidentally happened that way so I could already humanize this thing. So it has a name, right?

    [00:11:09] Amy: And so I like to lovely call it Chachi. And I imagine this cute little robot that sits on my desk and it’s like, and it has a little heart. It’s so cute. So Chachi, so hear me say Chachi. It’s ChatGPT, it’s the same thing. Um, so the first thing we wanna do is have Chachi get to know you. And one way that it can get to know you is to have interview.

    [00:11:28] Amy: So there is a section of the guide that’s called the bio generator where it’s going to write your bio and there’s a specific prompt in the guide where you are telling Chat GPT, Chachi, that you are an expert interviewer. I don’t have it in front of me, but it’s basically saying interview. Interview me with one question at a time about my business until you have enough information to write a Forbes profile on me like a Forbes level profile.

    [00:11:55] April: Yeah. So you’re basically sitting there telling Chachi that he or [00:12:00] she or it or whatever you all want your Chachi to be. Yep. Um, is, is is an expert interviewer. Yep. And then asking him to interview you. That’s right. Or to interview you. Fascinating.

    [00:12:11] Amy: Exactly. Mm-hmm. , and think of it this way, if you were to work with a human copywriter, for example, right? Yeah. If you, if I said to a co, like if I say I had a copywriter, Her name was Lisa, and I said, okay, Lisa, you’re my new copywriter. Um, I have a workshop coming up. Write some copy about it. I’ll see you later. She’d be like, hold up, . Right, right. Like, I don’t know you. Right. So a great copywriter would sit down with me like at least initially to interview me, get to know me, get to know my voice, my tone, my style, my point of view.

    [00:12:41] Amy: What, who am I, what’s my story, right? She would get to know me. And then she’d wanna know more specifically about the workshop and what is it about, what are we, what are the benefits to the audience? Who is the audience, right? So all these elements like you, you can also do with with Chachi. So the first thing I, I would have it do is just go to the bio generator [00:13:00] section.

    [00:13:00] Amy: You’ll see the exact prompt that you can then put into chat G P T, so it can interview one question at a time and you just answer it. You don’t have to be the nice thing, okay? The nice thing is you do not need to be polished in your. It is not here to judge you. It’s here to support you. So just be messy with it, right?

    [00:13:17] Amy: Just answer the questions to your best of your ability, and then as soon as it has, usually it’s like seven questions or so that you answer, and then it’s, I’ll say, thank you for answering my questions. Um, here is your bio, and boom, it’ll write a bio based on your answers to it. Now, the bio itself may not be in your voice, and that’s.

    [00:13:36] Amy: It’s just one element for chat PT to get to know you. It might be a little bit more too, like too formal or bland or whatever, but it will have like the essence of like who you are, what you’re about, how you got to be in business, right? So that’s, that’s one of the steps for chat PT to get to know you, have it, interview you.

    [00:13:53] April: Mm. Okay. So, and, and I was always wondering why you led with that first, cuz I’ve heard you say that [00:14:00] before and now it completely makes sense. Mm-hmm. , so the tool itself remembers the user. So let’s talk about that a little bit and about how that works for people that might not be familiar with that.

    [00:14:11] Amy: Yeah, totally. So, um, well it, it remembers you. If you’re using the same chat, so this will make sense for those of you who are using it. And if you have it, just you know how it is. Like anything else, it’s once you start playing with it, you’ll get to know it better. But on the left column, you’ll start to see, anytime you start a new chat, it’ll create its own title of that chat.

    [00:14:32] Amy: So if you have put your bio in a chat, then it’ll remember you. Otherwise, I would say save it, like copy and paste it into another document. We actually have created a tool called the Prompt Generator. There’s one section of it, one tab of it, that’s called personalized, and it’s where you create what I call your authenticity assets.

    [00:14:50] Amy: So your bio, your VO here are the four assets. Your bio, your voice, which is your writing style. Mm-hmm. , your target audience, and then your products, [00:15:00] which could be whether they’re free offers or paid offers. So once, once you save these different elements that I call your authenticity assets. Now we’ve also added this, the heart speech to that section as well.

    [00:15:11] Amy: I’ll get into that. But now you’ve got this, this great place. Whether or not you have the prompt generator, it’s not the point. But if you have one document that you paste, like copy and paste from, Chat GPT into this document that has starting off with your bio, then you can bring it into any prompt that you do when needed.

    [00:15:28] April: Wow. Wow. And so it’s already there in the way you’ve set this up, the way you’re guiding like a self, like I said, myself and my team to go through this and, and guys we’re learning at this, and I’m nowhere as far a advance in, into this as I wish that I was at the recording of this. Um, usually when we drop this, I will be though promising you and promising me, um, that we will be further into this practice.

    [00:15:49] April: Okay? So that fir the bio generator is really important. So once we have the bio generator and you have. Set up then you talked about, uh, [00:16:00] finding the, the writing style, like finding that actual writing style that is ours. What, what does that look like? What’s that step two?

    [00:16:07] Amy: Yeah, totally. So that, that section is called, uh, finding your Voice, which is identifying your writing style. So this is where, again, in the guide, there’s a specific prompt. and what you’re gonna tell Chachi, again, you’re, you’re telling Chachi who it is, right? Saying, okay, you are an expert writing style analyzer. Right? And then, and then you can tell it using the sample below. Describe my writing style, something like that, right?

    [00:16:33] Amy: And so what you do is you put in this prompt and then you, you copy and paste something you’ve written that sounds like you, right? So whether it’s an email, a blog, a social media post, something that you’ve written that sounds like you. So you put in this, this prompt plus. This writing sample, and then you push enter, and then it’ll, it’ll then re respond to you saying your writing style is, uh, has enthusiasm and, and is very personable and you use, it writes a little paragraph [00:17:00] that summarizes your writing style based on what you’ve shared.

    [00:17:04] Amy: Got it. Fabulous. It’s been fabulous. Like it’s plus don’t we all like learning about ourselves, it’s kinda like, right, what’s my horoscope today? Right? It’s like, you know, like, you know when you see those little quizzes on

    [00:17:13] April: like, I was gonna say, that’s we’re all addicted to the Facebook quizzes.

    [00:17:16] Amy: Click bait

    [00:17:17] April: wait, what friend’s character am I?

    [00:17:20] Amy: Exactly right.

    [00:17:22] April: This is so cool. I mean, come on you guys, this is so cool. And, and let me remind you when she says in the. That’s the guide that she’s giving you for free with this episode, . So let see how important it is for you to have that, um, at least have access to it. And then you can listen to this episode again with the guide by your side.

    [00:17:40] April: Uh, so very, very important. Okay? So it knows. Who we are. Yeah. It knows our, our bio at this point. Yeah. It knows what our, our writing style that, that authentic voice. Uh, so that, you know, I, I won’t put out content that my audience knows. Certainly did not come from me. Right. And then what is that third [00:18:00] important step that you wanna bring us through today? Yeah. To help our listeners get set up.

    [00:18:03] Amy: Yeah. This is my favorite part, . Selfishly, it’s the heart speech, so, This to me is the juice. This is my secret sauce that I’m so excited to share with. , which is to truly bring your heart into Chat GPT. And the way that that I came up with this was something that I’ve done with my clients for years, which is when whenever I’d say, well, tell me what it is that you do, they would give me their like elevator pitch version that was so bland and not their heart, right?

    [00:18:35] Amy: And so I’d say, okay, let’s just set aside marketing and messaging and sales and scale. Let’s just set aside all that stuff. And from one human to another, I would take them through an exercise and close your eyes. drop into your heart, like really connected on an intimate level and think about what do you really wanna say about this topic?

    [00:18:54] Amy: If your, if your soul could speak, if your, the deepest part of your being could speak and share your point of [00:19:00] view about this topic. What do you really wanna say without editing yourself? And I mean, there have been moments when I, myself, have been brought to tears to hear what someone’s true, authentic voice is.

    [00:19:12] Amy: And so now the way we brought it into AI ChatGPT is. Transcribing your voice. Now there are extensions you can use online, but just to keep it super simple, I just have used either the notes section on my phone or Otter, you know, the app Otter that transcribes what you say. And so I just always recommend, I’m like, just connect in like, and it can feel in so what you’re by yourself, whatever connecting like.

    [00:19:36] Amy: Just say like, start recording. What I really wanna say is, and just go there and think about what’s a topic that is relevant to what you’re doing. So for example, with me, I’m speaking into humanizing AI authenticity, deep connection ChatGPT. So I can easily go there, right? Drop in. Like, you know what I really wanna say is I am such a stand for your authentic voice and being who you are and bringing your [00:20:00] gift into the world and the way to use this tool.

    [00:20:02] Amy: And I go on and on, right? And say my truth without editing myself. Then you’ve got the transcription copy and paste it into Chat GPT and then give it ano a prompt of what you want it to do with it. Right? So I can say, write a social media post about my upcoming workshop using my voice. That

    [00:20:22] April: is that to me, and it remembers that. Like, I mean, this is mind blowing. Okay. . I don’t, I wanna make sure our listeners picked up on something. Yeah. This is Amy’s method. This is her Heart Speech Method. This is her proprietary method that she’s used with her clients for years. Yeah. To go deeper, to have them step into the leadership that they have in their spaces.

    [00:20:43] April: So what she’s taught, and she has figured out how to put this into ChatGPT guys, this is, this is not something she just came up with. This is something that’s proven. That has been used in coaching and consulting businesses that has catapulted businesses that you know Amy is [00:21:00] known for, and she has now created that framework to bring into this, which is exactly what all of us want, which is exactly what all of us need in order to actually keep using it and or even try to use it because there is that fear.

    [00:21:16] April: Of us being, you know, like thinking that’s, everybody knows it’s not gonna be me or I don’t really wanna fall into AI. I love, I love writing my own stuff. Well, you are. Yeah. And I just, I see. I just, this is so powerful. So. Let me understand this because I haven’t gotten this far yet, admittedly. Yep. In your, in your, in your program. That, that I’m super excited to be in. So when I do this, when I insert this, it actually saves that like as a file, like my authentic voice is how does that, what’s the text side of it? Yes. Help me understand this.

    [00:21:50] Amy: Yes. So the tech side of it is, it, it will save it in a chat that you’ve already done. So you can pull up an old chat that has it. What I [00:22:00] recommend is to also have it in a separate document outside of Chat G P T. So again, in our program we have the prompt generator and we have a tab for it. But even if you don’t have the program, you can just have a Google doc, have some doc right where you save it just so you have one place you’re not having to dig through.

    [00:22:16] Amy: I’m sure as it evolves you’ll be able to just do a quick search for it and the, you know, and I know there’s other AI platforms, Jasper and whatnot, but for now, to keep it simple, I would say just have another doc that you. These elements also, uh, I know we’re, we’re focusing on these three, but there’s of course the ideal client avatar.

    [00:22:33] Amy: You know, so you’re identifying that as well. But once you have your authenticity assets saved, then you can pull it into a new chat, pull whatever part of your authenticity assets into a new chat and just, and then tell it what you want it to do for you. Yep. Oh, I can’t hear you. Are you muted for

    [00:22:50] April: a second? Yes. Uhhuh. . Yeah, I was. I was, my dogs were barking. Oh my God, this is great. Uh, my little chihuahua, he wants to do, he wants to do chat. I wonder what his voice would be.[00:23:00]

    [00:23:03] Amy: at this, this AI round table that I was at recently, there has been ai, like these people are like, again, these are genius. There is AI that has, has been able to understand the language of bees and bats. What, so what, what’s doing is it’s because there’s patterns that they notice in the language. Like, so for bees, for example, I was like, are you kidding me right now? That sounds fake, but he’s like, no. They notice the patterns and what, what bees often say to each other are stop or shush.

    [00:23:37] April: That is, yes.

    [00:23:38] Amy: Bizarre. And then with bats, bats have, um, baby talk, like when they’re talking to the baby bat and they have names for each other. I was like, this, this has to be like, I’m pretty gullible. But like, no, cuz it’s, and it makes sense. It’s noticing patterns. And the renewable conversation about whales and patterns with the whale community..

    [00:23:54] April: I, I know I was thinking dolphins, dolphin. I can’t wait to understand. You know, I, I think there might be some of that already. I mean, this [00:24:00] is, this is amazing. Well, my chihuahua is saying that I want treats, or you have to get off this podcast cuz I have to go outside and go. Totally is saying right now, just keeping it real here.

    [00:24:12] April: Uh, so this, this is, this is just mind blowing. I mean, the whole entire idea. Um, as, as a content creator for me, I, I love creating content, but I’m not fast at it. It’s never been something that has been speedy for me. I can’t just sit down and, you know, type out some stuff unless I’m really in flow state and I really have something to say and I’m really fired up about it.

    [00:24:38] April: Right. It, it’s not very common, but yet content like here on the show and everything that we do is. Is the centerpiece of what we do as a company. And so being able to learn how to use this tool to create it authentically for, for my voice and for what our clients really connect with. And then our, [00:25:00] our established area of expertise is I can’t wait.

    [00:25:02] April: Uh, and I know that our listeners can’t either, and that’s why they are here listening to this episode. Um, so let’s talk about next steps. If you guys haven’t downloaded the tool, make sure that you do that. Again you can text Chat GPT to 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. You can go to the show notes for this episode at sweetlifepodcast.com/278, and you also can go to Amy’s website because I think it’s really important.

    [00:25:34] April: One thing that we know is that, frankly, what we’re talking about here on this show, uh, Is going to change drastically in the next couple of months. So I want you guys to be following along with Amy. So as we continue to evolve into this and there’s more use cases and mu you know, more streamlined processes, I know Amy and her team are gonna be on top of that. So how can, uh, how can people follow you and make [00:26:00] sure they’re connecting with you? Yeah,

    [00:26:01] Amy: so just very simply, just go to amyyamada.com. and every social media platform that I’m on is just my name. So if you just look me up at Amy Yamada on your favorite platform, it’s likely that I’m there . So, perfect. There’s anything that I dunno about, but . Yeah.

    [00:26:14] April: So perfect. Uh, and then I will also say, you know, I, I invested my team and I invested in Amy into her program to, to help us utilize this and we’ll make sure. The, the links to actually join Amy in her programs to accelerate your teams. It’s really what it is.

    [00:26:30] April: It’s an acceleration into this in the most wonderful way. Um, we’ll be in our show notes as well and we’ll make sure that that information is provided for you guys too, and certainly an investment that I was really excited to make. So, I think it, I think it’s good for all of us. Amy, thank you so much for being on the show.

    [00:26:45] April: If you’re watching on YouTube, she has this beautiful Puget Sound Ocean behind her.

    [00:26:51] Amy: It’s actually a nice day, day in Seattle. So ,

    [00:26:53] April: it’s a beautiful day in Seattle. Yeah, I know. It’s . It’s probably rare. This it [00:27:00]

    [00:27:00] Amy: Sunshine .

    [00:27:02] April: All right. Well you guys, thank you for hanging out. Please share this episode with your friends. Um, tag Amy in this. If you share this, make sure you tag Amy. You can use the hashtag Suite Life podcast to expand the reach of this as well. And we really appreciate your help getting this information out. Have a great day. Thank you so much.

     

     
     

    Getting Started with ChatGPT AI To Scale Your Coaching Business- with April Beach and Amy Yamada

    Getting Started with ChatGPT AI To Scale Your Coaching Business- with April Beach and Amy Yamada

     

    Summary:

    This show is for established experts, coaches, consultants, authors, and speakers who want to learn more about how you can grow your business, streamline your marketing, speed up your content creation and reach more clients using ChatGPT AI.
     
    ChatGPT and AI are quickly changing the world of content creation. From the way we create courses, to social media, to expert content, using AI is a powerful tool to save time and gain more eyes on your brand. In this episode, we’re diving in with Amy Yamada, ChatGPT expert on how to get started using AI in your business.
     
    In this episode we cover what AI content creation is, use cases for ChatGPT AI, considerations for use in your business, and the future of AI in terms of ethical content creation and the concern for fake coaches and untrained professionals using AI to market. 

     

    At the end of this episode, you will: 

     
    1. Understand ChatGPT use cases 
    2. Understand what AI content creation is
    3. Know how you may want to start leveraging ChatGPT or similar AI in your business now
    Resources mentioned: 
    Download The Ultimate Guide To ChatCPT 
     
    Download The Ultimate Guide To Million Dollar Online Offers™ https://www.sweetlifeco.com/onlinebusinessguide
    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    277

     

    [00:00:45] April: Hi everybody. Welcome to episode number 277. This is the Next Generation of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast, and you are in the right place if you’re interested in knowing how to use AI to create content and scale your [00:01:00] business. This particular episode is brought to you by the Ultimate Guide to Building Million Dollar Online offers, which is a huge 20 page guide that downloads every single online offer and how to customize it for your business to scale your business in profit past a million dollars. It’s an amazing tool. If you have not grabbed it yet, go to sweetlifeco.com/onlinebusinessguide, or you can simply text the word guide to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0 and download this incredible tool. If you’re new here to the show. We don’t have any commercials. We dive right into the business training and the coaching that we have delivered here for now six years, and we are very, very glad that you are here. I’m April Beach. I’m the founder of the Sweet Life Company.

    [00:01:50] April: I’ve been a business coach and strategist for 27 years, and I am an offer engineer and a business architect, which means I help coaches, consultants, expert [00:02:00] speakers, and authors, scale their business by creating million dollar programs, courses, trainings, license programs, certification programs, and an offer ecosystem that gives you the life that you want. If you’d like to apply to work with us, you can do so by visiting sweet life co.com.

    [00:02:18] April: Okay, let’s dive into what you can expect from today’s show. So we’re talking all about ChatGPT let me give you a little behind the scenes. I’ve heard about this from my kids. You know, maybe you heard about from your kids too. That really wanted to use ChatGPT for school and then of course that was just, just nix right away as technically it should be. But you may have heard about using chat G P T or Jasper or another chat tool for a while and you know it’s coming, but you don’t actually know how to dive into it or what to do with it.

    [00:02:51] April: Well, that was a place that I was at. And finally, about a month ago, I dove in with our guest today, Amy Yamada. You are gonna absolutely love [00:03:00] her, and started exploring the world of AI. So in this episode, we are opening up to the, the beginnings of this. So we wanna make sure we’re having a great foundational entry point.

    [00:03:11] April: In this show, it’s an excellent episode for those of you guys who have an established business and you’re scaling. Okay? So we want to streamline your systems. You’re, you’re good at what you do, you’re a coach, you’re a consultant. You’re already very good at what you do, and we wanna utilize AI tools to help streamline your systems.

    [00:03:27] April: This episode is for you. We’re gonna dive into what chat G P T is, use cases for chat, G P T. And even the futures. I asked Amy about the futures and what we need to be ready for as an industry. We, in this show, at the end of this show, you are going to understand how you can use it in your business. You are going to definitely know whether or not now is the time for you to dive into using Chat GPT in your business, and you’re gonna hear some really powerful use cases on how other coaches and [00:04:00] consultants are using this.

    [00:04:02] April: If you don’t know Amy, she is absolutely a gem. She’s been a business coach for 11 years, as you’ll hear in her gold that she brings, is teaching entrepreneurs how to find their authentic voice. And so that’s why this is so special when we’re talking about using artificial intelligence with finding your authentic voice because n nobody actually could teach this, I think, as well as Amy, because that’s really her mission. And you also get to hear about that here. Uh, with years of experience in the industry and a reputation for excellence, Amy is a highly sought after coach known for her ability to help our clients achieve their fullest potential and live the life that they truly desire.

    [00:04:41] April: And so all of the show notes can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.com.277, including. And let me pause here. This is not like a hiccup in the recording, including the tool, the actual ultimate guide for using [00:05:00] chat GPT that Amy is giving you with this episode. And frankly, you need to grab it to utilize these, this episode

    [00:05:08] April: I usually don’t tell you guys what to do. Uh, I usually say, oh, and it’s your choice, you know, but if you’re gonna take the time to invest and listen to this episode, uh, and in future episodes on this, You’d be doing yourself a disservice if you didn’t download this guide, so that can be found in the show notes by visiting sweet life code.com/ 2 77, and let’s go ahead and dive in with Amy right now.

    [00:05:31] April: All right, you guys, I’m so glad that you’re here with us. This is episode number 277. And my friend Amy Yamada, is here and we are diving into probably the hottest topic. Actually, I was just telling Amy before we started recording that we literally moved around our content calendar here for this podcast so that we could talk to Amy about what we’re talking about here on this show.

    [00:05:55] April: So it’s really, really important. We’re so glad you guys are here joining [00:06:00] us today. So, Amy, You and I, we actually met joining a mastermind. I think we actually joined a mastermind at the same time, in the same month. A couple years ago. Yeah. But since then I’ve been paying attention and I’ve been following everything you’re doing and you’re leading with the one and only Chat G P T. Welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast. We’re so glad that you’re here. Tell everybody a little bit about yourself, your business, what you do, and then we’re gonna dive into this very, very hot topic.

    [00:06:28] Amy: Yeah, definitely. Thanks for having me. And you know, it’s so funny. Had we been talking just a few months ago, I would not be talking about Chat GPT. Right. Like I, this wasn’t even right. I mean, I, of course, I’d been hearing about AI, AI’s coming, the future’s coming, and I was just, you know, doing my own thing with my business, coaching business and, uh, really focusing on, on helping entrepreneurs, primarily coaches, established coaches and, and, uh, scaling their businesses and focusing on VIP days, lifestyle experiences, destination retreats, cuz I love all that in-person, deeply connected [00:07:00] stuff, right?

    [00:07:00] Amy: It just lights me up and um, and then here comes AI. And, and I was looking at it, I was like, wow. My, honestly, my initial, uh, feeling was resistance, right? I was like, I don’t know about this thing, because even AI right, artificial right artificial intelligence, like this feels fake and I’m all about authenticity and being real.

    [00:07:18] Amy: And so I was like, I don’t know about this. And I, I started to play with it and I just was like, ah, like this isn’t really doing it for me. But then I thought, okay, I’m gonna be open to. And I’m gonna bring in all of my, my passion around messaging, deep connection and really being your authentic self with everything you do and see how I can use it with this tool.

    [00:07:35] Amy: And everything changed. So , so I’ve been, uh, doing this, you know, business coaching for the last 11 years. I wouldn’t change it for anything. I love speaking and coaching and. And really at the end of the day, I love connecting with awesome people, finding out what their true gift is and making sure they’re getting it out into the world and, and having fun with, with it along the way. So…

    [00:07:54] April: uh, well, I think that’s so important that you said that because, and you’re, and you’re so good at what you do, [00:08:00] and then, that is why, that actually is one of the reasons why it makes you the perfect person to talk about and actually teach AI and AI content creation because you are known for helping people find their authentic voice.

    [00:08:14] April: And then you do exactly like I said, and then you look at something that is, that is artificial, uh, you know, software out there that is frankly, smart enough that it passed the bar exam for heaven’s sakes, you know, . Um, and, and, and how, and how do, how do we do that? How do we make it ours. And you know, a bigger question, which we probably should not dive into first, cuz it’ll just crash the whole entire episode.

    [00:08:36] April: But the bigger question is, is how do we differentiate between now you know, businesses that actually are established are expert businesses and those that aren’t. That are tapping into ChatGPT in other sort of software to create content that they frankly, actually aren’t even qualified to teach themselves.

    [00:08:54] April: There’s a whole, there’s a lot of ethical things around that. I mean, see what I mean? I’m like, we can crash this whole entire episode right now, [00:09:00] just going down that road. But let, let’s kind of talk about the basics. Let’s do an introduction to ChatGPT um, talk to us about like, first of all, explain to our audience. What is this thing?

    [00:09:11] Amy: What is it? Yeah, what is it? Uh, the, the, the, the most simplified version I can say is that it is a tool , like, just think of it as this emerging revolutionary technology. It is a tool that you can use in your business, in your life to streamline and simplify things. So technically it’s a, a type of artificial intelligence, you know, AI system.

    [00:09:35] Amy: Uh, if you look up the definition, you’ll see things like it’s a language model. What does this mean? So the, the way that I like to think of it is, This is a tool that all of us have access to. There still is a free version now. There’s a paid version for $20 a month. And it is, it is the wave of the future. I mean, it really is. And it’s here and it’s now, and I haven’t seen something as revolutionary as this since the invention [00:10:00] of our cell phones and then smartphones. Right. And before that, the internet. So it’s not some flash in the pan like buzzword, you know, that’s just like here temporarily. Like there will be early adopters and there’ll be late adopters and there might be someone like my friend’s dad who just decided I’m never getting a cell phone.

    [00:10:16] Amy: Right. , that’s very rare. . Right, right. Just like refused. Yeah. So anyway, but my point is, This is something that I, I truly can already see how it is changing the world, and it’s not here to overwhelm you. It’s a tool, just like the internet was probably overwhelming. I mean, it’s so hard, hard to remember what it was like without it, but I, I am dating myself, of course.

    [00:10:37] Amy: Right? I, I’ve been here. I remember. Yeah, I remember. I remember when email, when I first had an email, like I was in college and I was like, what is this email thing? Like, what? Right. , it’s just one another, another tool that we all have access to. And it’s incredible that now can do so much for you. And it’s beyond like using Google, right? It’s, it’s beyond that. So it’s, [00:11:00] it’s an AI tool that is designed to understand and generate or, and to understand, generate natural language. And then we’ll get into what that means. Yeah, yeah,

    [00:11:08] April: yeah. Okay. So a absolutely, and, and I agree with that. And, you know, we actually own multiple businesses and we do a, we do a lot with AI and, um, data kind of farming in, in one of our other companies. And it was really interesting because when I mentioned this to my kids in college and my kids on high school, they’re like, just a couple months ago, like you, they’re like, oh, yeah, yeah, we know about that. We’re not allowed to use that. It’s really, it’s really what they. Um, but it, it is interesting. I mean, these, these things have been slowly merging.

    [00:11:39] April: AI has been slowly coming, well, I can’t say slowly, it’s probably really fast, but, uh, you know, people like me have just really come to notice it. Um, and, and it is this wave that has definitely dropped into. Um, especially the coaching and consulting space. Just this week since we booked this show and Amy’s coming in to [00:12:00] work with our clients next week, you guys, and our intensive, I’m so excited about this, but since, since we actually plan this show, you know, I saw something, Kajabi has an AI thing and Discord has an AI thing, and you know, there’s all these, there’s all these things that are, that are happening, and so I’m like, okay.

    [00:12:16] April: I need to understand this. My team needs to understand us. We’re actually in one of your programs right now learning how to understand this. Mm-hmm. , but it is something that, you’re right, it is here to stay and it’s going to change the way that we do business. Mm-hmm. and change the way that we create content. So let’s actually go to that. Um, how, how are people using this tool? What, what are a couple of the, the use cases for ChatGPT

    [00:12:40] Amy: Yeah. Great question. One way that people are using it, especially in the coaching and consulting world, is for content creation. So think email, copywriting, social media posts, um, it can create like an outline of your workshop or if you wanna create a workbook for your workshop or worksheets for your workshop.

    [00:12:56] Amy: So it’s, it’s content creation. So [00:13:00] imagine going in, like, I know there’s people that are tuning in that have been using it, some that haven’t. So whether you’ve been using it or not using it, it’s all good. Just imagine being able to go onto a web page. And to type in and say, you know, I am a business coach and my ideal clients are established coaches, consultant, speakers, experts, and I am teaching them ChatGPT..

    [00:13:20] Amy: Uh, create an outline of a workshop that is about how to use ChatGPT to sound like your authentic voice. And boom, within seconds it will create a workshop outline that I can use and I can, of course, I can give it more in the initial prompt of what I want. So it’s, it’s more authentically me, but what it has access to is 175 billion parameters a database.

    [00:13:45] Amy: Billion with a B, right? 175 billion. And it’s, I mean, just imagine how, how resourceful this tool is to be able to bring in like what is going to be best for you and your ideal client for the outline of this workshop. Now [00:14:00] you can of course use and not use whatever you decide cuz I’m, the piece that is missing is authenticity, right?

    [00:14:06] Amy: The emotional right human element of it. And that’s where I come in with my heart speech model. But just imagine being able to use this tool if you haven’t used it yet, and say, Hey, I want this thing. And within seconds it creates it for you. Or then say, oh, now I would like for you to write a promotional email or a series of promotional emails for me leading up to this workshop.

    [00:14:24] Amy: Boom, it’ll create it for you. And then you give, if you give it more specifics in your prompts, it’ll be more aligned with your authentic voice. The, the, the list goes on. Blogs, people have used it even to write books. Um, it won’t write a book immediately for you, but it will, you know, if you say write a table of contents on this topic, it can do that. So there’s, it just is endless. But these are some initial ways that they can use it when it comes to content creation.

    [00:14:49] April: Yeah. Yeah. And again, I was just, um, getting ready to dive into something that Angela Laurie was doing about chat with book writing. Yeah. And I just wanna immerse myself in all of this. I [00:15:00] mean, because exactly like you said, and especially those of us that have been creating programs and trainings for decades, there are, these things took us months.

    [00:15:09] April: I mean, they’ve taken us forever to actually generate content. As a matter of fact, I just heard a statistic that it takes. I wanna, I’m sure I’m gonna butcher it, but it, you’ll get the point. It’s like 36 hours of work to generate. 20 minutes of teaching in a slide. You know, for, for us in the past it was just a statistic.

    [00:15:33] April: This, this company dropped it. Uh, and, and I was thinking, oh my gosh, this, but not anymore. Not anymore. This is, this is not the, not anymore. This is actually, this is actually not the case anymore. So, um, it’s certainly. , of course, my interest level being an offer engineer is it’s going to streamline the way that we’re teaching the world to engineer transformational offers and programs.

    [00:15:53] April: And so I’m very interested in, in, in hearing more about this and obviously diving in with your leadership and, and [00:16:00] having my team dive in as well, so, Now let’s talk about what do you think that those are amazing use cases. I’m sure everybody already is like, oh my gosh, how, how do I actually do this? How do I, and we’re gonna tell you guys how you can start with Amy and she has this amazing ultimate guide to get started that we’re gonna share with you guys.

    [00:16:17] April: So, um, what do you think that we. as entrepreneurs, as content creators, as thought leaders, what do you think we need to be ready for in the future? Now that we have AI tools like this? Yeah. Coming in and helping us, but maybe there is some little bit of competition with that as well.

    [00:16:36] April: For

    [00:16:36] Amy: sure. Just the sheer volume of content that’s going to be shared is going to to grow. I don’t have the statistics in front of me. Because people will have access to the efficiency and resourcefulness of this tool and be able to write content with within seconds, um, and repurpose it there. I mean, there’s so much you can do. So the volume of content is going to be [00:17:00] significantly increased to what it is now.

    [00:17:02] Amy: And recently I was, um, sitting at a, a round table, intimate circle of round table. Like people who are, who’ve been deep in AI way longer than I have. I mean, these, these men, I was the only woman there by the way. That was an interesting thing. I was like, yes, women in tech. Right? And so, but I was like, I can sit at this table.

    [00:17:19] Amy: And the thing that one of them shared was that, um, there is this statistic that says that in the near future, 90% of content that is out there will be AI generat. And so of course that can bring up something for all of us. Yeah. It’s like, well, what does that mean? And it, from my point of view, I, I know that there will be these elements that are like this content that is completely generated by ai.

    [00:17:44] Amy: And, and the, the, the negative side can be about uh, whether like there might be people that become fake experts. You know? Like I remember having a client of mine who just for fun, she tested, couldn’t write a book for me on this type of medical procedure. And she’s not even in the [00:18:00] medical world, but she was curious about right.

    [00:18:01] Amy: A friend that was dealing with this health issue. and she had to write a table of content. She’s like, okay, now tell me more about chapter one and chapter two and chapter. And sure enough, ul ultimately, kinda like what Angela, Laurie, I’m sure is speaking to, but with integrity, right? , um, it was able to like spit out ultimately a book that if my client Nancy decided, Hey, I’m gonna call myself Dr. Nancy, right? So there may be some, you know, some fake experts out there because, and it’s not that the content isn’t real, but who it’s coming from is not. There, there’s gonna be some of there. I’m sure there’ll be some of that. Um, and also like from my heart, the part that hurts my heart is that the piece that is most valuable from my point of view is the human being element.

    [00:18:43] Amy: So I am personally taking a sand for ironically, Humanizing AI and bringing in your authentic voice into it. I’ve been teaching authenticity and your authentic voice for over a decade, with your message, with your marketing, like being who you actually are, especially in the coaching and consulting [00:19:00] industry. Um, so that it we’re in a relationship based industry. So what’s most important Relationship? It’s trust, it’s honesty, it’s love, it’s compassion. Being real. And so this is the piece that I’m like, I want to help as many people that also care about authenticity to bring this into it. So, uh, so it is the, the world is changing.

    [00:19:21] Amy: I mean, not just in our industry, like truly the world. I mean, even, even like, Um, speeches are being written by AI, right? There’s, there’s so much, right? So it is something to, to keep an eye on, but I, I think that, you know, we’re standing for the good guys, right? The good guys who are gonna bring the authentic voice into it. They’re not saying, oh, the robots are taking over. It’s like, no. It’s a tool that we get to use just like we use the internet. So,

    [00:19:42] April: yeah. And, and I’m just taking notes as you’re saying this and, and humanizing AI and. That’s exactly why I wanted you on the show, and that’s exactly why I’m following your lead in this. And, and I’ve paid to have my team and, you know, learn how to use this. Yeah. And so this actually brings me [00:20:00] to, um, something else that I didn’t prepare you, I was gonna ask you, but That’s okay. Uh, but I, but I’m, but I’m sure you can answer it, or at least as, as much as you can project yet.

    [00:20:11] April: We talk about scaling companies, right? But you and I both do that. We teach coaches and consultants how to scale and a lot, a big part of that is our systems, our internal systems, our marketing systems. How do you see the activity and the roles within our internal teams changing? What roles have you had to like pivot some of your people to saying, Hey, listen. You know, chat, G p T is creating this for us. Yeah. And now we need to, you know, turn it into actual worksheets. It could be design or go back and, you know, plug it into our, our newsletter systems and our email marketing. How have you kind of had to rotate your team a little bit? Yeah. Frankly, to. I, I just feel like corral all this amazing content.

    [00:20:53] April: Yeah. And then we, in our company, we call it our content quarterback. Our quarterback takes our content [00:21:00] and, and she literally quarterbacks it out, right? Yeah. Like this goes to this, this goes to this, this goes to this. This is an event and this is a video. Right? And it’s a very important part of what we do. How have you seen your own team kind of changing in their activity in order to, to try to harness and, and frankly just get a grip on all of that? Could be, yeah.

    [00:21:19] Amy: Well, I like, I, you know, I’m, I’m, I’m very much glass half full , you know, kind of perspective. It’s like we can be that much more efficient with what we’re doing and so we can move faster and make a bigger difference. And I love. Um, now, uh, I’ll, I’ll do just a slight tangent in that, something that just as a, as a growing scaling entrepreneur myself with a team, something I learned over time was that, um, when it comes to managing money, you know, it’s, it’s about contract labor and I will just be vulnerable here. I learned over time that my contract labor percentage was too high for the size of business that I had.

    [00:21:54] Amy: So I had already started looking at that last year, reassessing my team, who I love and seeing [00:22:00] like what, what is it that I need to do to truly like lean out the team? So I just wanna share that because I know that, again, we’re about all about being real. Um, right. And then with chat, G P T and AI, it, you know, I know that there’s a also a fear around like AI is replacing jobs.

    [00:22:15] Amy: In some ways it is, you know, it can replace some jobs, but for those who are in fear of it, why not see the opportunity in it? So, for example, right, um, copywriters like I, as I started posting about chat, GPT, I literally have had copywriters messaging me like, Amy, you’re killing me. Right? Like, like, I’m like, I’m just one person.

    [00:22:33] Amy: Chat C PT is gonna be there whether I talk about it or not, but their fear has been this tool is taking over my job. And the way I like I respond to ’em is like, this is your time. Why? Mm-hmm. , because you can leverage this. So when it comes to team members, I would say to any team, anyone who is a team member, I would say leverage it and go to the person that you’re contracting for or working for and saying, Hey, I know we, this ChatGPT AI thing has become a [00:23:00] big deal.

    [00:23:01] Amy: I can see where you might think my job is replaceable. Here’s how I’m going to even bring more value to you because I know how to use it and to create a higher level of efficiency with what I do. So there’s just, yeah, these different ways to look at it, to use it.

    [00:23:14] April: Um, absolutely.

    [00:23:16] Amy: And uh, and really to me it’s like we can work so much faster. Create more time for other things. I mean, it’s, it’s just incredible what it can do.

    [00:23:25] April: Right. And I mean, we’re entrepreneurs, we’re gonna fill that time. It’s not like we, we create a chasm of time and we’re like, oh, all this time now we’re just gonna sit here , we’re gonna figure out something else to create and do with that time. For sure.

    [00:23:37] Amy: You know? Totally. Not like on vacation now, but, but I, but I love what I do, you know what I mean? Like, Isn’t this life about like finding what you love to do, whatever that is and just being mm-hmm. creating a life where you can just do it all the time. Like, why not? So I hear you. Absolutely. That’s so true. A

    [00:23:54] April: a absolutely yes. Like for me, I just travel more with my kids, you know? Just add on another month, you [00:24:00] know? I mean that, because that’s what we do, right? So it’s incredible. Alright, you guys. Okay. , Amy, first of all, well, we have a surprise for you guys. We’re actually recording two episodes here, so this is episode number 278.

    [00:24:15] April: Next week is episode number 279, and everything that we’re gonna be talking around here is going to be utilizing Amy’s ultimate guide to chat, G P t that she’s totally giving you for free, and it shouldn’t be free by the. With this show. Okay, so here, here’s one of the implementation steps. You guys know we always do implementation at the end of every show.

    [00:24:40] April: Go to the show notes on this page and you guys download it. And the shortcut, as you all know, to find the show notes is sweet life podcast.com/our episode number 2 77. Or you guys can text Chat G P T to 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 [00:25:00] 8 8 0 and we’re gonna include Amy’s link where you can just download this ultimate guide.

    [00:25:05] April: So that is job number. If you’re serious about this, okay? Even if it’s the only thing you do, even if you don’t share this episode, which we want you to, and you should cuz it’s amazing. Um, but you, you have to go download this because next week we are going to be, and Amy and I are right now, y’all know how this works.

    [00:25:22] April: You get to hear next week Amy’s going to be. Walking you through how to get started with chat, g p t, how to humanize this AI to sound like you. And it’s amazing what she’s gonna be bringing you through, but you, you really need to have the download tool for it to even, even make it more worthwhile, um, in the meantime.

    [00:25:42] April: So you guys all go grab that again. It’s episode 2 77, suite life podcast.com/ 2 77. Or you can text it like we said. Um, in the meantime. I really would love for people to follow what you’re doing, hang out with you, whether it’s Instagram, LinkedIn, and, and [00:26:00] please let Amy know you heard this episode so that she can connect with you even more here as well.

    [00:26:05] April: How can people connect with you to go deeper like we have as a company?

    [00:26:09] Amy: Yeah, and keep it so simple. Just go to amy yamada.com. Just go to my website and, uh, and of course, you know, when you receive the ultimate guide to chat G b t for online coaches, um, you will then receive emails from me. You can unsubscribe at any time.

    [00:26:24] Amy: Um, and then if you wanna look me up online, everything is under my name. So just use my name for Facebook and . Instagram, I don’t really use Twitter, but I do have a Twitter around, you know, LinkedIn. Everything is under my name, so I kept it really simple. Okay.

    [00:26:38] April: Super cool. All right. Thank you so much. I can’t wait for part two.

    [00:26:42] April: Sorry you guys, you have to wait till next week. But, but go grab the guide and uh, and, and we’re gonna dive in further. Um, but you don’t, you don’t have to wait until next week to connect with Amy, so. Alright. Thank you so much and, uh, let’s, let’s do it again. Seafood.[00:27:00]

     

     
     

    (Becoming Known) The In Person Networking System To Grow Your Online Business – with Elizabeth McFadden

    (Becoming Known) The In Person Networking System To Grow Your Online Business - with Elizabeth McFadden

     

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Summary:

    Networking, when done properly, is an overlooked gem of wealth to grow your online business. However few businesses actually have a networking strategy and fewer have a networking system. This episode is for CEOs in founders Hall looking to expand your brand reach, generate leads, build relationships, and therefore increase your profit in out of the box ways, with fantastic results. 
     
    In this episode we are diving into the system of networking and how you can do much more than show up to simply shake hands and kiss babies. This episode and unpacks strategic steps and actions that you should do before during and after in person networking events and attending conferences that will exponentially increase relationships and build ideal leads intentionally. 
     
    We’re diving in with CEO and founder of Novella Brand house, Elizabeth McFadden, as she shares her system of networking she’s used for years to become the leader in her local market and an online leading company with clients across the country. The system is intentional and when used correctly it will generate ideal results every single time.

     

    At the end of this episode you will: 

     
    • Learn Elizabeth’s networking strategy system
    • Know key actions you take before attending a conference or an event to Connect with the exact people you’re looking for
    • Understand what assets digital and physical you should bring with you to each of that and why
    • Have key strategies if you were an introvert to maximize networking opportunities in your own authentic way
    • And you’ll have a very specific after event step-by-step process that grows your list build strategic partnerships and closes deals
    Resources mentioned: 
    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    276

     

     
     

    (Becoming Known) The Secret Framework To Build A Million Dollar Talk That Moves People To Action – with Eileen Wilder Part 2

    (Becoming Known) The Secret Framework To Build A Million Dollar Talk That Moves People To Action – with Eileen Wilder Part 2

     

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for:

    Established coaches and consultants who are ready to take action and step into your next level of authority and influence through speaking. 

     

    Summary:

    This episode is for established coaches and consultants who are ready to take action and step into your next level of authority and influence through speaking, and for those who’ve felt the call to speak, but you’ve dragged your feet for one reason or another. 
     
    Eileen Wilder aka: Million Dollar Speaker, delivers a step by step workshop style two part episode and teaches you her winning framework for not only crafting your signature story but delivering talks that move people to action and even change the world. 
     
    Eileen taught so much gold that we’ve broken this episode into two. In this first episode #274 you’ll work with Eileen as she guides you to build your signature talk. In episode #275, Eileen breaks down the exact details of her formula to engage your audience, and move people to action in a way that the whole room is buzzing. 

     

    At the end of this episode you will: 

     
     
    1. Have your story board planned and the scene set for your signature talk
    2. Eileen’s winning framework and be able to apply it to your talk 
    3. Know that you can simplify your talk and create even more action
    4. Have Eileens Signature Talk Framework
    5. Know the secret sauce Eileen teaches her students to move audiences and bring massive emotion and action into the room
    Part 1 of this episode: https://sweetlifepodcast.com/274
     
    Resources mentioned: 

    https://www.becomeapaidspeaker.com/freetraining

    DM the words “April Beach” to Eileen on Instagram to get a free copy of her book @eileenwild 

     
    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    275

     

    [00:00:44] April: All right, so you guys are back for more. I don’t blame you. This is the part two of our teaching with Eileen Wilder. On how to establish yourself as a thought leader and truly grow and scale your company by using. , and if you didn’t yet, [00:01:00] please go back and listen to episode number 274, which was the beginning of this. 

    [00:01:05] April: Our guest expert is so powerful and she has so much to teach you that we actually broke this up into two separate episodes, and I wanna make sure that you don’t miss this in addition to that. These episodes come with a ton of free bonuses and including a free copy of Eileen’s book and how to tap into her frameworks and get free trainings on the things we’re talking about in the show even more. And I don’t want you to miss that. So make sure that you are cruising over to the show notes for both of these episodes by going to SweetLifepodcast.com/275. 

    [00:01:40] April: Now every single thing we talk about is in here. We’re gonna give you the details and how to get all of this. And not only that, both of these shows are video recorded. If you haven’t checked out our video yet on YouTube, cruise over and follow our YouTube channel as well, because Eileen is actually whiteboarding for you guys as she’s going [00:02:00] through the framework, and I don’t want you to miss it.

    [00:02:02] April: Again, welcome back to part two of our two part little mini series. Which just so happens to be part of another miniseries that we are doing on becoming known with the one and only Eileen Wilder. So let’s go ahead and dive right back in. 

    [00:02:17] Eileen: So say, say you’ve got your signature message. Now there’s obviously, um, you know, when I, when I’m teaching my students, so the crash course, there’s gonna be an intro, then there’s gonna be your story, which comprises of the problem, the solution, and the payoff.

    [00:02:32] Eileen: And then there’s gonna be what we call your in. So without going too deep, there is like an a a way to begin and a way to end this message. But let me give you the meat of how to make the crowd super engaged. Yes. And uh, and then if I have time, I’ll do like how to start and how to end. Okay. Yes. Okay, awesome.

    [00:02:54] Eileen: So, okay, my business partner and I studied over [00:03:00] 500 hours of the best speaker. that have all exists throughout all time. Jfk, Dr. Martin Luther King. We’ve studied mega pastors who get people voluntarily showing up every week, um, and get the crowd crazy excited. Now, I will give this to you guys free, this book free.

    [00:03:18] Eileen: It goes much deeper. It’s, it’s a, um, like a, it’ll be a digital ebook, but it’ll be worth going into these principles cuz if you do them like these famous pants speakers, you’ll be invited on the biggest stages. on the internet and in the world. And I’ve had the privilege of being a part of some of them.

    [00:03:38] Eileen: And I know you will too. Mm-hmm. . So here is the framework. Huge gift. Thank you. So as we, we watched all these videos, we found that these speakers were doing a pattern. Okay. Wow. And the pattern, when we start, we were like, are they doing this? And we’re like, oh my gosh. They’re all doing the same speaking framework pattern.

    [00:03:57] Eileen: And as they do it, the [00:04:00] audience starts, Like, um, just more and more engaged. So much so that some of the audiences are like talking back to the speaker. You know, it’s, it’s getting like, kind of like excited. It’s on. If you’ve ever been to like a Tony Robinson, you see how it’s like, it’s not quiet anymore.

    [00:04:15] Eileen: It’s like, it’s like, Well, we’re like having a lot of fun, right? Um, my business partner likes to call it like, black church, white church. Like, have you’ve ever been to a white church? Like, like I have and Uhhuh , you’ve ever been to a black church, which is, I actually grew up in a black church, so it’s like so much more fun.

    [00:04:32] Eileen: It’s so much more fun. So much more fun. . So here is the framework so you can implement it inside your signature message. All right, so. So when you’re telling your story and when you’re speaking, um, in front of podcasts or big crowds, or even if you’re talking to a person, one other person, consider using some of these techniques.

    [00:04:54] Eileen: So let’s go. Okay. The framework starts first. [00:05:00] In first person, I, I was here, I was in this place and I was doing this thing. You’re in first person, okay? Very quickly. within maybe 60 seconds or less. You wanna switch in your story to you, you second person. Hmm. Let me give you an example. I was in this apartment at three small kids.

    [00:05:28] Eileen: I felt overwhelmed and like I was never going to figure out how to make money, how to ever buy a house, how to ever have my dreams. Have you ever been in a place where life was turning out differently than you thought it was gonna turn out? Have you ever experienced overwhelming disappointment? At where you are.

    [00:05:56] Eileen: Like you’re older than you thought you would be to, you thought you’d [00:06:00] achieve more dreams, more goals by now, and there’s kind of a quiet desperation, simmering inside of you that makes you feel like you barely want to get out of bed in the morning. Cuz why? Right? So, so you’re first person. and then you’re into you.

    [00:06:19] Eileen: Have you ever? I’m immediately now. Cause you’re not there for you, right? Mm-hmm. , you’re not there to tell your story. You’re there to tell their story. Have you ever felt like B B B B You can do? Sometimes they call it the rule of three in speaking. So have you ever felt like this and felt like this and felt like this?

    [00:06:36] Eileen: And the minute you do that, watch this. When you do it, you’ll see the audience leans in. 

    [00:06:44] April: I mean, like I’m sitting here, even as you’re saying it, responding to even you teaching us how to do this. And I know, and I know that what you’re doing, . Yeah. You know what I’m doing. 

    [00:06:54] Eileen: Yeah, yeah, yeah. I’m like, yes. And, and now that you know, you’ll see what everybody else is doing too.

    [00:06:58] Eileen: When you see them speak [00:07:00] so lot like professionals, they know how to do this, so and so, you’ll actually, what you will see as well as the audience will start nodding their head, they’ll start out loud, effortlessly, they’ll start going, mm. , it’ll be a verbal. Now in contrast, speakers who don’t know how to do this, it’s quiet.

    [00:07:19] Eileen: Yeah. And people start tuning out. You know what I’m talking about? Like, have you ever seen a boring speaker, right? Yes. 

    [00:07:25] April: Yes, yes. And I fear, Lord, please help me, Nina, not be that speaker when I’m on stage. is when 

    [00:07:32] Eileen: From Gods lips to your ear. Exactly. So I to you. . Mm-hmm. , Heidi, have you ever mm-hmm. , here’s another prompt.

    [00:07:41] Eileen: You know, when you, you know, when you’re in a place and you’ve tried everything the gurus told you to do, you’ve tried this, you’ve tried that, you’ve tried, and it’s not working. So you, you have, you ever, and you know, when, you know, when you, you, you, is the unlock for the audience to go [00:08:00] into the movie. So cool.

    [00:08:03] Eileen: I, okay, so that’s, so it goes, I. to you. Mm-hmm. so important. Just do that. If you’re listening, you’ll be a better speaker. Great. Next level. IU point. IU point. Extract the lesson from the story that, that they can apply now. Doesn’t like, so. . Let me give you some examples of this. The point doesn’t need to rhyme, doesn’t need to be fancy pants.

    [00:08:35] Eileen: What it kind of, what it needs to do is to introduce almost a contrarian idea or something for them to think about. Okay. Got it. Let give you some examples. So, mm-hmm. , IU point, very speakers don’t have, like, they’re not clear in what they’re trying to say. And if you just think about your problem, okay. You could introduce a point such as, I [00:09:00] didn’t know that.

    [00:09:04] Eileen: Let me, let me, hold on. Pause. Let me go. I didn’t know that. No, I’m gonna go, I’m gonna do a different point. I didn’t know that doing everything the system would tell me to do, going to school, going to college, and getting a job, I didn’t know that that pathway wouldn’t lead to wealth. that wasn’t as good. So I, I, so I’m, I’m 

    [00:09:29] April: like a little No, that’s a great one though. No, no, no, no. Yeah. I’m sharing absolutely. Mm-hmm. , just think about 

    [00:09:35] Eileen: an idea. Mm-hmm. , think about an idea for your problem that like, you could present as like, I didn’t know that this, and so it could be a lesson that they could apply. Let’s think about another lesson perhaps that you could be having as in your problem.

    [00:09:49] Eileen: Perhaps your problem is, I didn’t know that eating keto. would cause me to hold onto weight, not to release weight. Now, I, I have [00:10:00] no, I don’t even know anything about keto. I’m just making full , like I didn’t know this and there’s a point inside the problem. Okay. I you point, it doesn’t need to be fancy. It needs to be something where the audience will go.

    [00:10:13] Eileen: Hmm. . 

    [00:10:14] April: So we want them to rethink. We want them to rethink something that they have thought is what I’m getting from what you’re saying. Yeah. We want them to rethink a problem based on the story in your journey of what’s happened. 

    [00:10:26] Eileen: Mm-hmm. . Yep. Just kind of a clear one sentence articulating perhaps a false limiting belief that you had.

    [00:10:33] Eileen: Mm-hmm. that they maybe hadn’t thought about recently. Okay. Got in another bit that I have. One of my points is, . I didn’t, I thought that working hard equaled wealth. Hmm. And I didn’t realize that it’s not about working harder, it’s about working. . Mm. And then I explain, then I go and explains. But that’s my point in that session.

    [00:10:54] Eileen: Mm-hmm. . So it’s like, I didn’t realize Clear point. Mm-hmm. , when you have a clear point inside your story, [00:11:00] the audience will most likely write it down. You’ll see them start writing it down. Now they’re in the movie, they’re like, oh my gosh, I think that Right. I believe 

    [00:11:06] April: that. Right. I have a million things flying through my head right now. Okay. Yes. This is, this is so good. So, you know, people could say, I didn’t know that. Even if after I. All the social media strategy and all of the things that it, it actually wouldn’t equal dollars in my pocket. But then I realized that doing this one thing, was what I really needed. And I think that might apply to our, a lot of our listeners or I didn’t know that if I just launched an online course like everybody else, that they, that they wouldn’t come.

    [00:11:41] April: That I, and I realized that I needed, or, you know, wanted to do this. And once I learned this, or once I did this mm-hmm. , it was the difference. Granted, I’m falling all over my words and I’m taking too many words 

    [00:11:54] Eileen: as you want. Me too. I mean, I know, I’m kind of thinking of stuff off the cuff too, but that, that’s the idea though.

    [00:11:59] Eileen: What’s a, [00:12:00] what’s like a, a clear one liner lesson from what you were experiencing Right. In this problem. Right. Because most likely they’re ha they’re thinking that same thing. Like, wait, I thought that working hard world wealth. Like, what are you saying? What? Right. So it, it creates intrigue, curiosity. In fact, the best speaker that I’ve studied in making a clear point is Joel Osteen.

    [00:12:20] Eileen: Oh 

    [00:12:21] April: yeah. Who was scared to death to speak in the beginning. 

    [00:12:24] Eileen: So he a point. So don’t everyone here don’t, don’t have to be like super fancy pants. He doesn’t need to rhyme. Just state a one-liner. That was something you were thinking and it’s clear from your, from your story. Got it. Yes. I U point now. Oh, this is my favorite part.

    [00:12:42] Eileen: I’ll go quick. IU point. You can go back into iu. Sometimes it’s little of a dance. So there I was in the apartment, da da da da. So, but, so we call that the IU dance, but if we go straight through the framework, IU point, they, they, they [00:13:00] is the, Now, let me articulate. There’s a, a quote from Winston Churchill that said, nothing unites at people more than having a common enemy.

    [00:13:09] Eileen: Yes. Okay. So here is the moment that you can get the crowd the most engaged, because if you can identify an enemy, that’s also their enemy, bring their awareness to the enemy and be like, Everything in your life that’s gone wrong has been kinda like a result of this enemy. Like this is actually who you’re actually fighting.

    [00:13:35] Eileen: You’re not fighting yourself and you’re not fighting, um, your mom and dad. You’re not fighting who like these phantom, like this is actually, uh, you who’s is an enemy set against you. Okay? And when that happens, there’s something inside of us as humans and, uh, men and women we like are we want to. . Mm-hmm.

    [00:13:57] Eileen: We wanna fight and we want, we wanna [00:14:00] win . So we do. So we’re like, um, like think about just football and sports. It’s like we we’re programmed to be like us, be them, us for them, right? So give your audience someone to fight. Wow. Now what, what two things will happen here? , high emotions, sometimes anger, which is really great.

    [00:14:20] Eileen: Like if you can get the crowd like in a good way, in a good way, I’ll show you, I’ll show you. Get the crowd angry in a good way. Now they’re united against this enemy and now the crowd is united in and amongst themselves. So now they’re like, the crowd now becomes a un unified tribe. Okay? Right? Mm-hmm. . And so it’s, it’s like this is the best part when you can do this in the audience.

    [00:14:41] Eileen: Oh, so an enemy. So it’s a they So IU point, they Mm, they, mm. So, alright. This is so fun because what you wanna be thinking here is like, who is who was, [00:15:00] or is your they. Hmm. Let me give you some examples. When I was speaking at FHL a couple years ago, I did a they, which was, uh, the enemy in your mind. Now in church they use the devil a lot.

    [00:15:20] Eileen: So I was kind of playing off this idea cause it’s an external character that I was like, some people call it the devil. Some people call it um, uh, Satan. Some people call it the adversary. I don’t care what you call it. How many of you, okay, now I’m back to you have heard a voice in your mind that pulls you.

    [00:15:37] Eileen: from what you know that you are called to create, how many of you mm-hmm. have had that? Mm-hmm. , how many of you have felt, uh, resistance to publishing what you know you’re born to publish? How many of you had that? Uh, and I’m, I’m going back to you, you hear me going back into you? Mm-hmm. . Um, and then I go, I go one more.

    [00:15:57] Eileen: So now I’m doing what’s called the rule of three. How many of [00:16:00] you have felt, uh, I don’t know what I said. Uh, like. . I don’t know, just something pulling you back from the calling that you know you are meant to step into. How many of you, how many of you ever heard a voice like this? See now I’m doing crowd.

    [00:16:14] Eileen: Now I’ll show you. Crowd engagement. And by that time, the audience, every time I’m saying that is seeing them in the movie, they’re like, I’ve had the wait. There’s an enemy. Mm-hmm. in my, in my thoughts. Okay. . Now they’re starting to get like white hot and heated and this is what I want you guys to do. I make a they.

    [00:16:34] Eileen: Another speech I did. I was like, the system told you right. , go to school. Right? Go to college, get a job, and you’ll be wealthy. Right? How many of you grew up here in that lie? Mm-hmm. . So now, now I’m, I’m, I’m, uh, putting words in the enemy’s mouth. Okay. I hope this is making sense. 

    [00:16:52] April: This makes, okay. Perfect sense.

    [00:16:54] Eileen: Okay. All right. So then the, the capital off, but the, they is my favorite part, and that’s where you, you can get [00:17:00] ’em on their feet and like, they’re just, they’re just like, what? . Okay. And so, so they’re, they’ve got this, they, and then in the middle of the, they drop a sound bite, so in the middle. So you’ve got the, they, they’re freaking out.

    [00:17:17] Eileen: They’re like, I am Wonder Woman, and I am about to take the enemy down. That’s like how your audience is feeling right there, and you’re like, take ’em. Yeah, like go like now you’re just like, they’re in their story, they’re in their movie, and they are at war with this enemy, and you’re just. . Like, like what the, the guy in the back Go, go.

    [00:17:40] Eileen: Yeah, go. Just go. So then when, so in the middle of this white, hot, emotional heat, if you drop a sound bite, which is like a point, but it rhymes. Okay. They will go 

    [00:17:53] April: crazy like 

    [00:17:55] Eileen: bananas. Like, but like running around like, like screaming, like, [00:18:00] like what? Like say that again. You know, they’re writing it down as fast as they’re tweeting it out.

    [00:18:04] Eileen: Like it’s like taking screenshots of the thing. It’s like, it’s like, it’s like this is what the pattern was. Do they, all these speakers are, they’re doing this pattern in these speeches and you’re just like, and, and I, so, okay, so this is it. So then people are like, oh my gosh, how do I make a sound bite?

    [00:18:25] Eileen: And I’m like, okay, okay, . You’re like, oh my gosh. So I have a favorite secret cool website that musicians use, and it’s called rhyme zone.com. And take some of your ideas, your points, things you say, go in there. have some fun with some alliteration. Uh, I’ll give you an example of one of mine. I actually love to do this ninja thing. Now. You guys know all my secrets. 

    [00:18:53] April: All of your secrets. , you could call a sound. You’re 

    [00:18:55] Eileen: amazing stack. So a soundbite stack is like where you use a quote of a famous [00:19:00] person, another quote from a famous person, and then you drop your quote. Sound bites. 

    [00:19:06] April: Oh yeah. That’s 

    [00:19:07] Eileen: so good. So, uh, let’s see. One soundbite stack is,

    [00:19:12] Eileen: So I’ll say something about like w Clemon stone. I’m like, uh, because w clemen stone, the number one enemy of wealth. I have this whole bit. And then I say, w clemen stone understood the number one enemy of wealth isn’t mindset, it’s delay. Hmm. How many of you have been delay how You see, I’m going back into the, how many of you have been delaying some things in your life?

    [00:19:33] Eileen: Napoleon Hill says it like this, that successful people make decisions quickly. and change their mind slowly. Unsuccessful people make decisions slowly and change their mind often and quickly. Mm-hmm. , I like to say it like this. Procrastination is the assassination of your destination. and when boom, I do that, then it’s like, yeah.

    [00:19:54] Eileen: So yeah, it’s like boom, boom, boom. And then soundbites stack. But you [00:20:00] can come up with your own soundbites. Mm-hmm. , it’s super fun. Think of yourself like a rapper or a songwriter or someone very creative and that you’ll see that the great speakers, it’s, it’s more like music. Mm-hmm. . So if you’ll do your signature story using this speaking framework, I guarantee.

    [00:20:21] Eileen: I just like, I, I could like bet money in it. People will come up to you and be like, that message changed my life. 

    [00:20:29] April: Wow. This podcast is going to change people’s lives and businesses. Wow. . So, okay, so I have questions. So first the delivering the framework and then you usually go over this, the iu them at, at the end.

    [00:20:48] April: That’s, that’s when after that, After the entire signature framework that you go through? Well, well, 

    [00:20:54] Eileen: what I’ll do is like, I’ll have people introduce the message and then while they’re telling their story, their [00:21:00] problems, which pay off, they do it in this way. Got 

    [00:21:03] April: it, 

    [00:21:03] Eileen: got it, got it. The idea, a way to always talk or a way to always, um, tell a story or a way to just communicate that’s very helpful for people, God, Eileen, because it’s clear.

    [00:21:17] Eileen: Um, You’re using a speaking tech technique called just high contrast. When you have the enemy now they’re like, they do it this way, but we do it like this. So you’re, you’re employing very helpful communication success habits when you, when you talk like this. So we’ll have them tell their story like that.

    [00:21:39] Eileen: Now we do a lot of role playing on. Give feedback cuz you know, pe you know, right? Yeah. Mm-hmm. . And 

    [00:21:45] April: it takes a, this, this whole entire process. First of all, um, thank you for taking the time to study all the people that you have done and then be so giving. In everything that you do, giving away the book for free.

    [00:21:59] April: Mm-hmm. , you [00:22:00] guys, I, I have read this is really incredible. Um, and in speaking and teaching us so freely and then obviously being here on the show, just pouring into us, we’re gonna, we’re gonna turn this into two podcast episodes, is so good. One, your ability to see these, this pattern and understand this, and then turn around and teach it, is an incredible gift.

    [00:22:20] April: Oh, thanks. So thank you for paying attention to your gift and then turning around and teaching it to. Hmm. I, I think that there are, obviously, there are so many different ways to, uh, to give a talk and give a teaching, but what you are teaching us is how to move people. Mm-hmm. . And that is, I believe, the missing component that many of our listeners have had.

    [00:22:46] April: in their becoming known strategy. Yeah. It’s, it’s, and even you guys, it doesn’t have to be a million people that you’re known with. It can be a hundred people that know you and you change, you change their lives. [00:23:00] This strategy that you talked about, this way of storytelling, Hmm. Truly moves people to action in.

    [00:23:08] April: What is so powerful about the way that you teach this and, and all of your ninja skills that you do with your clients, is that, It really does remove the speaker from being the spotlight. Yeah, and like I said in the beginning, I think there’s a lot of people that are hesitant to step into the quote unquote spotlight because they don’t wanna be in the spotlight, they want.

    [00:23:32] April: Their methodology or their change or whatever, whatever transformation they deliver to be the highlight. They don’t want to be that front person, but they do want to create change. And so there’s been some hesitation. I know, and I’ve talked to a lot of clients where there has been a significant level of hesitation because they wanna figure out another way to do it without having it for them to be the one standing up there.

    [00:23:54] April: What would you say to those people who. Are what they know. [00:24:00] They feel that pole. We talked about it. Mm-hmm. , you teach on it. You speak on it, that know that they are supposed to do this and their feet are stuck in cement. What, what would you say to that person who’s listening? 

    [00:24:14] Eileen: Yeah, I love that. Um, well, I think one thought that can be incredibly motivating and incredibly.

    [00:24:23] Eileen: um, energizing, making you want to do this more or, you know, speak on stages and podcasts and do all this stuff, is thinking about all of the people that don’t know what you know, right? They don’t know this tips, like they don’t have the steps, they don’t know the information and because they don’t have that information, to some degree.

    [00:24:48] Eileen: You’re experiencing what the Bible talks about, like, which is like people perish for their lack of knowledge. Mm-hmm. . So it’s, it means like there’s some part of their life that isn’t in fullness, isn’t in abundance, [00:25:00] isn’t in the kind of increase that they could be experiencing if they just knew like one or two things that, you know, and we discount and discredit our personal story because it’s so per, so unique to us.

    [00:25:16] Eileen: right? Yeah. Like this is my thing. I don’t even know if this would like even really help anybody, but when you start opening your mouth and taking, being vulnerable and taking that courageous step forward, and you start seeing that your story is the linchpin for thousands, maybe if not millions of people to experience greatness, which is kind of crazy.

    [00:25:42] Eileen: I mean, it’s not like, not to be like heaviness or. . There’s a heaviness to that, but it’s like an excitement. One person said it to me like this, and I’ll toss it back to you, April. They said, stop focusing on you. And what, you [00:26:00] know, what you, you keeping your story quiet? They said, start focusing on the prison that everyone else is in tormented because they haven’t heard what you.

    [00:26:12] Eileen: right? So it’s that calling toward contribution that I feel can unlock for people. Like just, uh, people need. People need, they need what you have. They need your story. And that’s, uh, it can be just like a never ending amazing addiction is just people coming up to you being like, thank you for ch thank you for that message.

    [00:26:35] Eileen: Thank you for changing my life. That’s what happens. right when you decided to speaker. Wow. Wow, 

    [00:26:41] April: wow. Um. , there’s so many responses I wanna say right now. Uh, I think that it’s important for our listeners, again, because I unpack everything. This show is not about me at all. Um, but I want to share with you guys something that happened to me in [00:27:00] this case.

    [00:27:01] April: and actually it was at a funnel hacking live. And I mean, all transparently. I don’t use ClickFunnel. Sorry, Russell. I mean, I just don’t, I just go and my friends are there. You’re there. You know, it’s, it’s great leadership. I love learning there. It’s just an amazing place to be. Anyways, my first year, there was only a couple years ago, two years ago, I think it was, you were speaking and I remember being there in the a.

    [00:27:25] April: I was actually standing behind you, I think, and Garrett White was speaking. Oh yeah, yeah, yeah, yeah, yeah. It was like going to church in there. Yeah. Um, but anyway, and I remember in that moment, hearing that you have to stop keeping it to yourself. And it was such a, it was such a moving event. I was actually bawling crying you guys in this conference around people I didn’t even really know.

    [00:27:51] April: Yeah. Um, actually I hardly knew any of ’em. Mm-hmm. and uh, and I was just this bawling, crying hot mess because I learned in that [00:28:00] moment that I could no longer sit on what I. Wow. And granted, I’ve had this podcast for five years, six years there. There’s a different level that I have been supposed to walk into, and so I remember that moment, right?

    [00:28:13] April: And I share that with you guys. I ended up sending out to my whole email list about how I ugly cried and Funnel Hagging live, and this is what I learned. I actually got more responses to that email than any other email I’ve ever sent out. But the, the message was that if once you feel that. You guys can’t go back.

    [00:28:34] April: I haven’t able to go back since once I knew and I heard that. I mean, to me it came from God, but whatever you guys believe, and we have listeners of all faith in here and you know, whatever that is, whatever that intuition is inside of you that says that, like Eileen saying, if you guys have heard this, th that is why I binge everything that Eileen puts out.

    [00:28:57] April: Because I know she’s feeding me [00:29:00] to the next level that I’m supposed to be at. That’s why I’m so excited about her being here on this show, because I can personally attest to what I learned, and I’m not even in Eileen’s paid programs yet. I mean, just the amount of information that I learn. So I, I share that story with you guys.

    [00:29:18] April: Because I want you guys to take a moment and tap into when that was for you. You’re sitting here listening to this episode. You already know that you’re supposed to be speaking and otherwise you wouldn’t have made it to the end of this episode. This wasn’t, this wouldn’t be a valuable use of your time.

    [00:29:36] April: Oh, and, and really hear what Eileen is saying and utilize this framework that you’ve learned here on this show to move forward and start taking action. And if you’re listening and you haven’t heard that yet, then maybe it’s time to press in. Whatever that looks like for you, and get really clear on whether or not this is an action you should take.

    [00:29:58] April: This isn’t for [00:30:00] everybody. We we’re, we’re not sitting here saying that everybody needs to be, you know, this amazing world game changing speaker, but we are saying for those of you who haven’t experienced it yet or aren’t sure, or you just feel stuck, you can’t move into that place where you know that you should be creating change based on the business that you have.

    [00:30:22] April: Then consider what Eileen is saying to you here. Tap into her ecosystem as we have. Wow. And, and learn from this wisdom. Hmm. Yeah. Because it will serve you 

    [00:30:37] Eileen: well. Yeah. Speaking is just the best feeling in the world, and also will help you give and contribute like you never have. and then you’ll also be crazy pants shocked at how much business you’ll start doing when you decide to take that step forward.

    [00:30:57] Eileen: That’s so good. April. 

    [00:30:58] April: Wow. [00:31:00] Super. Oops. It’s super good everything you’re saying. I was so excited about this episode. Yeah. Uh, these two episodes now, we’re gonna break ’em up for you guys. Okay. In summary, we have talked about the importance of using your voice to create change and to become known. We’ve talked about how to tap in and Eileen has given you the framework to craft your signature story.

    [00:31:25] April: Uh, holy moly. I mean, this is just amazing that what you guys have received here, and you should see my notes. I actually have front and back pages of notes, uh, and I can’t wait to, to get this out and transcribe this whole. You have that storytelling framework, and then on top of that you have the, the secret sauce that Eileen teaches to her exclusive clients on the iu, them punchline, and the three parts that she dropped for you on how to use [00:32:00] quotes from leaders.

    [00:32:01] April: Very, very sneakily in a perfect way. Put your little rhyming quote in there. If you’re like me, I have three teenage boys. I’m gonna give this to them to figure, to figure out my, my, my, my rhyme rap for whatever that’s gonna be. Um, or you can go to the web website that Eileen mentioned here. Um, I, I really can’t, words don’t even cover my gratitude for you being here on the show and sharing all of this wisdom.

    [00:32:26] April: Mm-hmm. with, with our listeners. Thank. so much. Oh, so fun. How can people connect with you and be part of your ecosystem? Like we. 

    [00:32:36] Eileen: Yes, I would love to stay in touch with all of you listening because I love April and I love like her people. I know, I’m sure you are amazing listening to this. So you can go to become a paid speaker.com, you can access a training that I have.

    [00:32:50] Eileen: I go a little bit deeper in how to, I know, make the relationships to get on stages and connect with people who will invite you to even bigger stages. And that training is [00:33:00] super, uh, high value. And I also, if you want our. I’ll give you our free Yes. You want her book ? Um, find me on Instagram and message. My assistant will deliver it to you.

    [00:33:11] Eileen: Just pick, maybe just be like, April Beach, you’ll just message me. April Beach I’ll know. And then my assistant will send you. The book will be so helpful in helping you think through iu. They IU point a sound bite and then. Keep, keep me in touch. Let me know how you crush it 

    [00:33:29] April: up there. Mm. You can find her at Eileen Wilder on Instagram, guys.

    [00:33:33] April: Oh 

    [00:33:33] Eileen: yes. Sorry, Eileen Wild, my bad. Eagle. Eileen. 

    [00:33:36] April: Eileen Wild on Instagram at Eileen Wild. Yes. Perfect. Okay, and we’ll make sure all those links for you guys are in the show notes. Thank you so much again. Yes. I appreciate all of your time. I adore you. And just keep, keep letting them up. That’s great. Thank you.

    [00:33:51] April: Thank. Hey friends. All right. We are wrapping up. This is episode number 275 in both episode 2 74, and this [00:34:00] episode are with the One and only Eileen Wilder. This is part of a series that we’ve been delivering to you here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast called Becoming Known. And in these two episodes, Eileen unpacked these secrets that are proven ways where she and her students and the speakers she’s studied move audiences to take action.

    [00:34:23] April: And so if you are in that place, and I shared a little bit of my story of being moved to action and when I knew and I felt that calling, if you are in that place where you know you need to step out and speak for whatever reason that your feet. Felt like they were in quicksand for a while. Now maybe is the time to take that action as we are here.

    [00:34:44] April: You’re listening to this episode and it’s not by accident, and I want you to take action in implementing. So we did talk about a lot of things at the end of shows where we have guests, I love to work with you and help. Pinpoint, what is that one action step from [00:35:00] all the things that Eileen talked about that is going to help you move forward in this direction?

    [00:35:05] April: Many people don’t take action and inaction causes a failure before they’ve even tried. And I don’t want that to be you guys. I don’t want that to be our listeners. Okay, so step number one, obviously the super easy action you can take is to go to become a paid speaker.com and connect with Eileen and download all the resources she has there.

    [00:35:25] April: If that’s the only thing you do, start there. Alright. Become a paid speaker.com. Go connect with Eileen and her team and just be part of their family and their ecosystem, and it’s just an amazing business community over there. Number two. Eileen was really generous in giving you guys a free copy of her book, million Dollar Speaker.

    [00:35:44] April: I have this book. I’m reading this book. I’ve binged this book. I have notes all over this book. I want you to have this book too. She was generous enough to give you guys a free copy. But I want you to grab it in a timely manner. So connect with Eileen on Instagram to get a free copy of her book. [00:36:00] You can follow her at Eileen Wild and all you have to do is DM her my name and then her assistant will know what that is and send out a free copy of the book.

    [00:36:08] April: So just DM her April Beach and they will n and then her team will send you, um, how to get a free copy of that. Okay. Those are two easy action steps. Now let’s get into, um, more of the thought process where a lot of people get stuck in their brain, uh, because we can’t decide on, on what we should do first.

    [00:36:28] April: The first thing that I recommend you do is think about that story like Eileen taught, like unpacking the Pixar methodology of storytelling picture. You see yourself even. It like a third person aerial view like you’re an angel flying over the situation, and there you are. Go back to the beginning of the story that you want to tell.

    [00:36:51] April: And of course I want that story to relate to the offer that you are engineering, the product that we’re selling. So [00:37:00] please make sure that you are very clear on the product that you were selling at the end of your campaign of becoming known through speaking. We need to make sure we have that engineered first, so, Think and make sure that you’re very clear on what you wanna become known for through your speaking.

    [00:37:18] April: What product or program that you have engineered or you’re in the process of engineering to, to drive people to take action about. And then picture that story in your mind of when that story began to unfold in how you came to the solution of creating that product or program or solution that you. So those are three action steps.

    [00:37:41] April: Number one, go to become a paid speaker.com to dm. I lean steam and get a free copy of the book. And then the third thing is to be very clear about what you’re selling if you aren’t clear about your offer. That is what we do here at the Sweet Life Company. We help you engineer transformational offers and programs, courses, masterminds, [00:38:00] licensed programs.

    [00:38:00] April: We help. Build your certification programs. We help you build your genius product and your intellectual property to scale your business exponentially if you’re stuck there. Of course, cruise over to sweet life co.com and that’s what we will help you with. But this show is all about your next step actions that you do after that in making sure that we’re very clear on what you wanna become known for.

    [00:38:24] April: And, and I’m just so grateful to Eileen in all the time that she spent with all of us here. Um, she is truly one of the greats and, um, I’m very, very, very happy that you are here at the end of this show. And, It is not, as I said by accident that you are. So this is episode number 275 here at the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast.

    [00:38:47] April: We have kicked off the next gen of the podcast. This is year six, and we are so grateful that you are here. Please take a moment to share this show. We do not have our advertising on this show intentionally because that would drive me crazy as a [00:39:00] listener, so we don’t advertise. We really rely on you guys to share these episodes and I appreciate you doing so and all of the show.

    [00:39:06] April: All of the resources, all of the links, all the instructions on how to get the free book and details about what Eileen talked about can be found by vi, by visiting suite life podcast.com/ 2 75. Again, suite life podcast.com/ 2 75. And if you forget everything else, you can just go there and we’ll make it easier for you and you can click on the links to connect with Eileen further.

    [00:39:31] April: All right, have an awesome day. I’m so glad that you guys are here. Thanks for listening.

     
     

    (Becoming Known) The Secret Framework To Build A Million Dollar Talk That Moves People To Action – with Eileen Wilder Part 1

    (Becoming Known) The Secret Framework To Build A Million Dollar Talk That Moves People To Action - with Eileen Wilder Part 1

     

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for:

    Established coaches and consultants who are ready to take action and step into your next level of authority and influence through speaking. 

     

    Summary:

    This episode is for established coaches and consultants who are ready to take action and step into your next level of authority and influence through speaking, and for those who’ve felt the call to speak, but you’ve dragged your feet for one reason or another. 
     
    Eileen Wilder aka: Million Dollar Speaker, delivers a step by step workshop style two part episode and teaches you her winning framework for not only crafting your signature story but delivering talks that move people to action and even change the world. 
     
    Eileen taught so much gold that we’ve broken this episode into two. In this first episode #274 you’ll work with Eileen as she guides you to build your signature talk. In episode #275, Eileen breaks down the exact details of her formula to engage your audience, and move people to action in a way that the whole room is buzzing. 

     

    At the end of this episode you will: 

     
     
    1. Have your story board planned and the scene set for your signature talk
    2. Eileen’s winning framework and be able to apply it to your talk 
    3. Know that you can simplify your talk and create even more action
    4. Have Eileens Signature Talk Framework
    5. Know the secret sauce Eileen teaches her students to move audiences and bring massive emotion and action into the room
     
     
    Resources mentioned: 

    https://www.becomeapaidspeaker.com/freetraining

    DM the words “April Beach” to Eileen on Instagram to get a free copy of her book @eileenwild 

     
    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    274

    [00:00:45] April: Hi guys. Welcome back to another episode here at the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. I am so glad you’re here. You are definitely not here by accident. This show and the one after it, it, it is one of these divine moments where you may be moved to action that could change your [00:01:00] business forever and in six years. I’ve never actually told you that before, any episode. So listen up. Here’s what you can expect.

    [00:01:07] April: First of all, it was so good. That our guest expert poured so much into us. In this show, we actually broke it up into two episodes, so this is part one of part two. But all of these episodes happening right now. We now have a collection of six episodes are all part of our becoming known series. So the series of episodes running from 2 71 all the way up through these episodes.

    [00:01:29] April: And beyond are all about helping you establish your strategy to become known. And today’s expert is a one and only Eileen Wilder. If you don’t know her, she’s gonna share her story with you on this show. So I’m not gonna do that right now, but I want you to know that you’re in the presence truly of one of the greats.

    [00:01:44] April: She is known as the Queen of Stages. She is spoken with Tony Robinson, Russell Branson, Kevin Harrington, Dan Kennedy, and. As you hear her teach and the way she is going to take you through what is a true workshop here setting on this show, you’re gonna [00:02:00] understand that she is unlike any other, and I’m so glad you’re here, and I know she is so incredibly glad that you’re here as well.

    [00:02:08] April: So this is who this show is for, and this is how to prepare. This is for those of you who are established coaches, consultants, and experts, and you’re ready to scale your business up. You’re ready to step into thought leadership. You have a proven offer, methodology, framework, and strategy that we already know we have in place that we wanna sell on the backside of speaking.

    [00:02:28] April: If you don’t have that, Still listen to this show, but cruise over to sweet life co.com and we will help you engineer your industry leading transformational programs and offers, license programs or certification programs. That’s what we do here. As many of you know, I just wanna make sure that you have that in place.

    [00:02:44] April: So as we’re diving into what we’re implementing here on the show, We know what you’re speaking towards and about. You have to have your offer. We need to know what you’re selling right in, in order to best utilize and implement what Eileen is teaching us here. [00:03:00] So again, this is for those of you guys who are established, and Eileen is gonna deliver a step-by-step workshop style that we’ve broken up into two episodes where she is gonna deliver you her winning frameworks for not only crafting your signature.

    [00:03:13] April: But how to deliver it, which is the goal. Like that’s where I feel like I get stuck. Like I can, you know, I’m up there and I speak and I talk, but I don’t know about you. My greatest fear is having people leave unchanged. So whatever that is for you, whatever cement you’ve been carrying in your feet, uh, regarding speaking on, on big stages and changing lives, you are in the right place.

    [00:03:38] April: All of the show notes for this show can be found by visiting suite life podcast.com/ 2 74. And this is what you can expect at the end of these two shows, you’re gonna have your storyboard and you’re gonna understand how to set the scene for your signature talk, you are gonna know and have full awareness of Eileen’s super powerful signature [00:04:00] talk framework, as well as her secret framework of how to deliver your signature talk to move audiences.

    [00:04:06] April: A k a move mountain. So if that is what you were looking for, you were truly in the right place. If you’re new to the Sweet Life Podcast, welcome to our listener family. I’m so glad you’re here. We don’t have advertising on this show. We never have. We want you to be able to dive into these business trainings that you would pay thousands of dollars elsewhere for. So please, we ask that you do share this and Eileen has led with incredible giving. And I would want, I would love to have you help us get this episode into more and more people’s hands and spread her work that she’s continuing to do in helping all of us be able to spread our work that we do. What an amazing, give, give ecosystem here. And I am very, very glad that you’re here. So if you’re ready, let’s go ahead and dive into this show. 

    [00:04:52] April: All right, you guys. I am very excited to be joined by my friend Eileen, and I’ve been wanting to bring [00:05:00] Eileen before you here on this show for a long time because what she speaks about is something that I’m personally working on and looking to achieve.

    [00:05:09] April: And all you guys know, I share all the behind the scenes of the things I’m trying to do. But it’s very, very important for all of us, and that is using our voice in speaking to create change for other people. To serve other people, to help other people. And the approach that Eileen uses as she does this is so genuine.

    [00:05:32] April: It’s so, um, uh, absorbable. , it’s so when you’re sitting in the audience and Eileen speaking, she moves you, you know, uh, to action and levels up your IQ and, and helps you move in a way that maybe you didn’t necessarily have what it took to move before then. And so that’s why I’m really excited to have her on the podcast. So welcome to the Sweet Life Podcast, Eileen. I’m so glad that you’re [00:06:00] here. 

    [00:06:00] Eileen: Hi April. So pumped to be here. Yeah, I 

    [00:06:02] April: know. Really, really exciting. So today we’re talking about how to use your voice to become known, to establish thought leadership and how to do that through speaking, how to expand your work through speaking.

    [00:06:17] April: Can you give a little bit of a background story about how you got here, why you are the bees knee of teaching people how to do this now? , um, I, I hold up your. We’ll put it back in the, yeah. Hold up. Eileen’s book. I have a copy too sitting here, but there you go. How to become a million dollar speaker. There you go.

    [00:06:35] April: It’s awesome. All right, so share, share with our listeners. Mm-hmm. , how you got here and why. This is so important, uh, in, in your business and how you help others. 

    [00:06:48] Eileen: Oh my gosh, yes. Absolutely. Well, thanks again April. This is so cool getting to hang. So I got into, um, helping people become million dollar speakers just like two and a half years ago.

    [00:06:58] Eileen: So I actually was a [00:07:00] ministry for 18 years. I was a pastor, so I was a speaker. Uh, but I didn’t really iden, I identified more of a pa being a pastor and, and making no money. Particularly I was in nonprofit ministry. My husband was actually an Uber driver to support us in our nonprofit salary, which is literally nonprofit.

    [00:07:18] Eileen: But it was great because we, uh, we loved serving people. So many of our friends that, um, we’ve gotten to meet over the years are people that. Really want, they really want to make an impact, like a legitimate, I really want to leave this planet changing as many lives as possible. And that’s where I was. I was like, I mean, but then I found out through coming to a conference called Funnel Hacking Live, that I could, I could not only have a huge impact, but I could also make money as a speaker.

    [00:07:53] Eileen: So at that conference is where I got the strategy for how to do that. And in kind of less than a couple [00:08:00] years, we started doing multiple millions of dollars and now our clients do multiple millions of dollars using speaking as the primary way to get their voice and their message out to as literally as many people as possible.

    [00:08:13] Eileen: But at the same time, massive profit. So that’s what my passion is now, is releasing people into their calling. So if you’re listening, if you’ve like felt that thing, you know, you feel it. It’s almost an uncomfortability inside where you can’t, almost like you’re like, I have to get this out. , I have to get this message out.

    [00:08:32] Eileen: I have to get this book out. I have to get this story out. Um, so there’s a, we love to help people craft their signature message, which is what I’d love to do with you in the next couple minutes. I would love that by crafting their signature message and their signature story, it can transform the audience while you give it.

    [00:08:50] Eileen: So it’s, it’s just incredibly fulfilling work. Not scary at all, but it, and then to see. , we, we love to see table rushes at the end of our [00:09:00] signature message. We can cause a table rush to happen. Where people now they’re taking that next step with you and in your business and it’s just kind of like, I laid down last night and I was like, I like can’t believe this is my life now.

    [00:09:11] Eileen: Mm-hmm. like, it really wasn’t that long. Sometimes I tell, I tell my friend Russell, I was like, how was Uber driving? Like, Like, my husband was Uber driving. It was like two and a half years ago, right? Like that was like not that. Now we’re in this like, huge expansion. It’s like, I don’t know, 1.5 million. I never thought I could do something like that.

    [00:09:28] Eileen: So it’s just kind of crazy town. April, the opportunity that, uh, is there for somebody who wants to step forward and use their voice. Mm-hmm. 

    [00:09:38] April: told you guys, I’m sure many of you already know Eileen. Uh, if you don. . Well, now you’ve met and now you know why I love her. So, uh, for those of you who are listening, and you have been in the online coaching and consulting space and you’ve been doing the rat race and you’ve been chasing the things, and you’ve been trying to do all the things to get your work [00:10:00] to the surface, to get the, the transformation that you deliver to your clients, to the surface, And you have not really been able to do it.

    [00:10:09] April: You may be getting tired. Most of our listeners have been in business for a really long time and you guys are like the best kept secret and you may be getting tired. Look at what Eileen just said to you. Look at this case study. It’s been two years, two years ago. The rest of us in this space, we’re still using these old tactics and here comes Eileen, this fresh eyes, and she just goes for it cuz she sees this pathway that’s laid out before her.

    [00:10:31] April: So it’s really important that I really want. Like I am here taking notes, you guys. I have all my notes here as you know. I do, and we have guests on this show that to, to stop for a second wherever you are, or positive episode, or make sure you come back and listen to it because the steps we’re gonna talk about here are really, really powerful and these are proven.

    [00:10:50] April: So let’s go ahead and dive into that. Yeah. Thank you so much. I’m very excited about this. as people are considering, what the heck am I gonna say? Like, I [00:11:00] think I know what I’m gonna do. Or why does anybody care what I have to say? I just want them to buy my program or buy my product or whatever. You know what I mean?

    [00:11:08] April: Why do they need to know me? How do I present myself in a way that I’m relatable? Um, help our listeners go through that process of crafting that communication strategy. Yeah. 

    [00:11:19] Eileen: So good. A hundred percent. So, so the big thing is kind of recognizing. Like, your story is so powerful. Like if you’re listening to this, like the story of how you like, um, birthed the company that you have or created the product or the certification or the coaching program, like the story surrounding the origin story is like, Uh, is very, very important.

    [00:11:41] Eileen: And many people, just after hearing that story, uh, could they, they normally, they’re just like, oh my gosh, I want that . I want that . That’s like how it was when I first met April. I was like, I wanna know all the things that April knows and I want to buy all the things that [00:12:00] April has. Like, you know what I’m saying?

    [00:12:02] Eileen: So every one of you. So it’s kind of recognizing how do I, how do I articulate and unpack that story? So my favorite. , um, organization to study this for is actually Pixar because Pixar, every Pixar movie I have little kids, but they, every movie they release is like a blockbuster. and they’ve just crushed this formula for a story.

    [00:12:22] Eileen: So as you’re, as I go through this formula, think about your story because this is the nucleus of your signature message, is what I’m about to show you right now. The nucleus is pen your story. Okay? And what’s cool about the way I’m gonna teach it is what you’re gonna do as you tell your story is as you tell your story, the audience is gonna see the.

    [00:12:43] Eileen: Inside your story because the purpose of when you’re speaking to an audience is not to share, just not to talk about yourself, right? It’s to talk about their story. So you know that feeling when you’re in a movie, a really good one, and you’re just lost, like, [00:13:00] and you, you forget that you’re in this like dark room with other people, or you’re just literally captivated the entire time.

    [00:13:08] Eileen: If you do this, like, I’ll show you here. This is where the audience will get like swept up into hu as you’re sharing your story. They’re gonna be like having their own internal movie and epiphany happening, which is what causes such an emotional swell, which I’ll teach you in this training too. It causes such a, uh, Almost the audience starts in, in, when I’m speaking, they start erupting emotionally.

    [00:13:34] Eileen: Like the other day, April, I was at the biggest conference and um, and in eight minutes I short, I stared, I shared a short story. The audience jumped up, started jumping up on their feet. First it was a couple trickle, and then there was a couple little pocket, and then everyone, like it actually got, I’ve, I got outta control, like actually, so the audience starts shouting back at me like, Like, like a [00:14:00] really cool church service.

    [00:14:01] Eileen: And I was like, I actually was like, I had a moment before I was like, I literally don’t know what to do right now. 

    [00:14:07] April: Like, you’re turning around. Goodness, there’s something behind me that I don’t, 

    [00:14:11] Eileen: so, so it was so, but like the, if you can, you know’s the power of a story, the power of your story, it, your story has all the ingredient. to impact people in a sniper way. So let’s dive in. Okay. Let’s, yeah. 

    [00:14:26] April: Yeah, yeah, yeah, yeah. So, and yes, you’re right. I Pi Pixar method. Yeah. 

    [00:14:30] Eileen: Yeah. Okay, so I have this awesome glare, so I’m, so I’m gonna say it out loud. So the Pixar method is, what was the problem that you had? Like what was the problem? The drama.

    [00:14:46] Eileen: what was the challenge you were facing? Uh, so as an example, my challenge was I was in a small two bedroom apartment with three kids and my husband’s Uber driving to support us. [00:15:00] Okay. So what was the problem? That was my problem. And how did it make you feel? Hmm. . Hmm. So as an example, so if you’re, I kind of use these as like prompts.

    [00:15:10] Eileen: So some people like, pause me and like, so what was the problem? What did it, when you’re describing the problem, you wanna make it like a scene, like, I was here in this place doing this thing and I felt like, I felt like I was a total failure and I was never gonna figure this out. And I, I felt terrified.

    [00:15:33] Eileen: Here’s another, so you wanna use emotional? I felt terrified that my three kids would grow up in an apartment without a home and without grass. Like, I can still think about how, yeah. Frightening that was for me. April, like, I was like, oh my gosh, they’re never gonna be like able to play lacrosse out front or like, like, like they’re gonna grow up in this tiny apartment.

    [00:15:54] Eileen: uh, and I will also go insane because they’re so loud and like, it’s like [00:16:00] there’s, anyway, so the scene, what was the problem? What was the scene? How did you feel? 

    [00:16:06] April: All right. So you guys yeah. Be thinking about as Eileen’s guiding us through this. We’re using this as a workshop like we do here on this. . And so really be th saying it out loud, if you’re on the subway or you’re driving your car, you’re in the carpool lane.

    [00:16:20] April: Wherever you are, you’re listening to this. If you’re at the gym, picture this. Take a moment and yeah. So we can actually do this work together here on this show as Eileen’s guiding us. 

    [00:16:30] Eileen: Yeah. Yeah. So fun. So fun to think about, like what was, what was the problem? Like what was the scene and then how’d you feel?

    [00:16:37] Eileen: And then what is the story of the. , so there’s a solution that you found and describe what that looked like. Many times people have sometimes an aha moment when they’re reading something, or sometimes it’s perhaps something a mentor said, [00:17:00] or maybe you figured out like a system and you were like, oh my gosh, like if I just did this and this and this.

    [00:17:10] Eileen: So some, maybe sometimes it’s like a guide or a mentor showed you, but maybe you just like figured, stumbled across something happened. So you wanna think back like what happened? Like I walked into Funnel Hacky Live and I heard Russell talk about how I could impact the world and make money. And he taught me at the event how to make an offer, how to have like a.

    [00:17:29] Eileen: Something I could sell. And I was like, what? In the, what? I was like, I never thought, I dunno, I dunno why that had never crossed my mind, but it had, so I walked out and I was like, oh my gosh. Like I can make money, um, as like a coach. Like I ne that. So what happened for you though? That was like the pivotal moment.

    [00:17:50] Eileen: Okay. So there’s a solution that you found. So the problem, so. , and then you kind of wanna talk about it as like, almost like [00:18:00] this, like, and then one day or like suddenly or, but then I found a coach or a mentor and he said, so you wanna describe it almost similarly like a scene because people think in pictures, right?

    [00:18:14] Eileen: So they’re thinking, okay, so their solution now, oh, I, okay, I have, so, I’m so excited. I have so much. Okay, so now after, after the. , then you’re gonna, then you’re gonna do the payoff. Okay? Now the payoff is what showed up for you after you implemented the solution. It’s like, uh, and then I did this, and then, and you wanna describe it like first outwardly outward payoff, so it could look like, and then, , I set up the system like April, talk April.

    [00:18:51] Eileen: So April told me this and I set up the system and suddenly I’m working half as much, making three times as more. [00:19:00] 

    [00:19:00] April: So you wanna focus on the deliverables, like the tangible deliverables of that solution. I, I have my, my muted while you’re talking because my dog, my dogs are so excited about this. They’re, they’re barking.

    [00:19:12] April: So hearing Eileen talk, um, , uh, the tangible solutions is Nick. So that payoff first you’re saying we talk about those tangible solutions or that people can, people can measure and they can be like, oh my gosh, I only did this, or whatever. Yeah, yeah. Okay. 

    [00:19:28] Eileen: So, good. And then, um, and so kinda like, so what I like to say is like, what showed up for you in your outward, outward world?

    [00:19:37] Eileen: Like, did your business start experiencing some, some, some breakthroughs maybe. You know, some people I work with have a relationship offer and they like found the love of their life or you know, maybe their harmony in their home. You know, it could look like their blood pressure, whatever the results look like.

    [00:19:54] Eileen: Right? Right. And then people, so immediately right there, the audience is like, whoa. . I [00:20:00] want that. Now. They’re very, now that you’ve actually created desire for the solution, inadvertently, but then talk about the payoff that shows up internally. So this would be like, uh, the hero’s journey. Mm-hmm. in a, this is like for real people, hero’s journey for like real people payoff.

    [00:20:16] Eileen: Like, so did you have more peace? I re um, I remember April the day that somebody bought my first coaching program. , I think I sold it for like $297 , and I almost fell off my chair. I’m not kidding. I can still remember it. I was like, she was like, yeah, I, I’m in, I’m like, wait, 

    [00:20:38] April: what? What? What did you just say?

    [00:20:39] April: You are, are you sure? I was like, and it was 

    [00:20:41] Eileen: like the, the, like the, the, I don’t know, just the mind shift that somebody was gonna pay me money for the knowledge that was in my head. Mm-hmm. . Mm-hmm. . And when that happened, so now it’s outward payoff. This incredible sense of peace [00:21:00] came over me because now I felt like I had found a system.

    [00:21:06] Eileen: Hmm. Like a thing that I could rely on. I could do it again, right? And bring income in for my family. So this incredible piece, so this internal pay. Could free, could be incredible confidence, incredible sense of command, authority. It could be a number of emotional, like the internal result that you started experiencing, and that actually is what the audience wants more than the external payoff, right?

    [00:21:39] Eileen: Right. We actually want that more, right? So when you start talking about that, you’re increasing the tempera. Of desire. Let me bounce that back to you April and then I’ll talk about how to get the crowd prompt. 

    [00:21:48] April: Yeah, yeah, yeah. This is, this is so good. What The first thing I was actually thinking about as you were saying it, cuz this is something as you know I’ve been working on for a long time, is that,

    [00:21:58] April: When [00:22:00] people hear signature talk, signature story, sometimes they think that that has to cover a, a longer period of time. But as you were going through this framework here, which is genius is amazing. You’re genius as you know, I love you so much. Mm-hmm. , I’m going through and saying, wow, you know, I could craft this whole entire story for just one solution.

    [00:22:21] April: That’s a really powerful solution, and. , super honest, where I feel like one of the areas that I, and I have my signature talks and I, I speak, but. When we’re talking about really creating change through a powerful signature talk that you can become known for. Yeah. Like the series of podcast episodes we’re doing here right now, I’m realizing for myself, and hopefully you guys who are listening can take this from me, that it doesn’t have to be my story.

    [00:22:48] April: Since I was 13. We can talk about what just happened in a moment like Eileen shared, of where she was before this event, this hap that happened in where she is now. And [00:23:00] I think personally for me, I’ve been trying to fit too darn much in it. And as you’re saying this, it would be like Pixar covering all of the stories of all of the characters, of all of their journeys, rather.

    [00:23:12] April: One little dude who had a problem and he created this solution in one movie. Yeah, that’s what I’m getting from This is actual a pure simplification of understanding that you guys, you don’t have to share. everything in, in a bag of chips, right? Yeah. Mm-hmm. , we can share one thing about one problem, about one solution as long as it relates to the product and program you’re selling, right?

    [00:23:41] April: Absolutely. That’s what I’m pulling from this right now. I’m saying, wow. You know, I think that, I think I’ve overcrowded my signature talk probably for years. . 

    [00:23:52] Eileen: Wow. That, yeah, it’s so, um, and you got yeah. Simple, simple, simple, right? And it, and it’s amazing how a quick story, [00:24:00] now you can take the story and make it short and make it long, but the streamlined method of the, how Pixar does it starts to really engage the audience at all the lo all the levels.

    [00:24:11] Eileen: Because now they’re starting to, they’re seeing, I’ll, I’ll show you how to get them to see their story inside of it, but it’s like, it’s very clear. And the more important thing is it’s now, it’s created. Internal desire and what we like, like buyer’s momentum for what you’re gonna offer. 

    [00:24:26] April: Amazing. I absolutely love this. Okay, so we have this, we have this framework. Obviously this will all be in the show notes for you guys Well, and hit replay and, and played in slow motion. Yeah. And all this stuff. So now what do we do next? We’ve crafted the story. Where do we go? 

    [00:24:41] April: Alright, friends. Well, I am going to stop this show right here because what you don’t know. Is Eileen stayed with us for another 40 minutes, giving her entire behind the scenes framework of what to do in the process of delivering your signature talk and. [00:25:00] It will absolutely blow your socks off, and I wanted to make sure that we were giving you ample time to do the work that she already talked about in the higher level.

    [00:25:10] April: Signature message crafting and the next episode that we’re gonna break up for you. So part one and part two, this is all part of our becoming known series. Is going to take you through serious, very, very serious. I have three pages of notes here. Uh, . Very, very, um, tangible, actionable ways that you can deliver your talk.

    [00:25:35] April: And not only that, Eileen gives you information on how to get a free copy of her book and so many other resources and how to connect with her on Instagram. Um, I will drop this for you guys right now to get a free copy of Eileen’s book. Connect with her on Instagram. It’s at Eileen Wild. And DM her my name, DM her April Beach, and her assistant will know exactly what that [00:26:00] means.

    [00:26:00] April: And they’re gonna drop a copy for you, a link for you to grab a free copy of her book. Million Dollar Speaker. I am currently reading this book. It is amazing. It reveals in more, even more in depth, um, some of the secrets that Eileen teaches. And I wanna make sure you guys get that. action Item four right now is replay this episode on the importance of your signature story and how Eileen broke out the processes of how to craft your signature story and then grab her book in the meantime.

    [00:26:30] April: Again, at Eileen Wild on Instagram, DM her my name, April Beach, and they will send you a free copy of her book. Next week’s show is part two, where we’re gonna unpack the how to actually go about doing this, and we have so many more resources for you as well. Thank you so much for being a listener of this show.

    [00:26:49] April: Please show Eileen love and gratitude for all the information that she dropped here. Find her on Instagram. Share this podcast episode on your Instagram, on your LinkedIn, on your Facebook, wherever you [00:27:00] do. Um, she’s really, really pouring so much into all of us here in these episodes, and I, I won’t want to make sure that we continue to help her expand her reach and the work that she’s doing.

    [00:27:10] April: Alright you guys, this is episode number 274. All of the show notes can be found by going to sweet life podcast.com/two seven. Four. I’ll see you next week.

     
     

    Podcast Guesting Strategies To Establish Thought Leadership – with Angie Trueblood and April Beach (Episode 273)

    Podcast Guesting Strategies To Establish Thought Leadership - with Angie Trueblood

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for:

    Coaches and consultants who are ready to level up and become know, and are looking for higher level strategies to use podcast guesting to increase sales and expand their reach.

    Summary:

    This episode is part of our “Becoming Known” Series of curated shows and cherry picked experts to level up your brand and establish thought leadership in your space. 
     
    Today, we’re detailing a higher level strategy to use podcast guesting to grow your business. We all know that podcast guesting is a great way to be seen, but what we’re talking about today surpasses the basics of “how to pitch”. 
     
    Our guest expert Angie Trueblood (The Podwize Group), unfolds powerful strategies used by thought leaders to expand awareness of their expertise that you may not have considered. In this show Angie shares insider thoughts to approach shows, why you should reconsider your signature talk titles based on your objectives, how to research hosts and analyze if they’re a good fit and how you could actually be holding back your brand from growth based on your guesting strategy. 
     
    Don’t miss this episode if: 
    • You use podcast guesting as lead generation
    • You need to rise above the noise in your niche
    • You’re a coach, consultant or expert and it’s time to separate yourself form the everyday work and start moving to leadership
    • You have been pitching the big shows and it’s not working 

     

    At the end of this episode you will: 

     
     
    1. Understand immediate changes you need to make to your show titles based on your objective
    2. Rethink your biggest wish list shows and search for off-grid podcasts with more power for your brand
    3. Choose one action to implement that will move you towards faster recognition to become known
     
     
    Resources mentioned: 
    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    273

    [00:00:45] April: Hi you guys. Welcome to episode number 273. I am excited to bring this show particularly, It disrupts the way that most people are taught about podcast guesting.

    [00:00:59] April: So we’ve talked about [00:01:00] podcast guesting a lot here on this show, but this is for those of you that are really, uh, interested in working intentionally to use podcast guesting to become known. This is for those of you who are either new in business, but really this is primarily for those of you guys who are scaling companies.

    [00:01:16] April: All right? This show we talk about strategies to become known and establish yourself as a thought leader, not just to go on shows that have a ton of listeners, and, uh, hopefully get a couple of downloads of your PDF freebie. We’re beyond that and we’re talking about the Nick’s level of using podcast guesting for thought leadership and become known.

    [00:01:37] April: On this show. So if you are an established business, you’re in the process of scaling, you’re a coach, an author, a speaker, a consultant, a a niche service expert, and you want to make sure everybody knows that you are the the leader of a different way of thinking in a different space, or you have a methodology or you have a program that’s really leading [00:02:00] the way.

    [00:02:00] April: If you still feel like perhaps you’re that best kept secret, this is the show for you to listen. At the end of this show, you are gonna be given very specific implementation steps. We actually have an implementation section at the end of that, so make sure you hang out for that and you’re gonna know which shows are the right ones for you.

    [00:02:18] April: You’re even gonna rethink your podcast pitching topics, and we’re gonna talk about the power of networking and where to look for the right host. And the right shows for you. My guest today is a very good friend. We’ve been friends for quite a few years now. Since I’ve had this Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast.

    [00:02:38] April: She has truly sent us the best guests that are, are just ready to deliver you guys gold. As a matter of fact, have you’ve been a listener for years? Quite a few of our amazing guests have come from this incredible woman and her team. This is Angie Trueblood that’s chatting with you here today on the show.

    [00:02:53] April: She’s the founder of the pod group and host of the Go Pitch Yourself podcast, and she uses her entrepreneurial [00:03:00] spirit, innovative thinking, and super connector powers to deeply support business owners who are using podcast guesting as the core. Of their business growth. Now, Angie, on a personal side, is super passionate about normalizing the voices of women in leadership positions, which she feels privileged to play an active role in through her work and kind of a funny little thing, Angie and I are both like, Bird watching dorks.

    [00:03:28] April: So over Christmas we were like sending each other these pictures of these like bird feeders that have cameras in them that you can like identify the kind of bird that’s eating on your bird feeder. Uh, so there’s just a little bit behind the scenes of, of how much we geek out. When we talk, whether it’s about ridiculous, uh, bird feeders or finding you guys the right shows to become known.

    [00:03:49] April: So if this is what you’re looking for, I promise you I don’t talk about bird feeders with her on this show. Just sharing a little behind the scenes with you guys, uh, then we’re gonna dive into it today. All of the [00:04:00] show notes can be found by visiting sweet life podcast.com/ 2 73. This is episode number 273.

    [00:04:08] April: The show notes will contain the transcription. All of the downloads, the links to connect with Angie and the summary of what we talked about. So they are pretty valuable. If you haven’t been to our show notes, uh, it’s, it’s kind of a, a hidden patch of gold if you haven’t tapped into that. All right, so if you guys are ready, let’s go ahead and dive in with Angie Trueblood.

    [00:04:30] April: Hey you guys. I’m so glad that you’re here. I am here with my friend Angie Trueblood. And Angie has really been, uh, the guide for us in podcast guesting, as well as her company actually sends the best, my favorite podcast guest over, over to us. Anytime we get something from Angie and her team saying, Hey, listen, you know, you, you should really, I.

    [00:04:53] April: Person. We stop everything that we’re doing and we check it out. So today we’re talking about, and we’re continuing our [00:05:00] series on becoming known. This is episode number 273, and we are diving into the very specifics of why podcast guesting and how podcast guesting can advance your mission to become known.

    [00:05:14] April: And what we’re really gonna dive into today are some things that you probably don’t hear on most shows. How to be a podcast guest or expand your reach through podcast casting. So we’re gonna pull back the curtain, especially for those of you guys that are a bit more advanced in entrepreneurship and help you understand how do you po use podcast guesting to scale your company.

    [00:05:36] April: Angie, welcome. Thank you so much for being 

    [00:05:38] Angie: here. Thank you, friend. It’s so good to see you. 

    [00:05:41] April: I know, I know. We’re on video now, you guys Yeah, if you, if you aren’t watching us on video, I, I, as I said to Angie, we’re doing video, but we actually don’t have it up yet. , uh, we will by then, this will be on YouTube, so you should check it out on YouTube as well.

    [00:05:54] April: So, Angie, you know, when we talk about podcast guesting, it’s. obviously not a big secret. [00:06:00] The podcast guesting, there’s a great opportunity to become known. Mm-hmm. , but what, what are people not being told? What, what is the flow of the masses and what do we wanna talk about to dis today in a way to not necessarily disrupt that, but help our listeners to rethink and maybe catapult above the masses who, who are trying to be podcast.

    [00:06:23] Angie: Yeah, I think it’s a great question. Um, I think the primary thing that we see not happening in the industry is not enough focus being spent on being strategic with who people are pitching, and there’s a myriad of things within the pitches, but I think from a higher level business growth perspective, Really identifying the types of audiences that are going to move your business forward.

    [00:06:50] Angie: Also, identifying the types of hosts that are gonna help you be known and become an authority in a particular space are really important [00:07:00] pieces that I don’t always see happening out there in the podcast. Pitching and guesting conversations. Right. 

    [00:07:07] April: There’s so much pressure to, you know, be on EO Fire or you know, be on, um, online marketing Made Easy and be on these huge shows, and PR coaches teach you to work your way up to those shows.

    [00:07:21] April: But I love the conversations that you and I have about the fact that those shows aren’t really the winning places for many people who need to become known in established thought leaderships. What? You know, why is that? . 

    [00:07:36] Angie: Well, it’s interesting, um, a lot of the bigger shows candidly, are changing their model.

    [00:07:43] Angie: I mean, we could go on about this forever, um, but some of the sh show, the shows are charging to have guests come on. And to me that kind of shifts the intent of the podcast from getting in front of audiences to it being more of like a sponsored collaboration. So that [00:08:00] to me, for some of the bigger shows, is a whole different ball of wax.

    [00:08:05] Angie: I mean, I would say the niche piece of it, and that’s what we do really well. And I think it’s because internally I am a very big nerd. I love research. My background is in science. I just hired someone. She’s from a PR firm. They serve tech companies. So we’re a little nerdy over here at the Budweis Group

    [00:08:23] Angie: But really digging in and seeing. , what are some of these shows that might not have millions of downloads, but have a really engaged audience in a particular vertical? So for me, I even, I almost shift my verticals of who we positioned me as a guest on, like who we outwardly reach out to. Last year I had a big focus.

    [00:08:46] Angie: I wanted to guest on shows that were hosted by podcast producers so that I would have a relationship with producers so they could refer their clients. To us. It has worked in the sense that I’ve created [00:09:00] relationships with a lot of producers, but I’ve also found that a lot of people who have their own podcasts are a little cash strapped, especially if they have a producer and they’re not always willing to come up off of it, you know, to have another level of service provider.

    [00:09:17] Angie: But it was a great mm-hmm. experimentation for us. Um, where I see the best benefit is really identifying these niche. Complimentary service providers, so for your listeners who are scaling, they know who they serve, they know what they do for them. Finding people who serve that same audience but in a different way is really key to getting in front of an audience and actually having a really good shot of having your pitch accepted.

    [00:09:45] April: Right. . It’s a such an interesting strategy. And, and, and I think that there, there, like I said, there’s so much pressure about wanting to be on these really big shows, but what you’re saying and what we talk about is [00:10:00] the gold, like, you know, they, for that, like the riches are in the niches. Well, the podcast is actually, is the same thing and I love that, that.

    [00:10:06] April: I love that you’re talking about that. So our listeners really need to establish their goals in who the decision makers are. So as you guys are listening to this and, and trying to identify how to apply this to your business, I want you to think of your buyer. I want you to think of the person that is going to be making a decision.

    [00:10:26] April: About whether or not they buy your services. If you guys are listening and you’re still in what we call that scale level where you’re selling your coaching and your programs to other individuals, then where are they and where are they not being inundated in, you know, fire hose with people just like you, right?

    [00:10:47] April: Let’s 

    [00:10:47] Angie: talk about that. Yeah. I mean, a great exercise for your listener to do is make a list of the clients that you’ve coached before. I’m sure many are in the hundreds, so the ones that really [00:11:00] stand out in your mind that you were really successful, you saw breakthroughs. And you also enjoyed it. Also, if they send referrals your way, that’s a bonus too.

    [00:11:10] Angie: So make a list of those clients that you’ve had before and then really describe their industry. That’s one thing we do with all of our clients on our intake call is tell, I don’t wanna know that they’re 25 to 35 years old and interested in wellness. Like that’s cool, but tell me. If it’s a b2b, cuz we work with a lot of B2B clients.

    [00:11:33] Angie: Who are they? Like describe them, what industry are they in? Are they copywriters? Did you have this one client who was a Facebook ad strategist? And whatever you did for them was amazing. . Then we wanna find niche shows that are possibly talking to Facebook ad strategists or service providers, like virtual assistants, or, we have a client right now and she helps C-Suite leaders really kind of take [00:12:00] their style and use it as an asset to showing up authentically.

    [00:12:04] Angie: She works with hospital CEOs and law firm partners, so. Finding shows that are talking to attorneys and women in non-traditional spaces, really. So you gotta figure out who are the people that you love working with? Let’s start there because you obviously connect with them. So showing up on a show that is speaking to an audience of those people, they’re gonna pick up on your energy and then when they come to chat with you, you’re both gonna have that.

    [00:12:34] April: right. What a great example and thank you for sharing about your client and this triggers me to wanna share with you guys. So one of the things that the Pod Wise group helped us with is making a list of shows where people who want to license their content, In or create a certification program are listening.

    [00:12:56] April: And so these other shows, it’s not all online business. I have an [00:13:00] online business podcast. Right. Like Yeah. You know, pitching me on another podcast. It’s kind of a lot like mine doesn’t Yeah. Doesn’t make a lot of sense. Right. But where are those other places? What are those other podcasts or what are those other genres, if you will?

    [00:13:15] April: Mm-hmm. that, uh, that my higher level clients that are moving. Licensing content to companies and other businesses, um, might be listening. and they might not even be in the online business space. Yeah. And so that was a really good exercise for us to go to. They could be corporate consultants, you know, that, that want to do this.

    [00:13:37] April: So that was a really good exercise. And so that’s, go through that process like Angie said, and really identify and kind of break that mold that you’ve been told in. You know, just pitch to the big ones. Do the, what is it called? Like the PR ladder where you get bigger and bigger and bigger and bigger. And although that’s, , but sometimes the gold and we’re, we’re seeing this kind [00:14:00] of across the board.

    [00:14:00] April: It’s been a trend for the last eight 18 months that the bigger shows, the bigger programs, so that, you know, people just don’t really wanna be there anymore. They wanna be known. They wanna be in spaces where their people are, where they don’t feel like just a drop of water in the ocean. And so this totally aligns with that.

    [00:14:16] April: Okay. So let’s kind of switch. Yeah, 

    [00:14:18] Angie: go ahead. Well, a lot of the well known shows are catering to beginning business owners. So depending on what your service is, they’re not at a point unless you have a DIY offering. They’re not at a point they will. I mean, rightly so. I did it when I was new in business, but they are there to get as much free content as they can while they’re getting everything lined up.

    [00:14:41] Angie: But if you have packages that are multi thousands of dollars, you, I. I mean people that are business owners like you and I and your listeners, like, think of the shows that you are listening to. Are you listening to online marketing Made Easy? Maybe, but I’m not Anyone. Not anymore. . [00:15:00] Yeah. So you wanna, that’s why the niche piece is so incredible, because no matter what stage of business you’re in, who doesn’t wanna listen to a podcast that’s telling the ins and outs of your specific industry?

    [00:15:14] April: Right. Right, right, right. Yeah. Okay. So hopefully we have you guys rethinking what shows you’re pitching. Angie, I wanna I want you to speak, um, for a minute. You talked about it a little bit before about networking, but when, when we’re talking about becoming known, which is the purpose of this series, how can we use networking through podcasting to become known, uh, you know, regardless of of where the show is Now, let’s kind of switch gears a little bit into, to, to.

    [00:15:43] April: Area of gold that I don’t think that people talk about often enough. 

    [00:15:46] Angie: Yeah, I mean, it is one of my primary networking tools. I am currently most active on other people’s podcasts and LinkedIn, and it really just has to do with you seeing these interviews as an [00:16:00] opportunity to develop a relationship with a host that exists after.

    [00:16:05] Angie: The podcast interview goes live. So that’s the first piece of it is, and it comes back again to strategically choosing the types of shows you’re gonna be on. Maybe the show that you’re pitching is not hosted by, uh, someone that has a giant audience, but if, you know, they’re super connector. We’ve pitched shows recently to where the show is really not that big, but they, the host has a massive LinkedIn following, and so, That’s awesome.

    [00:16:34] Angie: Like let’s get connected with that person because you can interact with them and their network. So the host is one piece of it, and then you can drive listeners to actually connect with you, right? So I think that’s the beauty of podcast guesting and one way to stand out is to show up as a human, to show up as craving relationships and wanting to connect with others and guiding people, like at [00:17:00] this point in the interview.

    [00:17:01] Angie: Your listener knows that I’m active on LinkedIn, right? So it would be a natural thing after this interview, like connect with me on LinkedIn, send me a DM if you have a question about what we’re talking about. So that’s really two pieces, is encourage the listener and talk to the listener. Have them being active, participant in the conversation.

    [00:17:21] Angie: And then, I mean, the host is just priceless. 

    [00:17:25] April: Right. Oh my gosh. That is so smart. And I feel like, um, especially just a side note with LinkedIn and how active you have been on LinkedIn. I have, I have seen your networking on LinkedIn and how much you’re doing on there and it’s just, it’s just been a real game changer for you and I know a lot of other people as well.

    [00:17:43] April: So, um, definitely do connect with, with Angie on LinkedIn. We’ll make sure her LinkedIn profile information is in the show notes. Okay, so today we’ve talked about rethinking, becoming known through podcasting. We have talked about rethinking what everybody’s [00:18:00] saying about wanting to be on the big shows and really hunting for the gold in specific areas, specific niches.

    [00:18:06] April: And you talked about doing so in such a way that establish. Thought leadership in a space. Mm-hmm. . Um, how would you help our listeners understand or define thought leadership is defined in so many different ways. Um, but is there a specific strategy or a specific, how do I wanna ask this question? So it’s useful for our users.

    [00:18:30] April: If somebody says, I wanna be known as the x Y. Yeah. As a person who helps them connect to the right podcasts, what are your first steps to help them accomplish that goal? 

    [00:18:45] Angie: A lot of times what we do is elevate the talk topics that they typically. Bring to us. Uh, we recently had a jumpstart client where we create the strategy, the pitch list, the template, everything, and hand it over to them for their team to pitch.[00:19:00] 

    [00:19:00] Angie: And she came in, so she’s an operations consultant and she came in and had previously pitched herself occasionally. And there was a ton of how-to topics. And I went through and I was like, Nope, you’re not at this level anymore. Nope. The people you wanna work with don’t want to know this stuff. . So a lot of it is about up-leveling.

    [00:19:20] Angie: When I started pitching myself, it was all how to mm-hmm. , here’s like the five things to include in a pitch. It was very how to now we’re elevating into what’s the impact that guesting can have? How can you repurpose and not work yourself to death creating content? So think about to be a thought leader.

    [00:19:41] Angie: It really does. Revolve around having a different idea of your industry or a unique perspective that others don’t have. For us, it’s all about the relationships and the long-term impact it can have. Um, so I would encourage you listener, as you’re especially looking in the scale [00:20:00] phase and looking to connect with pretty high level decision makers.

    [00:20:04] Angie: Get yourself out of the how-to topics, like get yourself into the, this is what’s going on in our industry. This is the impact that the work that I do can have, and this is how we can impact your business, your company, your clients. Wow. 

    [00:20:20] April: That was. everything right there. Um, , I think if it, if you guys are here and you need to hit rewind and re go back 15 seconds, like three times and listen to what Angie just said because now we have wrapped it together in, in a very powerful fireball for you is change the shows you’re looking to pitch yourself on.

    [00:20:42] April: If you’ve been going after the masses. Look for hosts that are very industry specific and where your decision makers are, where your buyers. Know your buyers know if you’re going from the newbie buyer to the advanced [00:21:00] buyer. And finally, and this is gold. Seriously, this is amazing. Thank you for sharing that.

    [00:21:07] April: Change the topics that you are pitching. If you wanna level yourself up as a thought leader in your space. Get away from the basic how-tos, which might be. Um, what do they, what do you call it? Click bait, , you know? Yeah. Might be click bait ways, three 

    [00:21:22] Angie: topics to pitch a podcast . Right, right, right. 

    [00:21:24] April: Uh, and instead talk about things kind of like we’re talking about here in this show.

    [00:21:29] April: This show is not titled How to, how to Grow Whatever Your Business Through Podcast Casting. We did those shows four years ago. Right. Yeah. Now we’re talking about how to rethink podcast guesting and what people aren’t telling you about podcast guesting to truly establish thought leadership in your space and become known.

    [00:21:48] April: And Angie is our go-to person. I think I’ve made that really clear. Um, just really appreciate her work. Um, it, I also will say this, if your business is to the level where you have [00:22:00] teams pitching, Angie’s company is really great with that . Okay? So also if you’re listening, if you’re self pitching, that’s awesome.

    [00:22:08] April: Like keep it up, keep, keep up the work. Make sure that you’re being mindful about your pitching, and we’re gonna connect you with Angie and resources to do this if you’re to that place where you have your other, your teams. Pitching and you’re building teams to pitch you. Um, that’s really what we lean on a lot for Angie, and a lot of our higher level clients do that as well.

    [00:22:29] April: So, okay. Let’s, let’s wrap this all up. What, uh, what did I not ask you in this consideration of, of using podcast guesting to become known at a higher level that maybe I should have? Was there something that I didn’t cover that we would, we would be doing our listeners a disservice if, if we didn’t quickly hit.

    [00:22:47] Angie: I mean, I think a lot of it is then you get the interview and you show up to record. How can you stand out? How can people who are listening develop an understanding of who you are and how you serve? [00:23:00] And it is about storytelling. It is about sharing some of the specific examples that I shared today about the operations client, about the client that has, you know, working with attorneys.

    [00:23:12] Angie: Get a couple of those. Like I took notes before we popped on live because I knew the angle and the direction that our conversation was gonna take, and so you need to be prepared to create some depth to your stories because just sharing what you think. It doesn’t trigger the audience to picture you as a thought leader, but when I have clients that serve CEOs of hospital systems, that seems to elevate what I do and who I do it for.

    [00:23:44] Angie: So, especially as you’re stepping into thought leadership, have some higher level stories, higher level examples, kind of on cue in order to give more descriptors to your answers of question. 

    [00:23:58] April: Great, great. And, and people [00:24:00] connect so much better through stories as for sure as well. And, uh, and you. More credible for sure, even though we know you’re already credible.

    [00:24:08] April: Otherwise you wouldn’t be here listening to this show and figuring out how to do this. So we, we all know the three of us know you are super credible. We just wanna make sure everybody else that hears you knows that, that you’re super credible and you’ve helped other people before. 

    [00:24:20] Angie: Um, yeah, well, and stories.

    [00:24:22] Angie: I mean, that’s what I wanna listen to when I listen to a podcast. I don’t, I don’t need another how to at the moment. I need like, just gimme examples. I wanna hear what other people are doing. 

    [00:24:31] April: Right. I love that. I love that. All right, well thank you so much for being on the show today. Okay, so implementation.

    [00:24:37] April: Next steps. How do people connect with you? What, what is the best way? And guys, we will drop this in the show notes as well, but take a pause here for a second and go and connect with Angie where she’s about to 

    [00:24:51] Angie: tell you too. Yeah. How is that the best place to. Any way to connect with me is over on the website, the pod wise group.com.

    [00:24:59] Angie: It’s pod [00:25:00] wise, with a z slash hi there, and there will be links to learning about our services. We have them if you want us to pitch you, if you want us to prep what you or your team. Pitch you and we even have strategy sessions. Um, for those of you who are looking for like the actual pitch, because I know that is always a question I get even though we were not talking about it.

    [00:25:22] Angie: Um, there’s a download there so you can see pitches that my team and I have actually sent and my links for LinkedIn are there as well. So all the places that you might wanna connect depending on where you are in your journey is at the pod wises group.com/hi. 

    [00:25:37] April: resources of gold. You guys, . All right, Angie, thank you so much.

    [00:25:41] April: Thank you for being my friend and somebody I know always tells me the truth about anything that we’re talking about in podcasting. Thank you for sending us some of the top notch best guests who have been here on this show. And thank you for pouring out so much gold to our listeners and always just freely giving first, and I just really 

    [00:25:59] Angie: appreciate [00:26:00] you for that.

    [00:26:00] Angie: Yeah, same too, friend. Thanks for having. 

    [00:26:03] April: Of course. All right guys, well, there you have it from the insider herself, Angie Trueblood with the pod Wise group. So let’s talk really quick about your implementation steps. First of all, I use Angie. I love her. Obviously she didn’t pay to be on this show. I asked her to come on here and be part of this becoming known series because I know she’s so incredibly valuable for you as.

    [00:26:25] April: Been for us. So definitely check out what they are doing over there, whether or not you’re in a position to work with them, get in their ecosystem because you’re gonna be glad you did. So let’s talk about your implementation steps after this show. What are we gonna do to implement? So here’s really quick wrap up for you.

    [00:26:44] April: This was a big concept we. It was a change of thinking to what you might have done before regarding podcast guesting. So pick one thing that you are going to do or think about or strategize from what we [00:27:00] talked about in this show. I can tell you right now as a team, we’re gonna be going back and making sure the titles of the shows that I am speaking on, the titles of the topics are, are, are not these basic topics.

    [00:27:12] April: based on our audiences that we work with. Now we’re gonna revisit our topics, which of course Angie and our team help us do as well. I think that that was a, a huge piece of gold in this show, but it depends on who you guys are trying to reach, right? So if you’re trying to reach those people that are new to your space, whatever it is you do, then those how-tos are amazing.

    [00:27:36] April: If you’re trying to use this show to establish thought leadership for yourself, then let’s rethink the topic. So you are pitching in what you’re saying on the, on the shows that you become a guest on. Let’s help you to make sure that you are helping others rethink, and therefore that’s gonna level you up more towards thought leadership in your space.

    [00:27:57] April: And of course, solve the, uh, [00:28:00] the, the goal that we’re talking about here, which is becoming. So if that, if you’re good to go and you think your titles are great, what else can you do? You can start researching shows that are very niche specific, very, uh, not necessarily very smaller shows, but smaller shows that have a good engagement.

    [00:28:19] April: Check out their social media handles. Check out, their LinkedIn. LinkedIn has just been so hot, especially for the last couple of of months, especially the last 18 months. So find out how much interaction is happening with those shows. It doesn’t matter if they don’t have a gazillion downloads, if they have an interactive audience in, like Angie said, a host that has a bigger following that has a relationship with our listeners.

    [00:28:42] April: That could be the, the gold target that you’re going after as far as podcast guesting. That’s your implementation wrap up. Thank you so much for listening to this show. I’m April Beach. If we don’t know each other, it’s so great to meet you. Uh, you can find all the information that we shared from this [00:29:00] episode by going to SweetLifepodcast.com/273.

    [00:29:05] April: This is episode number 273. And all the other resources we have for you are at sweetlifeco.com. All right, you guys have a fantastic day. Talk to you soon.

     
     

    (Becoming Known) How To Build A Press Worthy Personal Brand – with Brielle Cotterman (Episode 272)

    How to Gain Press by Building Your Personal Brand

    &nbsp

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for:

    This episode is incredible for entrepreneurs who are ready to scale by gaining media attention.

    Summary:

    If you’re looking to grow your personal brand and increase sales then using press is a smart avenue.  There are many ways to approach and land proper publicity. In this episode we talked to Brielle Cotterman  about how to build a foundation of celebrity and a press worthy personal brand through crafting stories. 

     

    Brielle breaks down her profitable storytelling framework and you will walk away from this episode knowing the three stories every entrepreneur must have in their bank to grow your business through press, and gain attention of highly sought after media.In this show we also break down the foundation of celebrity and the aspects of your business that you  want to have designed and structured before you move into the strategies here. 

     

    This is an excellent  episode for entrepreneurs who are ready to scale by gaining media attention. In order to leverage the  

    training taught in this episode you must have your online offers engineered that are ready to scale and a complete client journey laid out and ready to go. If you don’t have those things in place yet visit www.sweetlifeco.com

     

    At the end of this episode you will: 

     
     
    1. Know the Foundations of Celebrity
    2. Know the three stories that every entrepreneur must have
    3. Learn Brielle’s profitable storytelling format
     
     
    Resources mentioned: 
    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    272

     

    [00:00:44] April: Hi you guys. Welcome back to the show. I’m so glad you’re here for the NextGen of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur in Business Podcast and all the shows that I have lined up for you for the next five years. All of everything we’re gonna be talking about today can be found at [00:01:00] sweetlifeco.com. And all of our faithful listeners, you guys know that this is where you come to for business coaching and strategy that other coaches will charge you thousands for. 

    [00:01:09] April: Today’s episode is very powerful. My friend Brielle Cotterman is here and we’re gonna talk about how to create a press worthy personal brand. Who is this for? This is for those of you guys who are scaling your business. So we’ve already done a good job creating your offers. We have the client journey engineered. We know what’s gonna happen to all of the people we’re bringing into your business, after you earn media and press attention, after you speak on stages, that part is ready to go.

    [00:01:35] April: And now we’re talking about how to actually get you onto those stages, how to actually earn that media attention and what you’re gonna say in those, opportunities. You know, today, Brielle’s gonna break down her entire framework for the stories that you tell from stages. And this is a different approach to getting media in earning press like we’ve talked about here on this show.

    [00:01:56] April: And my other friends teach that we’ve actually had guests on this [00:02:00] show. Totally different approach. And what we’re talking about today, in my opinion, is really a prerequisite to the work you would do when you start the actual pitching process. Very, very, very important foundational work, so I’m very glad that you guys are here.

    [00:02:14] April: If we don’t know each other yet, I’m April Beach. I am the host here on the show and founder of the Sweet Life Company. And I’m a business architect and offer engineer, so I help experts, coaches, consultants, authors, and speakers scale their business online by creating million dollar programs, courses, trainings, license programs, and certification programs that lead them to high profit. Deep impact in the work they’re doing with the lifestyle freedom that they want. And I am so very glad that you’re here. You can always apply to work with us by cruising over to sweetlifeco.com. 

    [00:02:48] April: So let me tell you about our amazing, amazing guest today, Brielle Cotterman. She’s actually been in our community and in top our clients and worked with our clients. She’s actually gonna share one of our shared [00:03:00] clients that we have here. We’re gonna share some of the numbers here on this show about the impressions and the exposure that this client received because they have the things in place that we’re talking about here on this show. So we’re gonna give you some case studies from an actual client that. Is currently in the process of working with both of us. 

    [00:03:17] April: Brielle, for the record, is a TEDx speaker, a publicity experts and celebrity maker. She’s been the better part of the last decade helping clients craft and scale dream careers to seven figures and beyond by leveraging their personal stories and passions in order to create speaking, speaking tours. Author, award-winning books, procure media placements, and inspire millions of people, millions of people that need to hear their story. She’s a survivor of attempted murder and domestic violence and advocate for a world where intimate partner abuse is not tolerated, and survivors are met with empathy, 

    [00:03:51] April: On the business side again, her are regularly featured in Forbes, Fast Company, Martha Stewart Living. She just [00:04:00] got one of our clients in, Cosmo, in GQ. It’s not in her bio, but that just happened. Um, and I’m sure she’s done that before too. NBC, CBS, In Style Magazine and so many other, media and press publications and it’s because of her fantastic approach that you’re gonna hear here today. Hear, here, today on the show, she’s been married for just over a year to the love of her life, and they live on a horse boarding farm, uh, which is amazing. Absolutely gorgeous with three children and many, many animals. So they’re very, very excited about their life. They, they’re truly living the. I can’t wait for you to get to know Brielle today on the show if you don’t, and to hear and implement what she says. So again, all the show notes can be found by going to sweetlifeco.com. Click on the podcast and this is episode number 272. So let’s dive into the show.

    [00:04:52] April: Hello Friends, it is 2023 when we are recording this show and this is a Next Gen of the Sweet Left Entrepreneur [00:05:00] Podcast and there was no better person who I have been wanting and needing to record a podcast episode honestly for a very long time with then my friend Braille Cotterman, who is here today. And I just wanna kick off the year right, kick off the year strong, and dive in with Brielle and welcome you to the Sweet Life family.

    [00:05:19] April: We’re really kind of a family of listeners here, of entrepreneurs that grow together by listening to amazing experts in applying what you teach us on the show. So welcome here to the show. Give everybody a short introduction of yourself and, and why you are in this place to lead other women. 

    [00:05:36] Brielle: Thank you, April. I appreciate it. As you know, I am honored and always super excited to be a part of anything that you’re doing. So it’s lovely to be here with you today. So I am a publicity expert and a celebrity maker. I’m a TEDx speaker. I’ve been in the PR world for more than a decade, and prior to that I was in C-suite level sales and marketing.

    [00:05:59] Brielle: [00:06:00] Uh, I’ve been a professional speaker on behalf of charitable organizations, and before that I competed in the Miss America Organization. So combine all of these talents, experiences, this unique skillset that I have, compiled along the way, and that’s what puts me in the position to help women and men like yourself, you know, incredible entrepreneurs with a cause step onto the world stage and share their story, not only to impact the world, but also their bottom line.

    [00:06:35] April: Wow. I love that. And I, I can’t wait to dive into what we’re gonna unpack here today. So today we’re talking about building a press worthy personal brand. And before we actually dive into how to go about doing this, and, and the reasoning behind it, which I can’t wait for people to hear, what you’re gonna talk about today is, can we talk about some of the mindset issues where maybe some leaders.

    [00:06:59] April: Aren’t [00:07:00] necessarily leaning into this, do they? Do people not believe that they, that their story is valuable? Or what are some of those blocks for any of our listeners that are thinking, wow, I’d love to do that, but I can’t because of what are maybe some of those lies or blocks that people may be telling themselves, so we can just get those out of the way before we even dive into nailing this objective.

    [00:07:19] Brielle: Yeah, so absolutely what I see all the time in April. So many people who are kind of like nose to the grindstone, building their business, creating their brand, and then they look up one day and they realize, if I wanna get where I really want to be, I have to have a personal brand that supports what I’m doing because people now care about me because I am the CEO O or I’m the founder, or you know, I’m in this place.

    [00:07:43] Brielle: And so with that, like you said, comes a whole host of mindset things, and that can be as much as. Not wanting your whole life to be public, not wanting, um, you know, to air your dirty laundry, so to speak. But there are [00:08:00] ways of sharing and telling stories that don’t include all of the details that are very inspirational and.

    [00:08:07] Brielle: You know, it also, a part of that is stepping onto the world stage means something different for everyone. That doesn’t necessarily mean that people are going to recognize you when you walk down the street, but what it does mean is you are taking advantage of the opportunities that we have right now in the world.

    [00:08:26] Brielle: Whether that’s media, whether it’s podcasting. Speaking, you know, whatever that piece might look like for you. And we are using that as this really phenomenal marketing tool to be able to leverage who you are and what you stand for. And in doing so, support the ultimate success of your business. So there are mindset issues around that, and I think that that’s the, the one that I hear the most.

    [00:08:49] Brielle: You know, when it comes to story, it’s either, oh, I have so many stories, I don’t know where to begin. Or, the other camp is, I don’t know that my story is, would even matter to. 

    [00:08:59] April: [00:09:00] Right, right, right. I can resonate with both of those sides. 

    [00:09:03] Brielle: Yeah. 

    [00:09:03] April: Just so you know, I, I have thought both of those things and, um, so I’m very excited and, and grateful for your leadership for, for me as well. Okay. So today diving into building a press worthy personal brand, what actually is a press worthy personal brand? Let’s start there. 

    [00:09:20] Brielle: Yeah. So when you think about organizations, it’s very important to remember that information that is shared by an individual converts seven times faster than information that’s shared from a corporation or an organization. And what that means is if you are the ceo, you are the face of your organization, you are a leader, and you are sharing content, information that it’s, it doesn’t have to be exactly the same as what your organization shares, but it’s in support of it. So basically, you think. That press worthy personal brand is the brand that is an authentic representation of who you are and what you stand for, what makes you [00:10:00] unique, and it allows you to intersect with the values, mission, and vision of your organization.

    [00:10:06] Brielle: So really a personal brand. Everybody has one. I always say that some people, you know, they’re like, oh, well I haven’t taken the time to create it. Well, you have one. It’s just whether or not you are curating that personal brand, and we always say that a personal brand is how you leave people feeling how they feel after they’ve had an interaction with you.

    [00:10:27] Brielle: Maybe they see you speak on the stage, or maybe they listen to your podcast or check out your website or your social media, or maybe they read an article that you’ve written, and chances are there is not a cohesive lens there. That’s what I run into most of the time with people who are really successful leaders, advocates, entrepreneurs.

    [00:10:45] Brielle: And even in the C-Suite. And of course, we want that sort of information that’s coming from you, who you are, what you stand for, what makes you unique to be a true representation of your heart. [00:11:00] 

    [00:11:00] April: Hmm. Wow. Okay. So I think all of our listeners right now are saying, yes, I, I, that’s what I want. And that’s different than maybe what that I, I thought that it was mm-hmm. and I, I feel like even the way that you explained it takes a lot of pressure off of some people that feel like it’s really all about them. It’s actually not all about them. It’s really just about, like you said, how they make people feel and how that resonates in their, with their work in the mission that they’re doing and and forwarding the work of their company and obviously building relationships as well.

    [00:11:33] April: And so you said, so what you see. Is it, it’s not cohesive across all of those outlets. Is that usually the case in when people come to you and they’re saying they might have this per, they might give this sort of impression off in, in this place and this and this place is, do you find that people are inconsistent with their brand across platforms?

    [00:11:55] Brielle: Absolutely. And well, not just their, uh, I’m with their [00:12:00] personal brand. The thing that I find the most is that people don’t understand how they are interpreted, perceived, or recieved so. 

    [00:12:09] April: Got it. 

    [00:12:09] Brielle: We hear all the time. Share stories. Share stories, you know, I mean, it’s constant. Um, one, I see a lot of people not sharing the right stories, and two, I see them not sharing stories in a way that our minds easily comprehend, recall, and can share. So anytime we share a statement or a fact, when we wrap that in a story, it’s more than 70 times as likely to be remembered. 

    [00:12:40] April: That’s amazing. I love that stat. Okay, . It just blows my mind every single time, but it’s also not surprising. So let’s talk about, what do you mean when you say foundation of celebrity? We haven’t brought it up here yet in this podcast and, and I’d love to dive into that first. You speak all the time and you help entrepreneurs and leaders all the time [00:13:00] establish their foundation of celebrity. What actually is that? 

    [00:13:04] Brielle: So basically that is a thorough examination. My personal brand, how does my personal brand support, uh, what it is that I’m doing professionally or with my advocacy or that my organization is doing?

    [00:13:18] Brielle: And then, , the, not only the stories that go along with that, but making sure you have a sound business. You know, honestly, you help clients and people to develop a large portion of that foundation of celebrity. Because here’s the deal. When we talk about a press worthy brand, what is a press worthy brand?

    [00:13:36] Brielle: It’s going to capture attention. Okay? It’s going to get GQ and Cosmo and Forbes and Business Insider to say yes. But if we get all of those incredible, publications to say yes, what’s going to happen if we have nowhere to push them? We have nowhere for those people to go or when they get there. It’s confusing.

    [00:13:56] Brielle: We want people to be able to take one step closer to you in a [00:14:00] way that is easeful and makes total sense. For your ideal client and really for who your ideal client hopes to be. And that’s something you know that you and I share from our perception of who are we speaking to when it comes to marketing, and that’s definitely what we look at.

    [00:14:16] Brielle: So foundation of celebrity, you’ve gotta have a sound business, you’ve gotta have that client journey. When the different points of entry, when they come into your space, how are they going to take one step closer to you? It’s phenomenal to get GQ and Cosmo. But if we get GQ and Cosmo and people come to your site and then they’re struggling, like, what, what do I do next? You know, people, we, we lose them and that’s not at all what we wanna do. So, um, having that foundation of celebrity looks a, it’s a lot more complex than just being able to give a really incredible interview and knowing how to show up on television, what to say and how to say it. But it’s the behind the scenes that really matters when it comes to making an impact on your bottom [00:15:00] line.

    [00:15:01] April: Mm-hmm. Mm-hmm. Yeah, and I, I believe that there are so many people that do actually put themselves out there that don’t have those business structures in place. And that’s exactly what you’re saying that you see as well. 

    [00:15:12] Brielle: Absolutely. 

    [00:15:12] April: All everybody, so foundation of celebrity, you guys, when you get out there and, and we want you out there. We want you telling your story, which we’re gonna dive into next. We want you to have this. Amazing personal brand, but let’s also make sure that the rest of your business is in place and ready for the attention, and really like a sponge to be able to absorb that work that you do when you put yourself out there, when you earn press and, and you speak on stages.

    [00:15:38] April: So now that we have the foundation lead, foundation of celebrity, the reason why you need a personal brand, all of these things. Something you said earlier really hit home for me, and it’s something that I’ve struggled with for years, is how to actually take my experiences and turn them into stories where, people [00:16:00] understand it’s not about me or even my story so much, but how do we make it so that other people can see themselves in our stories and then take that next step with us?

    [00:16:11] April: And it is something I am the first one to admit. I’ve struggled with this. For years and years and years. And so I would love for you to help all of us just really understand how to move into this direction. You have an amazing framework. I know, but let’s talk about stories a little bit. What do we say We got up there on stage. What? And then what do we say? 

    [00:16:31] Brielle: So, you know, we all know stories are memorable. That’s the way we’ve been teaching since the beginning of time. Our. Human brains are really literally hardwired to learn through story. And story does two things. It creates connection and it inspires action. And those are only stories that are told. Well, April. And so that’s the thing. It’s. You know, most of us, by the time we are in a place where people begin to, and when I say people, I mean [00:17:00] like press and like, you know, those massive numbers like we, we were talking about before, 85 and a hundred million people that are consuming content of our clients.

    [00:17:10] Brielle: They begin to care about our stories when we’ve lived a lot of life typically. And so sorting out what are the stories to tell. Doing that from the perspective of I wanna tell a story that’s gonna create connection and inspire action, and I wanna inspire the right action. Um, you know, you mentioned earlier it’s not just about pitching.

    [00:17:31] Brielle: So it’s not just about pitching the media, it’s not just about getting the win, it’s about being prepared and knowing. When I do get this media win, am I going to do myself more good than harm by telling the right stories and having that foundation of celebrities. So that’s a big piece. You know, taking your own experiences and looking for moments in time that are transformational.

    [00:17:54] Brielle: So that’s my. That’s always my best advice when you begin to break down, and we have three [00:18:00] stories that we recommend everyone tell, but you know when you begin to assess and you look at that, we want to show people who you are through your story rather than tell them so. That’s the, that’s one of the biggest mistakes I see people make all of the time.

    [00:18:16] Brielle: They wanna list their whole resume. You know, they wanna go through this whole laundry list of, well, I’ve done this and I’ve accomplished that, and blah, blah, blah. And really, at the end of the day, your consumers and your media decision makers, they don’t care. They wanna, they want a real person. Yeah. They wanna create connection.

    [00:18:33] Brielle: Mm-hmm. , um, you know, we talk about no, like, and trust and more than it’s, these are new numbers too. Um, more than 86% of all consumers say a brand’s authenticity is one of their, the reasons for their major, major decision making when it comes to buying or not buying. .

    [00:18:54] April: Wow. Wow. So when we talk about these stories and [00:19:00] we get up on stage, whether it’s an online stage or an offline stage, or somebody is writing an article about us and um, In a magazine, um, or, or even when somebody’s talking about us or a, a business partner is talking about us and saying, Hey, you should really go to Brielle or whoever.

    [00:19:17] April: Um, how do we craft these stories so that people remember how do we actually build these stories? You have this amazing framework. I know that you’ve taught our clients in, in one of our private settings before, and it’s just so powerful, and I can’t wait for our listeners to hear this. You call it the profitable storytelling framework. Is that correct? 

    [00:19:37] Brielle: Yeah, yeah. So our profitable storytelling format, but, and there’s three stories that we ask every brand to be telling, because most of us have a million stories, and I love to ask people to create a story bank. Once you master the profitable storytelling format, you’re gonna have three foundational stories to your personal brand.

    [00:19:54] Brielle: But beyond that, develop a story bank because you are going to have opportunities with social, [00:20:00] you’re gonna have opportunity for your email list, for articles. You know, you’re gonna be able to pull some of those additional stories. And once you really master the format, then you should be able to keep this log, develop this bank.

    [00:20:12] Brielle: Just make a a Google Doc and just drop them in there. And, and not only will you. You know, does it make this incredible piece of kind of like your media playbook, but it also is inspiring. so when you think about story, we talk about a breakthrough story. So, We call it that because it helps you to break through the noise, but it’s typically based around a major breakthrough of transformation.

    [00:20:36] Brielle: And then we also ask for you to tell a business zone of genius story. Why are you the very best at what it is that you’re doing? And then we ask you to tell your passion story and just one caveat there. , 99% of all entrepreneurs, when we ask what their passion is, they say what it is that they do, um, with their work, and we ask you to choose something different.

    [00:20:59] Brielle: [00:21:00] So I’m a wild friend, champion equestrian. I live on a farm. I know you are passionate, you love the ocean and the beach and all of those things. And so telling a story that allows people to create there because where those three stories intersect. , that’s really where your soulmate level clients live, and that’s, you know, we all wanna be working with the people who inspire us and light us up. So that profitable storytelling format helps us to do that, and it makes it super simple. 

    [00:21:27] April: Okay, so three stories were the breakthrough story, the zone of genius story, and the passion story. 

    [00:21:33] Brielle: Yes. 

    [00:21:34] April: That is so powerful. And are these big huge stories or are these just little moments in time? That or, or doesn’t matter Is really, is, is what we’re looking at here.

    [00:21:44] Brielle: So the way we ask our clients to do that is we ask you to take the three stories and distill them down to three bullet. So, you know, if you are in a format where you have a 45 minute podcast interview, or you’re giving a keynote, [00:22:00] potentially you can bring in a lot more details, a lot more of the rise intention in the story, so to speak.

    [00:22:07] Brielle: Um, But really you should be able to distill it down to its simplest format because I can’t tell you April how many times I have had people booked for a five minute television segment and then breaking news happens, and then their segment gets cut down to a minute and 45. So the simplistic storytelling format that I’m getting ready to share really seems so simple, but it is how our brains are hardwired to interpret and remember and share stories.

    [00:22:41] Brielle: So it is using what we know from a psychological perspective and leveraging that it’s using the information that we have learned. You know, centuries of teaching, communicating, marketing, all of the things that humans are doing with [00:23:00] stories. So use what we know and leverage that instead of working against it.

    [00:23:05] April: Wow. All right. So hopefully your wheels are spinning you guys, and if you’re taking notes listening to this, uh, you’re, you’re a smart cookie , you can always come back and replay it again. Um, so let’s dive into that storytelling format. , what does this actually look like and how do you guide entrepreneurs through this process?

    [00:23:22] Brielle: So anytime we’re talking about, um, our profitable storytelling format, we look at three pieces to every story. Like I mentioned earlier with the breakthrough story. We wanna begin with what is that transformational moment? So what is the climax of the story? Take us to that moment in time. I did a workshop recently live, um, with an incredible group of women in Nashville and called one of them up onto the stage and we were able to workshop some of her stories and, you know, cuz she was one of those girls that was like, I don’t, I don’t have a story. I don’t know, you know, I’m great at what I do, but I, my story’s not gonna affect [00:24:00] anyone. Um, there’s two things to remember. 

    [00:24:03] Brielle: One, your story does not have to be filled with drama and trauma to make a difference. And to make an impact and to inspire. It does not have to be that sell everything and move to Bali moment. You know? Um, just your story and the authentic interpretation and conveyance of that story really can inspire action and allow people to take ownership of their own story as well. 

    [00:24:29] Brielle: And then two, you know, this is a woman who I was workshopping with who has accomplished incredible things in her lifetime, created amazing foundations and organizations and sh we can, through telling a story, we don’t have to say. she’s tenacious, she is creative, she’s accomplished all of these things. We can show people that through a very well told story, and that’s what the profitable storytelling format does. 

    [00:24:59] Brielle: So you [00:25:00] begin dissecting your stories, thinking of what are transformational moments in time? What is a moment in time that I can take people to, that’s the climax. So that’s the second piece of the story. And then just very simpl. Who was I before and who was I after? So who was I before? That’s the exposition. The start of the story. This is going back to like 10th grade literature, you know, English composition. How should a story arc be created? Who were you before the tension rises?

    [00:25:29] Brielle: Then there’s the climax or the major transformation in the story, and as the tension. you, it is, you are sharing your rise. And then the climax, you know, the, the tension falls after the climax because here you are now. And so every story, each one of those three foundational stories for your brand should be told using your profitable storytelling format. So who are you before major transformation or climax? Take us to that moment in time, and then who are you [00:26:00] after? 

    [00:26:01] April: Mm. And with that format, is there usually, um, you know, some time and break. It obviously depends on the different venue. If, if somebody’s being interviewed on the Today Show, there isn’t gonna be that back and forth conversation, but is in some settings, do we craft that story as well for people who are the listeners who are the audience to have a moment to relate or resonate or absorb in the actual delivery of these stories.

    [00:26:26] April: And, and have them even workshop internally. Is that part of something that you feel like is important, is finding those break points where the listeners to the stories can, I don’t even know if it’s actually like a break point in the speaking, but do you, is that actually really identified through the whole entire story, or are there periods of time in which maybe there will be trigger where it’s like, does this relate to you or do you, do you see this happening in you?

    [00:26:50] April: I don’t necessarily ask questions like that. I think it depends on who your audience is. Here’s one thing that you have to remember, and I love that you used this example. When you see people on [00:27:00] Good Morning America, when you see people on Jimmy Kimmel Live, you have to understand that their foundation of celebrity is strong.

    [00:27:08] Brielle: Okay? This did not just happen on accident. They do not show up looking like a million bucks, knowing how to sit, how to speak, what stories to. How to get a laugh. They do not just show up this way. There is a lot of preparation and a lot of work that goes into ensuring that they are going to have. That, you know, knock it out of the park moment when they’re on Good Morning America and on Jimmy Kimmel Alive and a story that is told well, does not require us to ask our audience to reflect story that is told, well, touches that person in their heart and creates a connection.

    [00:27:47] Brielle: And then you don’t have to ask them to please remember this or you know, this is how the, when you think of me think of the story, you don’t even have to make that ask because you’re just one human being speaking to another. I. [00:28:00] 

    [00:28:00] April: That’s fantastic and your framework is so powerful and you guys listening to this, our clients have taken Brielle’s framework and we have a shared client that Brielle said that Brielle has just gotten on crazy press in and this woman knows how to tell her story. And she is absolutely amazing at it Exactly because of, of the guidance that she’s received in this process of training to do it. And so when we’re talking to people who aren’t that far along, let’s talk about people who are just starting out. Um, W and you said it’s really important to have the most, you know, at least one of these stories, the zone of genius story. Um, you know, the breakthrough story. Which one do you feel like is the most important as it relates back to their business for them to craft first? Is it dependent on the entrepreneur or is, do you find one across the board for the, that’s the best one for them to lean into? 

    [00:28:54] Brielle: The breakthrough story is the most important.

    [00:28:57] April: Okay. All right. Makes sense. 

    [00:28:58] Brielle: Because like I said, whether [00:29:00] you are, you know, a C-suite executive and you are crafting your fir, your personal brand for the first time because you’re getting attention and you realize now that’s important. Or you are an entrepreneur who has built this business and you look up and you’re like, okay, well if I wanna scale to the next level, I have to kind of step up behind the curtains and I’m gonna have to do some media.

    [00:29:21] Brielle: I’m gonna have to do some podcasts. I’m gonna have to go on some stages. Regardless of where you are, the breakthrough story is really what allows people to know who you are and what you stand for. Think of the breakthrough story as the story of your why. And that’s kind of, you know, that hot button word, uh, question. Tell us about your why. You know, all of those things. We can all rattle off a long list of the reasons why we do things or don’t do things or things are important to us. But imagine if you can share that in a story. 

    [00:29:54] Brielle: There again, that becomes 70 times more memorable and we’re thinking about in this contemporary [00:30:00] world where there is so much noise in the marketplace, there are so many different things that you can buy, product services, people out there. And what we are really doing is we are helping people to create that contemporary word of mouth. So thinking back to, you know, when I was, when I was growing up, if I wanted to buy. anything. You know, if I wanted to buy a new sweater, I would wanna call up one of my girlfriends or my cousin and say, you know, where did you get that? That’s so cute. And they would ra make a recommendation? Oh, we’ll go down to the square and that sort of thing. 

    [00:30:38] Brielle: You know, cuz we were all buying things in person and mm-hmm. now we have this incredible ability to create that. Level of top of mind marketing and that same level of word of mouth endorsement and third party verification by being featured in the publications [00:31:00] that are ideal consumer and who they hope to be, where they are consuming their content. So if they are a devout reader of Business Insider and Business Insider chooses to feature you and they could have chosen anyone.

    [00:31:13] Brielle: You are literally putting yourself in that exact same position, so they are now giving you that endorsement. Just like when I used to call up my cousin and ask her what I should go by. 

    [00:31:23] April: I love that. All right, and so what are the next steps for our listeners? They are gonna go through and see this in the show notes, and obviously we’ll make sure that they can connect with you as well, but they’ve gone through this process. They’ve, first of all made a. Is this important to them? Is this something that they have maybe dragged their feet on for one of those mindset issues or the, the lack of confidence in the beginning that we talked about In this show, you’ve brought them very clearly through understanding why everybody needs to pay attention to their personal brand, 

    [00:31:54] April: not why everybody needs a personal brand. I love that you’ve. Love that you said that too, because we all do have a [00:32:00] personal brand. I even remember talking to my, my three little boys going to elementary school and when they’re, you know, the kids that they hang out with and the clothes that they wear, that’s like, you know, their little brand and that affects us and we’ve all been doing it. We all are aware of, of how we come across and how we make each other feel. I, and I was just recalling a conversation actually last week with one of my kids about this new kid in school and that every, everybody was being mean and he had a choice of of who he is gonna be.

    [00:32:29] April: Right. And that’s the brand of who he is. That’s what he’s known for. And it’s so interesting how we don’t even identify that as a young age, but we’re all quite aware that how we show up and the stories we tell and who we are to other people and the influence that we have in any situation, whether it’s a large situation or a small situation, really does affect our lives and our businesses.

    [00:32:52] April: And so, uh, you teach. Getting pressed different than anybody I know. All right, I’m gonna say this [00:33:00] here. So the way that Brielle does this, you guys, and we’ve done tons of episodes and I have lots of friends that talk about how to land big press deals, and there are ways that we can talk about pitching press and doing media kits and all these things.

    [00:33:15] April: None of that can be talked about until we have mastered and done what Brielle is talking about here. Because that is the action of, of going out when there’s so much more from a foundational level that needs to be discussed and decided upon. And you as a leader, and I’m saying this to me too, you know, and, and I have received a lot of press in the past and I knew none of this.

    [00:33:42] April: And so I feel like. , this process was a huge missing link in my history of understanding. And that there, that my impact on the exposure that I had received in the past could have been [00:34:00] so much better, so much greater. I mean, and this is a long time ago, guys. This is like 12 years ago. Okay? So I’m gonna now age myself.

    [00:34:07] April: You know, when I first really started receiving big press, right? But now it’s different. Now it’s even more important because it’s so noisy and it’s so loud and everybody’s out there screaming me, me, me. But those that are able to craft these powerful stories and to create this celebrity foundation, like Brielle is saying, here are the ones that it’s, it’s like we’re gonna be separating oil from water.

    [00:34:35] April: We’re talking a lot about that. I really feel like that’s gonna be the theme of 2023 is separating those who are just out there doing it from those that are committed to the way they’re going about running their businesses. Um, and so I, I really love and appreciate this conversation so much, Brielle, and I know our listeners are gonna love us too.

    [00:34:54] April: And what a great way to kick off the year. It doesn’t matter when you’re listening to this, um, but, you know, kick off the [00:35:00] year and really roll forward in our commitment to ourselves in. in our calling, if that’s kind of like a cheesy word, our calling. But really I believe that this is an important conversation to have in that journey to gaining media attention and and being on podcast. So what else did I not ask that I need to be asking for people to be able to take action from this show? 

    [00:35:22] Brielle: Well, one of the things that I wanna touch on real quickly, April, is what you just said, what you just pointed out. That’s the reason why people traditionally. Upset with their PR firms. We’re not a traditional PR firm.

    [00:35:36] Brielle: We’re more like an executive level finishing school, coupled with a. PR agency that gets you those incredible opportunities to use as a marketing tool. So, you know, we look at everything from personal brand through how do we incorporate and really fuse that marketing plan with a strategic PR campaign and.

    [00:35:59] Brielle: You [00:36:00] know, it’s exactly what you said. There are ways to pitch the media. There are ways to go out there and get featured, but if you don’t have a strong foundation, if you’re not doing you’re, you could be doing yourself more harm than good . And so, you know, there are so many different pieces from image all the way through to how do you leverage that media, and I think really every single person who has an interest in pursuing media and whether or not you have an interest or you just recognize the importance of it, is starting to dissect and refine and define those three foundational stories.

    [00:36:36] Brielle: Because if you begin telling those, you are going to begin to create consistency, even if there hasn’t been consistency in your own personal. Once you identify those three stories and you can begin to tell them, I think that’s the very first important strong step towards standing out and creating that press worthy personal brand.

    [00:36:59] April: thank you. [00:37:00] Thank you so much. Thank you for your leadership here and your leadership to my clients and in our programs, and how much you, um, give your time to come in and work with our clients too as well. So for people to find you. And move forward. You guys have the Celebrity Incubator coming up, but people are gonna, you know, people listen to podcasts forever.

    [00:37:19] April: So if you’re listening to this in the beginning of 2023, you guys have Celebrity Incubator, so let’s talk about how they can find you as far as, um, you know, are evergreen links, so they always are able to access you and learn more about what’s going. 

    [00:37:34] Brielle: Yes, it’s always my name. It’s my name. It’s Brielle Cotterman, B R I E L L E, and it’s Cotterman, C O T T E R M A N, on Insta, on LinkedIn, on Facebook, and that is our actual U R L.

    [00:37:49] Brielle: So that is always the best way to find us and what’s going on with our agency and all the incredible things that our clients are doing in the world as. [00:38:00] 

    [00:38:00] April: Thank you so much, Brielle. So glad you’re here. 

    [00:38:03] Brielle: Likewise. Thank you my friend. 

    [00:38:05] April: Okay guys, great show with Brielle. Now we have 60 seconds to implement. What is one thing that you’re gonna take from this show and start and do today? So whether it is, do you remember those three stories? She said that everybody needs to have the breakthrough story, the zone of genius story or the passion story. Which one of those do you already? And if you don’t have one, maybe your call to action for yourself today is just to create and determine what that breakthrough story is going to be. All right? So I know sometimes you can’t do all the things we talk about on the show, but I want you to walk away and I want you to take action on one thing so that we can always keep moving your business forward. Again, all the show notes are sweetlifeco.com. 

    [00:38:44] April: If you find yourself in a place where you’re not ready for this, because we haven’t engineered your offer ecosystem in the client journey and your actual programs yet, then you can also find out how you can apply to work with us so we can get you ready to then apply what we’re talking about on today’s show. All right, you guys be. [00:39:00] And I’ll see you next week.

     

     
     

    (Becoming Known) How To Expand Your Reach, Increase Sales and Become a Thought Leader

    Becoming Known: How To Expand Your Reach, Increase Sales and Become a Thought Leader

     

    <iframe>

     

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for/Summary:

    This episode is for those of you who are moving into higher levels, more impact, bigger stages, more influence, more income, more impact. If you’re an established coach, consultant, speaker, author or niche service expert, and it’s time to move up. 
     
    In this episode, we kick off with the most powerful things you must have in place before you start your “becoming known” campaign. We’ll cover a short check list of foundations and  work on your strategy to become known. You’ll receive a list of action items and also a list of strategic decisions, including how to make these choices and where to start. 
     
    It’s hard to become known when you’re head down in your work. You’re busy taking care of your clients, not telling everyone about the work you’re doing. You just do the work, and hope people will tell their friends about your awesomeness. 
     
    Or, perhaps you do have a huge social following? You’ve mastered the art of communication, you love being on your social platforms and your following has grown, but now it’s time to become known on the next level to move up, not only move forward. 
     
    This series of shows breaks down proven strategies from the Greats, that you can leverage today to become known, establish leadership and rise above the noise, or break into new noise, with guests Brielle Cotterman, Eileen Wilder, Angie Trueblood, and more…
     
    Let’s get going… 
     
    At the end of this episode you will: 
    1. Have a punch list of assets you need to have in place before you start your “becoming known” campaign
    2. Have clarity on how to use the next 5 SweetLife Podcast episodes to your advantage (so you don’t pay a coach $$$ to tell you what you’re getting here for free) 
    3. Plot your Becoming Known course and start moving your business in that direction now 
    4. Have the steps to build your leading method you’ll become known for
     
     
    Resources mentioned: 

    8 Steps to Create  Your Signature Process, Coaching Method, or Framework – https://www.sweetlifeco.com/method

    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    271

    [00:00:00] You are listening to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast with business mentor and entrepreneur activator April Beach, connecting great people with great people to do great things. That is dope. Today I’m giving you a framework. I love you. This transformation process, you say, here you go. Yes, this is it.

    [00:00:26] Everything you just said, April, wow, that is the best business architecture and business engineering. I’ve never really thought of it like that, but right away when you said that, Thank you, April. I appreciate you, dude. Yeah. 

    [00:00:44] Hi you guys, and welcome to the kickoff episode of a new mini-series we’re doing called Becoming Known. You are in the right place if you’re an established coach or a consultant and you have used a lot of these PR and influence and awareness [00:01:00] strategies in the past. But now it’s time to move up. Not only move on with your business, but move up. So let me explain to you exactly what we were talking about in this show.

    [00:01:10] This is the kickoff of our little mini-series called Becoming Known. We have some powerful treats coming up for you in addition to what we’re talking about here today. In the future, you are going to hear from the greats like Eileen Wilder. We have two episodes where Eileen breaks down her entire million dollar speaking framework in a workshop format for you that is coming.

    [00:01:33] You also get to hear from Angie Trueblood, which she is, in my opinion, the number one podcast guest placement strategist. She’s absolutely amazing, and Brielle Cotterman, who is a PR, an influence strategist, is gonna be here as well. All of these. Are partnering here with us on the Sweet Life Podcast throughout this little miniseries to help you have strategies that you can take to the bank to become known [00:02:00] and expand your reach and increase your sales and become a thought leader in your space.

    [00:02:04] You’re gonna hear my little dog barking. He’s not feeling well next to me, so welcome to behind the scenes of. The Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. This is episode number 271. And so all of the show notes that we’re talking about can be found by visiting sweet life co.com. Click on our podcast button and this is episode number 271 where we’re gonna detail every single thing we are talking about here for you on the show.

    [00:02:29] Now, who is this episode four and who is this series for? Let me make sure you’re in the right place. We have a lot of shows for beginning business owners, but that is not who this series is for. This is for those of you who are established coaches, established consultants. You’ve been doing what you’ve been doing for a while, and it’s time to move you up to higher levels, higher levels of influence, higher levels of impact, higher levels income. 

    [00:02:57] The strategies that we’re talking about in this [00:03:00] becoming known series are not the basics, like how to pitch yourself to be a podcast guest. We have those episodes here for you, though you can just very easily search how to, how to become a podcast guest and tap into those shows. These are for those of you guys that are ready for higher levels in more income, and what does this actually look like for you?

    [00:03:20] It looks like you are now at this place where you find in your professional life where it’s time for us to engineer that next level of your business. That next business model that you want to take you into the next 3, 5, 10 years. This show in this series, and really everything we’re doing on the next gen of the Sweet Life Podcast here as we move into your number six is for you.

    [00:03:43] This is a kickoff episode, and in this episode we’re gonna talk about all the things that you need to have in place in order to implement the episodes in this series. Follow it. So I’m gonna give you a breakdown and actually a checklist of what we already have to have in place and what you already need to have decided from a [00:04:00] strategy standpoint in order to implement the series that we’re talking about here and all of the workshops that our guest experts are delivering to you.

    [00:04:08] So at the end of this show, you’re gonna have a punch list of things that you need to make sure are in place in order for you to utilize the becoming known series. You’re also gonna have clarity, okay? So I want you to have clarity on your becoming known strategies. We’re using this episode here. Number 2 71 is a place where you and I can get together and just really kind of unpack your strategy.

    [00:04:35] What you wanna be known for moving forward and how it fits into your bigger business. B. , that’s what we’re talking about today on this show, and we are going to plot your becoming known course. So who do you wanna be known to? Why should they know you? And are we even in a process of leveling up and perhaps even finding a different audience and building a separate division of your company?

    [00:04:59] Those are [00:05:00] all the things that we’re talking about on today’s show. So if that’s what you’re in for, then you’re in the right place. Again, all the show. All the bonuses we have for you can be found by visiting sweet life co.com. Head over to the podcast cabinets there for you. If as you’re listening to this, you wanna make sure you’re not missing any of it, make sure you click subscribe and please share this show with your friends.

    [00:05:21] We don’t have advertising in the show. Never have, never will, because I hate listening to ads on shows. I’m just gonna be really honest, and I don’t really think you like it either. So we really rely on you guys sharing the show organically with your friends across social media, and we’d really appreciate you doing that.

    [00:05:35] All right. You. Let’s go. Okay, you guys, we are diving into how to become known, how to establish your authority and your space. And in this show, I’m helping you prepare and strategize and position yourself so that we can do that and utilize the upcoming episodes. So first things first, let’s pause for a second and I want you to ask yourself those question, what do you wanna become known?

    [00:05:59] Just [00:06:00] actually take a minute. Those of us who have been in business and have been entrepreneurs for decades, this has changed over the years. We grow into different things, so please take a moment and ask yourself, what is your strategic objective? That is the end result of the strategy we’re about to apply.

    [00:06:19] Are you moving from perhaps what has been a solo entrepreneur or a small team role more into a c e O role? Are we finding you a new audience? What is the, what is the strategy of why you’re tapping into this show and really, why do we need to do this for you? Why is it important? Do you feel like you’re that best kept secret?

    [00:06:42] Um, have you had your head down for so many years working with the clients and giving amazing results that you haven’t really paid a lot of attention to? Make sure everybody knows who you are, because frankly, it doesn’t really matter to you, but maybe just maybe [00:07:00] you’ve now realized that it’s the time to step forward and step in the spotlight.

    [00:07:06] for all of the amazing transformation and golden work that you have been doing for such a long time. So I want you to give yourself a second here to ask yourself why now? Why is this different than you tapping into maybe a handful of podcast episodes on how to speak from stages and, and how to become a podcast?

    [00:07:31] Because your answer to why, why now is going to be what we use to craft the path that you’re gonna utilize these workshop trainings to make sure that we’re actually pointing your ship in the right direction of where you wanna go for the next 3, 5, 5, and 10 years of your business. So why is this important?

    [00:07:49] What do you want this leverage and this influence to deliver to you in your business and in your personal life? That’s the first thing. I want you to [00:08:00] stop and take a minute to decide. Now a couple of you guys and, and I was just actually on calls with a few new clients that are, are working with us this year, are moving from a place where you really need to step into that c e O leadership role and other people are running your systems, running your programs, working your business for you.

    [00:08:20] And so now we get to. Pluck you out of that and share your message to then of course drive more profit and income back to your programs, but it’s in a different way. You’re maybe no longer the the worker bee and you’re the leader. And so that is another reason why I want you to be really strategic and think about why you’re utilizing these strategies.

    [00:08:44] We’re here talking on. So what is the strategy? What is the reason for you becoming known in this next generation of you? And stop for a minute. And now I want you to think about what have you been known [00:09:00] for in the past? Because we could be trying to land if you will nail a new objective for something that’s a pivot.

    [00:09:11] Maybe You have been known for building yoga studios. And now you wanna be known for something totally different. So, you know, a case study, it’s really interesting. Many of you guys may know, uh, the story of Rachel Cook. I love Rachel Cook. She’s one of the people that I learned from all the time, and I admire her strategy and her wisdom.

    [00:09:30] She’s been a guest here on the podcast and she’s one of our experts that comes in and teaches our clients and our Wavemaker ecosystem. Rachel Cook is. Seriously, one of the greatest minds in operational systems business, Rachel started out by building, helping entrepreneurs build yoga studios. You would never know that.

    [00:09:52] So I share that story with you because if you’re to that place where if you’re ready to pivot from one area to another, . Now, let’s make [00:10:00] that decision together here on this podcast. I mean, it’s your decision, not mine. I’m just here triggering you and telling you, Hey, make the decision now. What does that look like?

    [00:10:09] Because decision is that first step. And as you’ll hear in the upcoming episodes, as I, Eileen Wilder says, you know, fast decision, slow to change your mind is what creates the most impact in your business. So let’s go ahead and make a decision. But make sure it’s a strategic decision of, of now what is the reasoning for this?

    [00:10:29] Is this maybe something new that you wanna be known for? And then who do you need to be known to? This is the next thing I want you to identify, and there is no worksheet for this guys. This one doesn’t come with a download. These are questions that I would love for you to pause and answer and speak out loud wherever you are as you’re listening to.

    [00:10:51] Who do you want to become known to and why are you trying to reach a [00:11:00] new audience? Do we need to get you in front of more people? So here’s your choices. We either need to have you become known to people who don’t know you yet, or we need to pour on the gas to increase the awareness with an established audience.

    [00:11:17] It’s pretty much two choices. They either don’t know you or they already know you, and more of them need to know you. What does that look like for you? If, and I’m just gonna kind of talk you through this here as you’re thinking, as I’m speaking. If we are building a B to B side of your business, and in the past you’ve always sold to maybe individuals, and now we are building next level programs, particularly for those of you guys that are building, uh, bigger, higher level group programs or masterminds.

    [00:11:50] Especially for those of you guys who are building license programs. If you’re licensing your IP or you’re building certification programs, you know this is the podcast [00:12:00] and we at the Sweet Life Company are ready and waiting to help you do that. That’s actually a different audience, guys, because when we are selling to companies, we’re no longer making you known to the end user.

    [00:12:13] We might have to find that middleman, what I call that bridge buyer. to be aware of you and the solutions you provide because then they wanna bring that program in for their people or their staff or their benefits or their organization or whatever that is. So perhaps you may be already really well known to that individual audience at B2C audience, but it’s time for us to introduce you to a whole nother audience, even though it’s the same product, if you will.

    [00:12:46] Because we have a different buyer, perhaps that’s what we’re doing. So I want you to think about who do you need to become known to, and are we adding more gravity, more fire to an [00:13:00] established audience, and increasing that and raising you up to the top of a swimming pool of a thousand water droplets. And we want you to be that wave on the top.

    [00:13:09] Or are we putting you in a totally different ocean where nobody knows who you are and we need to introduce you from scratch? So let me repeat those three strategic questions that I want you to think about before we dive into this becoming known series. Number one, what do you wanna become known for?

    [00:13:28] What does this next level of your business look like? How do you play a role in that? Number two, why? What is the strategy behind this? What are we trying to accomplish here within your next level, becoming known strategy? And number three, who do you need to become known to? , is it the same audience and we wanna increase it, or are we introducing you to a totally new audience and nobody knows who you are?

    [00:13:57] And we are kind of starting from scratch, [00:14:00] which those of you guys have been in business for a while, that that feels a little exciting. It’s almost like being back at the very beginning. It’s not, it’s actually really level. But there are some new challenges that certainly come along with that, that we’re gonna be dressing here in the next couple of episodes in this series.

    [00:14:17] So once you’ve answered those three questions, I’m gonna give you a really quick punch list and then we’re gonna wrap up this episode because you know, qual quality doesn’t equal quantity. I wanna give you exactly what you need and get you outta here so you can be working on these things cuz we have some big time episodes coming up.

    [00:14:33] I want to make sure I’m saving your time and your energy for, so here’s a punch list of things that you should have in place before we enter into a becoming known campaign. All right. The first thing is, is you need to have an established method, framework, or process where you know that you deliver people predictable, transformational, measurable results.

    [00:14:56] You guys hear me say that exact statement like a million times on this [00:15:00] show, right? So you have to be very good at what you do. You need to have gotten people results in the. And you need to have your frameworks in place in order to do that. If you’re struggling with that, one of the bonuses we have here for you is access to how to create your frameworks and access to our Offer Engineer, which is part of our Signature Offer masterclass series.

    [00:15:22] We’ll help you do that. That’s what we do as a company. We extract your genius and build it into industry leading programs. , you guys have to make sure you have your offer in place, or at least we know the offer you’re building or the direction you’re going. If you are building a whole new ecosystem of higher level offers, like you’re moving from that B to C side, you’ve, you’ve had programs, you’ve been a coach for a long time, and now we’re moving you into licensing or creating a certification program.

    [00:15:52] as long as we know that that’s where you’re going, that’s enough for you to move forward in this. But please, we need to know what you’re selling and who [00:16:00] you’re selling it to. Number three in this. So first one is method of framework. Second one is your offer is in place and your programs are in place.

    [00:16:07] Number three, please make sure your bios are updated. I know this kind of seems super basic, but I’m giving you this checklist. When is actually the last time you updated your bio or your photos or the messaging about who you are in your. . Those are things we do in the very beginning and if you go back and you read some of your bios, it, they’re probably a little out of date, especially for those of you guys who have been around for a while.

    [00:16:32] So please make sure your bios and even the imagery of you. I was using this one headshot, which is so funny. Uh, my teenager took of me. I loved, it wasn’t even a headshot cuz I don’t like professional head shots. It was more of like a lifestyle shot that I used for everything. And it had been this kind of poster of me and finally I realized I was like 20 pounds less and way less wrinkles.

    [00:16:56] And I remember seeing that picture and thinking to myself, [00:17:00] holy moly, if somebody saw me now, they would be sorely disappointed if that’s, if that’s who they thought they were meeting. You know, I mean, I’m just keeping it real. Make sure your photos are updated. Make sure that how you present yourself represents who you are and your personality and your strength and, and shoot even your weaknesses.

    [00:17:20] If you’re like me, I just try to air out all of our dirty laundry so you can, so you can learn from my mistakes. Don’t, don’t use a very, very old headshot from when you were super skinny and a bikini when you were 18. If you are 55 years old, all right. Okay. So make sure those things are updated. Uh, and number four, let’s make sure you have a full media kit.

    [00:17:39] Okay. There’s a couple things that I want you guys to have in place. We aren’t even talking about these. This triggers me to maybe do a podcast episode on how to create a media kit. But a media kit are multiple pages that break down who you are, the, the areas you speak to, your areas of expertise, but then they also break down your audiences and who you reach and [00:18:00] the different media platforms you’ve been featured on.

    [00:18:03] A media kit also, uh, breaks down the brands that you’ve partnered with. So Media Kit is, is actually a full kit and it can be multiple pages with, you know, your story on one page of bio on another page, case studies on another page, audience reach and breakdown on another page, brands you’ve partnered with on another page.

    [00:18:23] We use media kits in some instances, and those instances moving forward, uh, will arise here on the podcast. As we are moving into a becoming known series, I just wanna mention to you that you should have, especially those of you leaders who have been doing what you’ve been doing for a long time, you should have a full media kit in place it, and then at the least, you should have a one pager on who you are, especially for speaking.

    [00:18:49] We’re also not breaking down how to do that in the show. Usually might have a different one pager for podcast casting, speaking on stages, teaching locally, we wanna curate your. [00:19:00] To the audience. We don’t want generic assets. You’re gonna send everybody the same dang one pager. That’s probably not gonna land you what you want, especially in a very competitive space.

    [00:19:09] We want you to stand out and be thoughtfully disruptive. So just make sure your one pagers, your media kits so they are curated and crafted towards your audience. Okay? And then in that you can also do, you know, your client case studies and testimonies. Other assets that are really important for you to have in place are, please make sure your update, your website is updated.

    [00:19:31] Funny thing, those of us again, who have been here for a while, like sometimes. We’re so busy doing the work, uh, we kind of forget to go back and have a powwow with our team that maybe that is out of date. Just make sure your, your website is up to date. Your social media is up to date. Uh, the content that you’re sharing is up to date and the data that you’re sharing is up to date.

    [00:19:53] All of those things, please make sure that they’re in place. So that you can utilize what we’re talking [00:20:00] about here on the next coming episodes. This mini-series is all about becoming known, and we’re bringing you experts and pulling back behind the curtains about different strategies that are cherry picked to help you make these decisions for yourself so you can hit the ground running with trusted implementation steps.

    [00:20:21] And that is what we’re doing here, and that’s our objective for you as we move into this next series. I hope that sounds great. I’m really excited about it. I can’t wait for you to hear what’s coming from these leaders. There are some huge, huge, valuable, very expensive bombs that are dropped on these upcoming episodes, so please share this and get ready because we’re about to dive into our series on becoming.

    [00:20:49] If you are new here, it’s so nice to meet you. I’m April Beach. I help experts, coaches, consultants, speakers, and authors extract your genius and build transformational next [00:21:00] level programs to scale your business past millions courses, masterminds, retreats, licensing programs and certification programs. So if you’re stuck on.

    [00:21:12] And you want somebody to help you engineer your next level, offer ecosystem, extract your thoughts, help you organize it, and build it into next level programs. Cruise over to sweet life co.com and you can apply to work with us. Otherwise, all of the resources that we are talking about here on this show, in the past episodes and the upcoming episodes are found sweetlifeco.com. Simply click on the podcast. This is episode number 2 71, and I can’t wait for the next couple weeks. Please share this with your friends. It would really mean a great deal to us. All right, see all soon. Bye.[00:22:00] 

     

     
     

    How to License your IP and Scale your Coaching Business – with April Beach (Episode 270)

    How to License your IP and Scale your Coaching Business

     

     

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for?

    Established entrepreneurs with proven methods and coaching programs who are ready to go from selling to individuals to selling to companies through bulk access deals

    This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for established entrepreneurs who are interested in learning how to scale your business exponentiallythrough licensing your content, course or program.

     

    Summary:

    If you’re an established entrepreneurs with a proven programs, courses, or content, and you’re looking to grow exponentially, then this episode is for you. By creating content to license you can demonstrate thought leadership in your space, increase credibility across your audience, expand your business to B2B or create a dual business model.

    This an intro to licensing for entrepreneurs those want to know how content licensing works, those who want to demonstrate thought leadership in your space through Licensing, those interested in transitioning from B2C to B2B in some capacity. This show will give you a good foundation and knowledge base to consider your options.

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. know what licensing is and how to make money doing it
    2. know the business model of licensing and if it’s right for you
    3. know the prerequisites to license your content
     
     
    Resources mentioned: 
     
     

    Licensing Information Webinar

    License2scale

    Or Text “license” to 805-254-0880 

    www.sweetlifeco.com  

     
    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    270

    [00:00:44] Hi friends, and welcome back to the show. This is episode number 270 and you are listening to the Sweet Life Podcast in April Beach, and we are gonna dive into a really hot topic.

    [00:00:56] I feel like this is really hot topic because I received literally hundreds of phone [00:01:00] calls a year about how to do what we’re gonna talk. On today’s show today we are talking about how to license your IP to scale your coaching business. And as a little bit of a background, if this is totally new to you, just pause here and go back and listen to Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast, episode number 230.

    [00:01:23] Five, because in episode number 2 35, I talked about licensing 1 0 1 in some of the basics of licensing. And so that’s actually where you should start. And then you can come back to this episode two 70. So if you’re here and you have somewhat of, of an idea of what licensing is and you’re wondering how to take these next steps in, what to do, in how to strategically think about licensing, and maybe you’re just wondering whether or not this is even a good option for you, I’m gonna unpack that for you.

    [00:01:50] Today’s show. As always, I do have a ton of resources for you to help you implement what we’re talking about today. So let me give you where you can go grab those [00:02:00] resources first. The first thing is you can text the word license to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0 and in there it will give you a download of all the things that you can grab or take action on when it comes to licensing.

    [00:02:17] So that’s first and foremost. Lemme make sure that you have those resources and we’re gonna talk about some of those resources here in the show and how you can actually squeeze out the golden, those resources for your business. Also, of course, you can always listen to the. Of this episode by going to sweet life co.com.

    [00:02:33] Simply click on our podcast link and this is episode number 270, and we have articles about this and resources. If you’re interested in licensing to scale your coaching business, you are certainly in the right place. That’s what we help clients to do. So now let’s talk about who this episode is actually for in, I hate to use the word qualified, but I’m gonna use the word qualified.

    [00:02:56] If you’ve been listening to this show long enough, you know, I don’t beat around the bush. There are some [00:03:00] people who are ready to talk about licensing and there are some people that maybe that they just aren’t there yet. My job in this is to help everybody who chooses to move forward in this direction.

    [00:03:10] Take another step, whether that’s the first step or whether that’s your 50th step towards license. So that’s what we’re gonna do today. So in today’s show, this is for those of you guys who are ready to take maybe step number 5 67. Again, if you were totally new to licensing, go back and listen to episode number 235.

    [00:03:30] So if you have thought about licensing, you think this is a good idea, but maybe you’re not even exactly sure what this is. This show is for you. So this show is for entrepreneurs who are coaches, consultants, or experts. For those of you guys who. Proven methodologies, proven frameworks, proven courses and trainings in programs that have gotten people results.

    [00:03:55] If you haven’t done that yet, then that’s where I actually want you to start. If you [00:04:00] haven’t created a transformational course or a transformational training program yet, I can also help you with that. That’s what we help businesses do to take this longer term business journey. So just cruise over to sweet life co.com and we can hook you up with how to build a transformational online course and training program.

    [00:04:17] But this show is for those of you guys who have already done that, you know that you’re good at what you do, you are super confident it your ability of getting people results, and if you feel like you are in this place, You’re kind of tired of online marketing. Some, I mean, some people love online marketing.

    [00:04:35] If you’re feeling like I’m a little tired of online marketing, I’m, I’m a little tired of selling, uh, individual, two individuals, one-to-one. Uh, I’m a little tired of launches. Um, little, little sick and tired of funnels. Shh. We’ll whisper that quietly. , actually, I think, I think there’s a lot of people that are, we’re ready to just like cut the funnel in a million pieces and shorten it as much as possible.

    [00:04:56] Then you’re in the right place. So [00:05:00] if you are in that stage where you have had a coaching and consulting business, you’re an expert, you’re a teacher, you’re an author, Speaker and you have been serving individuals or even smaller groups, and now you want to change the way you do business. So you want to not have to hustle so much to sell your training or your course, or your program, or your mastermind or whatever it is to individuals.

    [00:05:23] And instead we wanna sell it in one bulk swoop. Times a hundred bulk swos, then content licensing, program licensing could be a good option for you. So let’s first of all dive into what you can expect at the end of this episode. So if this is for you and you’re ready to dive into this, lemme tell you what you can expect at the end.

    [00:05:45] At the end of this episode, you are gonna know exactly what course or content or IP licensing. . It’s different than licensing photographs for photographers, right? So you’re gonna know exactly what this is. You are gonna know the business model [00:06:00] of licensing in whether or not this is a road that you wanna walk down.

    [00:06:04] But unlike episode 2 35, where we really go in depth about those in this show, I’m also helping you guys know. Five things that you have to figure out in your business to move forward in licensing. So we’re gonna go even deeper in this, and these are decisions that you need to make in your business in order to move forward and build your first licensing package.

    [00:06:26] So we’re gonna, we’re gonna go a bit deeper in here for you, so if that sounds good, then stay here. We’re in the right place. So first of all, let’s talk about what actually is content licensing. So content licensing is allowing other c. To utilize your training, your program, your course, your systems, and to distribute it to their people.

    [00:06:50] Okay, so let me say it again. Allowing other companies or organizations, nonprofits can be huge corporations, it can be even smaller businesses to [00:07:00] utilize your trainings to distribute to their people. It this enables them to make more. because they can increase what they charge because they’ve increased the value of what they do for businesses, that that applies to, uh, provide better services.

    [00:07:16] So for corporations, for example, if your training helps somebody level up a skill, they can provide better training services to their employees or provide better employee benefits to the people that they wanna take care of. And even. Top talent to their business and it can help them to deliver superior content.

    [00:07:37] So licensing is a win-win, especially for the businesses that are looking. And there are, I will tell you, there are businesses out there that are constantly searching for great programs like yours because it makes what they do even better, easier. It makes what they. , uh, emphasizes what they already do. It helps people to be more [00:08:00] successful at what they want people to be successful at, and frankly, you can make a lot of money on it.

    [00:08:06] So those are the things that we’re gonna dive in today, that is the end result of what you can expect today. But the true legal definition of licensing is not selling your course. Okay. So when we license, And by the way, I’m gonna say this as a disclaimer. I am not an attorney, but I’ve licensed my own content for over 13 years now.

    [00:08:27] And so we talk about this a lot when we talk about licensing. It’s the legal structures of it. It’s allowing somebody else to like rent your training. It’s like renting your content, having access to your genius, your frameworks, what you’ve been teaching. Probably for a really long time and allowing them to distribute it so you’re giving them a pass for a certain period of time.

    [00:08:52] we’re gonna dive into that today. You’re giving them a pass for a certain period of time to distribute your training, and it’s a beautiful thing when [00:09:00] you do that. So again, let me just make sure I’m being really, really clear that licensing does not mean that you are selling your content. You still own a hundred percent of the rights to that content, and that’s a really important thing.

    [00:09:11] One of the things that we do run into with our clients as people come to us for help with licensing, I’m just gonna tell you up front, so please don’t make this mistake. Oftentimes a company will approach you and they will love your stuff. Maybe they hear you speaking on stage. This is literally true story times three that’s happened to people who’ve come to us, they’ve spoken on a stage, somebody in that audience loves what they have to say.

    [00:09:36] That executive comes up to them and says, Hey, listen, we really want you to come and bring your program. into our ecosystem in, into our corporation, and it’s really flattering and super exciting, especially if you haven’t thought about this before. When companies approach you and you start talking about what that could look like, cuz you’re excited about it and they’re excited about it, and nobody realizes that maybe in those [00:10:00] conversations, w we’re kind of giving them your stuff and you don’t mean.

    [00:10:06] So what I mean by that is if you have been approached by a company who’s super excited about what you’re doing and they wanna bring you in, it’s really important that we take a pause and make sure it doesn’t become what we call, you know, work made for a hire where you’re creating a program for them instead.

    [00:10:22] And why you’re here is I wanna help you structure your program so that not just one company can. So that tons of companies can have it and you can make a lot of money and be a lot, a huge blessing to all these companies to get access to your program. These are true things that happen. The other thing I wanna say is at beginning to what we’re about to talk about, Because I really love to tell you guys everything in a very short period of time on these podcast episodes is that if you are here, and you’ve already started down the road of talking to a company about licensing and maybe you didn’t realize that you needed to have some certain legal protections in place, it’s okay.[00:11:00] 

    [00:11:00] About 80% of clients come to us after they’ve already started talking to a company about licensing, or they’ve already been down the road and they’re really excited about the conversation and they just come to us because the only question they know to ask is, how do I price this? And what I’m gonna explain to you here is the answer to pricing is five steps into our project plan of licensing.

    [00:11:22] We can’t even answer that question until we build the parameters on the package of what you’re giving. . So please don’t make a mistake and quote a price until you’ve had an opportunity to gain wisdom on what the value of your program is, and that comes with, yay, what we’re talking about here today. So let’s go ahead and dive into it.

    [00:11:40] So as we are talking about the benefits of licensing, if you are not familiar, again, go back and listen to episode number 235, but this can really move you forward to that next level of, of, of your business. This is getting you into that thought leadership space. and it also helps us to move you from [00:12:00] that B2C, if you will, type of business.

    [00:12:02] Even if you were selling to other businesses, we’ll call it business to individual sales, um, to to business, to on a grander scale, right? So we’re selling, the way we are selling your program is different, so we kind of end up with two different branches of your business. Some of our clients actually create a whole different sub-brand for the licensing side of their business, and that works really well too.

    [00:12:25] Let’s go ahead and talk about these decisions that need to be made as you are going through the licensing process. So as you were working towards packaging it, a couple of things you need to think about and this leads us to you selling your program. This leads us to you pricing your program. The first one is brand.

    [00:12:47] What do I mean by branding? There are three different ways that we can release your training to another company for licensing. The first one is As is as your content. So it’s your logo all over [00:13:00] it. It’s your name all over it. You’re branding colors. They’re just literally taking what you’ve already done in your course, in your training program, and they’re just putting it into their lms, some.

    [00:13:13] Okay. That is super easy. It works really well. Number two is co-branding. Co-branding is probably the most popular way that our clients license their content. So co-branding is where we can have your logo on it, but also their information as well. So it could be April Beach’s licensing course for Comcast Cable or whatever it is.

    [00:13:34] So we can use the name of your program and bring it in with theirs and they can actually co-brand it and co-branding works really well for you, and I like it for you. I’m protective of you guys. As you know, those of you guys have been listening to the show for freaking six years. I’m really protective of you.

    [00:13:51] The reason why I like this is because I still want people to know who you are, especially if where we’re going in the future requires you [00:14:00] to be a thought leader in your space. So that’s why co-branding or having it branded as your own is a really great idea. The third is called white labeling. White labeling.

    [00:14:09] Nobody knows who the heck you are. It doesn’t matter that you created this program. Nobody is going to know that it came from you. Now, the levels of branding. Match how much value your program can be licensed. . All right, so they’re gonna pay you more money to white label it and call it their own than they would to have it just as your brand.

    [00:14:32] But the question that I ask our clients is, is it worth it? In most cases it’s not. Now, I have eight online courses that I have licensed since 2009, but they’re in my parent coaching industry. You guys, I could care. Anybody realizes that I created the parent coaching industry, I’m totally in a whole different generation, decades later.

    [00:14:56] It’s ridiculous, right? So I could care less if [00:15:00] anybody knows they’re my classes, because that’s not what my business is. That’s, that’s literally, it’s an entirely separate company than what I operate in now. So think about that for you when we’re thinking about white labeling, but they will pay you more money.

    [00:15:15] So question number one. and just be thinking about this to yourself is how do you wanna brand it? What is important to you in the delivery of the way this program looks? Number two is reach. Reach is really important, and you might not know the answer to this upfront. Oftentimes we talk about reach when we’re in sales.

    [00:15:37] Conversations with companies reaches how many people are gonna have access. All right. How many people in a certain geographic area are gonna have access to it? Or even how many people within a certain niche. So for example, if a company wants to license your training, but they don’t want you to turn around and license it to any of their competitors, That’s [00:16:00] reach, that’s how far your program can reach, and so your pricing is going to match accordingly.

    [00:16:08] So first one was branding, second one was reach. The third one is, the third one is length of time. How long do they get to access your training? How long do they get to distribute your training? How long do they have to actually utilize your training as part of their program? And so length of time is number three.

    [00:16:32] And then the fourth one is I want you to think about whether or not you are interested in or willing to provide updates. Does that apply to what you’re doing? Some of our programs, you guys, we have to provide updates, especially if it’s something that might be more technical or even medical. There are some things we constantly have to update in order to keep that program accurate.

    [00:16:56] Or what you also can do is you also can send [00:17:00] updates to the licensee and require them to update the program. Are you gonna deliver this beautifully packaged thing with a silver bow on it every time an update comes? Is that included in the price that you are giving them? Now, let’s kind of pause for a second.

    [00:17:16] Have a little sidebar over here. I want you guys to create your curriculum for longevity . I really don’t want you building licensed curriculum. Then we’re gonna have to go back and record all the time. All right, so how we package your licensed curriculum? how we extract the content from your license curriculum, from your course.

    [00:17:40] What we choose to take out of a course you’ve already had is dependent on your long-term goals on how we want to move forward with licensing. . There is no right or wrong way, and I say this to our clients all the time. They come to us and they’re like, April, just tell me what to do. Listen, I have [00:18:00] no problem telling you guys what to do.

    [00:18:01] I actually do that all the time with our clients. But my job is to present the options to you and to help you understand how the decisions that you make, they’re not my decisions, they’re yours. How you guys make these decisions are going to affect your business and your profit and your. Okay. And so there are no right 10 steps to license your stuff.

    [00:18:24] I mean, you see those articles, places, we even have articles written on our website. And here I am recording this podcast teaching guys how to license your stuff. But I wanna be honest with you that in each one of these decisions is a choose your own adventure. On what you want this to look like. There is no cookie cutter way to do this because a licensed package, although it comes from a framework, a course, a program, although we have a systematic project plan to release it to every company.

    [00:18:58] When it comes down to [00:19:00] how you do that, how much you include in it, how many people have access to it, how it’s branded, how, how long they have access, That is totally up to you, and you have the power to make that choice, and there is no right or wrong way. So our goal here today is for me to talk about these things that I want you guys thinking about.

    [00:19:23] Okay? Now let me unpack totally behind the scenes of the Sweet Life Company now, and I’m gonna be really, really, really honest with you guys. I want to help people license their content. I get paid a lot of money to coach entrepreneurs how to license their content, but when people first come to me, they usually aren’t ready to have that conversation.

    [00:19:45] So part of my goal in this podcast is to help you guys get ready so that I can work with you, so that I can help you in getting your business, not even like to the finish line we’re talking about here, getting [00:20:00] your business to the starting line. For us to be able to have a project plan and walk you through these strategic decisions.

    [00:20:09] That’s the point of this show because you guys, this is a hidden secret. I, I’m not everywhere on social media. You guys know who you follow me? I’m on Instagram. I’m like posting pictures of my kids. I’m not some big online social media influencer. So I’m not out there screaming from the top of the mountains how profitable and simple the business model of licensing is.

    [00:20:32] And I want to be able to do that for you. I want to be able to share this with you and give you guys this secret. And so this show in my goal here is getting you to that place where I can have a conversation with you again. Say, here you go. Here’s our project plan. Let’s start checking. And that’s what we’re talking about here tonight, today in this show, whenever you’re listening to it.

    [00:20:56] So let’s recap. These are the things that I want you to be thinking [00:21:00] about, and you do not have to make these decisions by yourself. You should not make these decisions alone, but you do know that they’re decisions that are going to come. your direction when you work on licensing. So I want you to be thinking about them now.

    [00:21:15] These are the things that I work with our clients to make these strategic decisions, and again, it’s different for every one of you. So let’s kind of recap the four decisions that you’re gonna wanna make for us to get you to the starting line. for the licensing process. Number one is decide how you wanna brand this.

    [00:21:33] Is it branded as you? Is it co-branded? Is it gonna be white labeled? Do you have other programs that maybe you don’t sell anymore that it doesn’t matter that we totally can white label and we can sell those for more? Think about that. Number two is how much reach, how many people are you comfortable allowing to access your training or your program at a time?

    [00:21:54] We have clients that license their program to smaller businesses with only 20, 30 [00:22:00] employees. , and then we have clients that license their program to businesses with over 10,000 employees. And so where’s that comfort level for you and really what does that look like in your parameters of what you’re doing professionally?

    [00:22:16] The third thing is length of time. How long can a company have access to your course and your. . And then the fourth one is renewals and updates, right? Are you gonna be willing to do that in, what do we need to do when we look at your curriculum to actually package it for longevity? Or is that something that you can actually charge more because you have such an amazing high level gold standard licensing package?

    [00:22:41] What if you drop new content to them and it’s part of your agreement every 90 days or every six? Companies will pay you a lot of money to do that, especially, especially when you do it well. And that’s what we’re talking about here and it’s totally up to you. And let me leave [00:23:00] you with one more thing that I want you guys to think about.

    [00:23:02] Again, the goal is getting you to the starting line here so that you can think about whether or not there’s a good option for you to move forward with. The last thing that I want you to think, is understanding what you wanna be known for. So let me clarify that. What do you want people to say about you?

    [00:23:24] When somebody is talking about you and they’re saying, Hey, listen, April’s a person to go to for licensing, or Sarah’s a person to go to. , I don’t know, intermittent fasting or meditation or how to generate high value leads from LinkedIn. Whatever it is you guys do. Okay. Do you still wanna be known for that three to five years from now?

    [00:23:50] Because when we engineer licensing correctly, you can build your Nick’s level known. On a mountain of licensing, [00:24:00] you can choose what you want people to say about you, what you want that book to be about, what you want that tag talk to be about. And if in particularly if we are doing co-branding or branded as you, you’re gonna wanna think about that.

    [00:24:14] If it’s white labeled, and this is totally separate the way I do it. It doesn’t matter, but give yourself permission to actually think about that, to consider what you wanna be known for in the next 2, 3, 5, 10 years, because we can certainly accomplish that when it’s executed correctly through licensing.

    [00:24:31] But I want you to think about that ahead of time. So in summary, today we went a little bit deeper on licensing. . The whole purpose of this show is getting you guys to that starting line so that you can be ready to move forward in packaging your license product. And again, you need to think about how do you want it branded?

    [00:24:50] How many people have access to it? What is the length of time and will you provide updates? And to wrap it all up together, let’s make sure that the answers to those align with your long-term [00:25:00] goals and what you wanna be known. . And when you are to this place where you’re at least thinking about this, you know, people say to me, April, I just, I don’t know what I don’t know.

    [00:25:10] And so my goal here through this podcast is I want you guys to know what you don’t know, and this is where to start. These are the things I want you to start thinking about. And then, We can move forward and craft a custom project plan for you. So let me tell you where those resources are. We have a totally amazing free resource.

    [00:25:28] It’s a 40 minute video on foundations of licensing 1 0 1, where it’s much more in depth to what I talked about here today. You can tap into that free video at any point in time. It’s always on demand, and you can access that. We have a one day workshop called License to Scale, where I actually roll up my sleeve with you and help you build your first license package.

    [00:25:49] And then of course we have our licensing accelerator, which is called Amplify. Whatever works for you guys, you’re all in a different place. I’m here to serve you in all levels. . So please use this [00:26:00] podcast, share this podcast, take notes on this podcast, shoot, transcribe this podcast. We actually already have it transcribed for you.

    [00:26:07] Whatever you need to do, please do it. because this is the hidden secret that not enough people are talking about that scales coaches, business of coaches in Expon exponentially, and I can’t even talk anymore. It’s at the end of the day here. Um, one thing we are not talking about today that we’re gonna be diving into in future episodes is how to combine coaching on top of content licensing.

    [00:26:29] That is a different conversation, and I’m not gonna be able to get into it today, but I just wanna let you know that that is. something that you should be thinking about to help companies implement even. All right. Thank you so much for listening to this show. All right, so let’s talk about where you can get these resources and where you can tap into these things.

    [00:26:49] First of all, just text the word license to 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0, and then you’re gonna be texted back these three links so you can just pick and [00:27:00] choose whatever you wanna eat up. All right. Number two, go over to our website if you click on sweet life co.com and then click on the podcast button. This is episode number 270, so you can find all of the show notes, the transcription for this, and all the links and all the resources that we’re talking about here.

    [00:27:18] If you go to our website, and then if you want to jump in our next workshop, you can very simply just go to license. And then the number two and then the word scale.com. So you can go to license2scale.com when you are ready to dive into that workshop. I teach it three times a year. It is live and live only.

    [00:27:40] It’s not something that’s gonna be recorded. I wanna work with you on your first licensing package. Depending on when you’re listening to this, we do have one in January, 2023 coming up. If that’s you, make sure that you go to license2scale.com and you jump in that. Otherwise, you can always send us an email to podcast@sweetlifeco.com and we’d [00:28:00] be happy to redirect you to any of these resources if you forget.

    [00:28:03] Okay. Thank you so much for listening to this show. I’m so glad to be back with you guys. This is the second generation of the episode. Your implementation for this is to dive into these five questions that I gave you. Even if you only think of one of them. Give yourself permission to think of one of these branding length of time updates, and you’re already gonna be further than you were when you first started listening to this show.

    [00:28:27] I wanna see you guys make progress and I wanna see you make fast progress. That’s the point, guys. All right, you guys be awesome and I’ll talk to you next week.

     
     

    How to Create an Online Certification Program for Coaches, Consultants, and Experts – with April Beach (Episode 269)

    How to Create an Online Certification Program for Coaches, Consultants, and Experts

     

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for? 
    Established coaches, consultants, and experts who are ready to scale their business to the next level.  Coaches with well established methods, processes and/or frameworks that have proven to give people transformational results, who are considering creating a certification program and want to know where to start. 
     
     
    Summary:
    Certification programs are a great way to scale your coaching business. However, most people don’t know where to start or how to go about building, releasing and managing a certification program. 
     
    In this episode we break down the steps to building an online certification program. 
    Download the Checklist to Build an Online Certification Program HERE
     
    In addition, we’re also discussing who should and who should not create a certification program, the pros and cons of this business model, how this type of offer will affect your long term business growth, what your future life will look like with a certification program, and of course the elephant on the room regarding the legitimacy and credibility of certification programs. 
     
     
     
    At the end of this episode you will: 
    1. Know the steps to create and launch a certification program
    2. Have a clearer understanding of launching a certification program is for you
     
     
     
    Resources mentioned: 
    How To Launch Your Certification Program Checklist
    Access the checklist here
     
    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     
    Organize your assets and ideas into a Signature Offer – 
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    269

    [00:00:45] Hi you guys. Welcome back to the show. This is episode 2 69 and of course, all of the show notes and everything that we’re gonna be talking about here can be found by visiting sweet life podcast.com/ 2 69. This episode is really, And the reason why I actually changed our content recording calendar to make sure that you guys had this training was because I have received so many inquiries on how to build a certification program because many of you guys know that’s what I do.

    [00:01:17] If we don’t know each other yet, I’m April Beach. I help experts, coaches, and consultants scale their business by building million dollar programs, engineering offers that truly bring in the impact that they’re making into the world while scaling their business in a way that they wanna live their life.

    [00:01:33] And so that’s what we’re talking about in this show in very specifically regarding certifications. So again, all of the show notes can be found where I promised you. As well as I have created a checklist for you guys that goes along with this show. This checklist is the how to launch a certification checklist that can be found in the same link to the show notes.

    [00:01:56] Again, sweetLifepodcast.com/269, or also by texting the word certify to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. Okay, so let’s get into it. This is what we’re talking about on this show. If you are not subscribed yet, I would love for you to subscribe to this show and share this with your friends.

    [00:02:16] Here we are talking about how to actually build a certification program. First and foremost, who is this for? This show is for established coaches, consultants and experts who are ready to scale their business to the next level. This is for those of you guys that are well-established. You have well-established methods, frameworks, and processes, and you have proven to get other people results through these processes in the past.

    [00:02:45] This is not a show for you. If you are not a well established consultant or expert, or teacher or coach, and you haven’t gotten other people results yet. If you’re to that place where we’re just building your first course or your first program, cruise over to sweet life co.com and I will teach you exactly how to launch your first course or your first program that guarantees a transformation.

    [00:03:09] But this show is for those of you guys, you’ve already done that, in that we are ready to go to the next level. So if that’s you, stay tuned with me. If it’s not, you go listen to another one of our episodes on how to scale your business with online courses, and we’ll get you to this point.

    [00:03:23] I’m committed to get you to this next level. So what we’re talking about here on this show is all about certifications. So we all know certifications are a great way to skill your business. However, most people don’t really know how to do. Don’t really know how to navigate those process of certifications.

    [00:03:39] And so in this show, what you can expect at the end of this episode is I’m gonna give you the steps to launch a certification. All right? We are gonna walk away here. You’re gonna have the steps. I’ve already created a checklist for you, so you can take this cheat sheet, you can take notes, you can download it.

    [00:03:55] Make sure you do that and be able to implement what we’re talking about today in addition to. We’re also gonna talk about who should and should not create a certification program. We’re gonna talk about the legitimacy of certification programs, and we’re gonna talk about why you may want to create a certification program.

    [00:04:14] So if that sounds good to you, let’s go ahead and go. So first and foremost, I wanna talk about the fact that it’s gonna sound terrible. Actually, in the beginning of the show. I’m gonna talk about the fact that there’s a lot of certification programs that mean nothing out there. So let me tell you a little story without naming names.

    [00:04:32] Back in 2006, I created the baby planning parent coaching industry . First of all, many of you guys have no idea about that. It’s so fun. Like those of you who’ve been a legacy business mentor and coach, talking about your origin story and where you came from. So I just so happened to be the creator of the scope of practice and the international baby planning and maternity consulting industry years ago.

    [00:04:58] With that being said, I was also the co-founder of this international association, and we had a member in this association who was launching her business and her business wasn’t going well. She wasn’t making money, she wasn’t serving clients. As a matter of fact, as far as I understood, she had never actually served a client before, and so she came up with the idea of launching a certification program for baby planners.

    [00:05:29] All right, because it was a great business idea, but yet this woman had actually never done that before, and since she has gone on to make a ton of money, because it’s a great business model, certifications are a great business model, and I hate to throw somebody under the bus, but I mean, I’m just calling it like it is here on this podcast. You guys know me. Those people that launched certification programs as a money-making scheme who aren’t actually amazing at what they do, don’t have a proven methodology, haven’t served clients before. They’re full of shit, you guys. Okay? So we have to have a conversation first about the legitimacy of certification programs.

    [00:06:04] I mean, my son could create. Dog walking certification and he could teach the other kids in the neighborhood, like his process of walking dogs. That could be so great. Right? And then he could actually make money off referring the local residents here to certified dog walkers. Right. You guys, first and foremost, we really need to have a conversation about the legitimacy of certifications.

    [00:06:29] If you are launching a certification in an area that has a whole bunch of certifications, take a look at that, see what’s out there, and see why those things are needed. The fact of the matter is that many certifications, especially those in the online coaching space, are created by people as a genius business.

    [00:06:51] I mean, it’s a genius business model. That’s why you’re here. That’s why we’re talking about it. I mean, frankly, That’s why I coach clients to create certifications. But we always wanna first have the conversation of making sure your certification program isn’t total bullshit. Just being honest. Okay, . So let’s talk about what governing bodies are in your niche.

    [00:07:14] Niche that oversee the legitimacy of certifications. If you are in an area where there is an established governing body, That oversees this process of this, whatever it is that you do, then I recommend that you first start there and find out what their requirements are to create a certification program to become accredited or to be recognized.

    [00:07:43] That’s what I help clients do. I have clients with accredited certification programs and, and it is an amazing way to scale your business, but I really wanted to make sure, as you know, those of you guys have listened to this show before. I’m always gonna keep it real. So on the pro, the pro side of it is building a certification is a very, very smart way to build your business as long as we have a unique method, process, and framework that is.

    [00:08:12] Sometimes totally different or it could even be similar to some other things that are out there, but you’re bringing in your genius on the way you’ve done it, the way you’ve proven to get people results, and you’re amazing at it. And now it’s time to certify other people in your process. All right, so I just wanted to get that outta the way at first because I don’t feel like I can dive into this episode of how to create a certification program until we talk about who should not create a certification program.

    [00:08:42] The second part, kind of prerequisite here I wanna talk about before we get into these steps is I want you to really think about what a certification program is gonna look like with your life. So if you have not. Grabbed my ultimate guide to online offers and business models. You totally should. It’s like 30 pages that tells you that when you launch a certain type of business model and offer exactly how that’s going to affect your life.

    [00:09:10] All right, so you can grab that just by texting guide to that same number, 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. All right, but in the meantime, let’s kind of dive into that and I’m gonna give you some background. A certification program is not one of these offers that we can launch, that you might just decide like a year from now you don’t want to do anymore.

    [00:09:31] This is a longer term business model, and we really need to make sure that it is going to align with your longer term goals for your business. So that’s step number. And there are processes in like the building and the frameworks of that certification that we’ll get into in a second that affect that.

    [00:09:48] But I want you to just like take a second here, and just because somebody says it might be a great idea to launch a certification, I want you to understand that just like launching a podcast, a podcast is a long-term game, right? We’ve been doing this for six freaking years, right? What, what is that going to look like for your life. For your teams, for your cadence, and what is launching a certification going to do to elevate your personal professional goals? How is it gonna look like on your time and your life and your travel and your profit?

    [00:10:22] If the answers to those questions are like, yes, this is gonna be amazing for me. This is exactly what I want. I’m ready to take leadership and ownership in this. , then you’re in the right place. Okay? If you’re like, gosh, I’m not really sure that I wanna be in a certification for that long, or I, I wanna be responsible for all these people, then definitely you do yourself a favor and take a pause. There are so many coaches out there that tell you guys, you have to launch a course, or you have to launch a mastermind. You have to launch a membership. All these things.

    [00:10:52] I’m here to tell you that yes, we can scale your business with all of those, and I will teach you exactly how to do each one. But they will affect your life. And if you’re like me, I travel with my kids six months a year, and my business model is very carefully engineered because I know the outcome of having that offer and what it will do to my time in my life.

    [00:11:12] All right, so I got that outta the way. Now you guys ready? Let’s go ahead and dive into the steps of how to create and launch your certification. Again, the checklist that goes along with it is a really important tool for you guys. You can grab by going over to sweetlifepodcast.com/269, or you can text the word certify to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0, and you guys can grab this and you’ll be off and running.

    [00:11:44] All right, so step number one, to, creating a certification program, you need to have a unique method, process, or framework that guarantees results. All right? It doesn’t have to be totally different, and I have podcasts for you. We have resources, and I’m here to coach you on how to create a method, process or framework, but that’s not where we’re diving into today.

    [00:12:09] First and foremost, we just need to make sure that you have a method or process or framework that has been proven to get people results in the past. That is step number one. All right, so if you pass step number one, great. Let’s go to step number two. Number two, we need to then build out that into a coaching program with your process, your systems, your videos, your downloads, your assets, just like we are building it when we build it into a course.

    [00:12:38] So for many of you guys, you already have this built. Okay? We need to clone that because we’re gonna build it for a different audience now, right? So it’s not necessarily going to the end user. Now we’re fitting a middle user in the middle who is becoming your student, who’s becoming certified in your methodology.

    [00:12:58] So we wanna clone that because there are other things that we need to add to that, which I’m gonna tell you next. And there are other things that we might actually not include in a certification program based on what it is that you’re teaching and the audience you’re delivering it to.

    [00:13:14] So step number one is your method and framework as well established. You are like the bees knees at what you do. You’re amazing. You’ve got people results. Step number two is actually building out that training Now. Again, not getting into the nitty gritty of this, but on a side note, if you are licensing your certification program to another company to deliver for you, there’s gonna be different places where you may build out your program in, it might be in their l m s instead of your database.

    [00:13:44] Hit me up if you have questions about that. That’s what I help our clients figure out, but I just wanted to share that with you on a side note. Okay.

    [00:13:50] Number three, you need to be sure that you have gotten people results in this course before. I know that I feel like I’m beating a dead horse, but you guys have no idea how many people want to create programs to certify or license that have actually like never sold it before and you know, I just shared with you that story in the beginning, it will blow your mind again, we want your certification program to be like amazing.

    [00:14:16] Step number four, consider how this business model is gonna affect your life. Okay, so now let’s kind of get into this a little bit. With certifications, you’re gonna have a choice of how you deliver them. Is it only on demand? Is it on demand with some coaching? And what is the, like, the lifetime of a client or a student? Or a certified person going to look like? And is that something that you want to do and be responsible for? What is the cadence of your week gonna look like? Is this something that is going to fit into your long-term business model?

    [00:14:54] And does it elevate all those other things that you wanna do in your business? Or if this is the primary thing you wanna do in your. Awesome. That’s amazing. This is exactly what you should be listening to right now, but if this is just kind of another piece to a whole bunch of other stuff you do, we have to be really careful of what that’s gonna look like and frankly, how well you’re gonna be able to execute that based on your teams and your operations and how we’re scaling your company.

    [00:15:22] Number five, you are going to create a trainer guide. Okay, so this kind of Train the Trainer Guide actually teaches your students not only the contents that’s in the program, but then how to turn around and teach it. Most coaches, most people are actually not teachers. They just are great at doing their one area of expertise.

    [00:15:46] So it’s really important that you engineer an amazing Train the Trainer guide that teaches people how to deliver your systems, philosophies, and methods and processes to the end user in transformative ways. Nobody needs more content. They need a transformation. And we need to assure that those people that you’re certifying are going to be able to deliver a transformation to the people that they are delivering your processes to.

    [00:16:15] And so we have to have very serious conversations about making sure that we are creating and equipping them to do so. And what does that look like to you? You know, how do we get them into your mind? How do we get them into understanding like why you do things a certain way? All of that is within engineering of your program, by the way.

    [00:16:35] Number six, determine if you’re gonna give them marketing materials. Okay? So this is like this hidden amazing, like we’re gonna blow your business outta the water. When I talk about the swipe files and the marketing materials that we can give people who are certified in your method, It is so amazing because they’ve gone through the process of getting certified, and now we can create an entire marketing packet where they can share across their social that says, Hey, listen, I’m certified in April’s methodology and da, da da, da.

    [00:17:07] And what happens? It elevates your brand, it elevates your legitimacy, and it makes you more money in addition to making them look good. But not every certification program actually needs to include this. So you need to determine number six, if you’re gonna deliver marketing materials, licensing of your logo, your content, your videos, and your IP for them to deliver to their students.

    [00:17:29] All right, here’s a little sidebar. Come over here with me for a minute. Licensing and certifications in combination are the number one way that we can scale your business to exponential results and profit faster. But again, it’s not for everybody. If this is you, you wanna hear more about it, send me a message.

    [00:17:50] This is what we do again at the Sweet Life Company, but I want you to consider. When you are teaching somebody your method, are you also licensing your content to them? Are you also allowing them to use your materials? What does that look like to you? And we need to make sure that your licensing agreements are in place.

    [00:18:10] This is not a show on licensing your ip. I have many more of those, but I just wanna make sure that we’re talking about this in step number six is determining the marketing materials, the content, and the assets you’re gonna give people with a certifiication. This also helps us price your certification.

    [00:18:27] Number seven, are you guys with me? Is determining the best way to test for competency? Now let’s talk about that as well. The smartest people in the world. I think the smartest people in the world are terrible. Old school test, take test takers. They’re the people that like bomb the S A T s, and they’re the people that if you sit down and you let them explain exactly their awareness and understanding, they’re just going be amazing at teaching how they understand what you’ve taught them or sharing that.

    [00:19:06] So when we’re talking about measuring results, I want you to, I’m not gonna go into this in depth. This is what we do with our clients, but I want you to be okay with being disruptive in how you are measuring the learning based on what works for your program. It can be verbal testing, written testing, video, and audio submissions and more. But I want you to disrupt. The way things are done according to what makes sense for your program and your new certified student.

    [00:19:36] Number eight, consider if you will offer continuing education or require it. Not all certifications have to have continuing ed. So I want you to think about what this actually means for your business, and this is going to affect your life. All right, so whatever that looks like for you. Do you have advanced trainings? Can we actually take pieces of your program and offer them as next level certifications? What actually does that look like as far as your overall offer ecosystem?

    [00:20:11] And last but not least, what else can we do to scale your business through a certification? What other offers in that ecosystem can we create? Do you wanna build a mastermind? Do you wanna have retreats for your certified people? Do you want to have. Uh, online groups. Do you want to have office hours where you can troubleshoot with them some of the things that might be happening within their clients based on your certification?

    [00:20:37] Those are all ways where we continue to scale your business by having additional offers that always go back to support those certified students in your method. And when we as coaches do a really good job supporting our people, it builds their business, which therefore builds our business. Okay, so I hope you guys found this informative.

    [00:21:00] I know this is like a full blown crash course. Me just chatting here for 20 minutes with you. I promise you guys in the next generation here at the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast, we’re gonna have high value shows in shorter time. So I have to be better at getting to the point for you, and I hope this did the trick.

    [00:21:16] In addition, don’t forget to grab that checklist for how to launch your certification program by texting the word certify to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. And of course you can apply to work with us to build your certification, your content licensing program in your industry, leading courses and programs online by visiting sweet life co.com.

    [00:21:40] And last but not least, if you wanna find the exact show notes, the transcription and all the links and everything I said here for you, you can just cruise over to Sweet Life podcast.com/ 2 69. The implementation for this episode is the checklist I gave you. Download that checklist and go through the process and make sure you’ve made strategic decisions in each one of these areas to build your certification program.

    [00:22:09] If you’re stuck, you guys can always hit me up online. I’m on LinkedIn and we are on Instagram as well. All right, hope you guys have an awesome day and it’s so good to be here with you again. I love being back and recording shows at year six and I really appreciate you. Have a great day everybody.

     
     

    10 Foundations of a Million Dollar Online Business – with April Beach (Episode 268)

    10 Foundations of a Million Dollar Online Business

    <

     

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Summary:
    Looking to build a profitable online consulting, coaching or expert service business? This episode breaks down the 10 foundations, created by April Beach that are required for a thriving company you’ll love. Once you discover these 10 online business foundations, your business will scale faster and you’l personally thrive as a CEO.
     
     
     
    At the end of this episode you will: 
     
    1. Know the 10 Foundations of a Million Dollar Online Business
    2. Identify which building blocks are not aligned in your company
    3. Know how to take the first steps to fix them
     
     
     
    Resources mentioned: 
     
    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     
    Organize your assets and ideas into a Signature Offer – 
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    268

    [00:00:46] Hi guys. Welcome back to the show. This is episode number 268, and I’m so glad that you. With me today, this is the NextGen of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. We are entering year number six, and I am [00:01:00] so excited to be working with you again, thank you to all of our amazing listeners for allowing me to take that year off and just recuperate and, and help to think of the vision and how this show can continue to be of service to you as we move into the next five years. So thank you to all of our amazing listeners and all the messages you guys have sent. I’m super excited about all the shows that we have planned. So this is episode number 268, and in this show I wanted to unpack a strategy that I teach to our private clients only.

    [00:01:34] And I felt like it was time to introduce it to you guys here on the show. So we are talking about the 10 foundations of building a million dollar online coaching business. I know that sounds really, really big, but I’m gonna break it down for you today on the show and help you to see this clearly. In your business.

    [00:01:54] As always, all of the show notes can by be found by visiting [00:02:00] sweetlifeco.com. Very simply, just click on the podcast and this is episode number 268. All right, if you and I don’t know each other yet, I’m April Beach. I’m an online business architect and I’m an offer engineer, and I help experts, coaches, and authors and speakers scale their business online by creating million dollar programs, courses, trainings, content license programs, and certifications for the purpose of high profit, deep impact lifestyle freedom. So everything you’re gonna get here is proven. It’s not pie in the sky. 

    [00:02:32] We deliver trainings and strategies, whether it’s through or our amazing dream team of experts to come in and work with you. And so I want to let you know that this is proven. This is not a brand new podcast, and I’ve been doing this with online business expertise for 17 years. You can trust it, you can take it to the bank. 

    [00:02:49] So let’s go. Number one. We are going to walk away from this episode with you knowing what the 10 foundations are. I created these years back, but I really [00:03:00] felt like it was time to introduce them because a lot of people are missing these. Number two, you’re gonna be able to identify which of these building block foundations you may be missing, or which ones maybe we have spread too thin on in your business. That’ll make sense to you in a second here. And number three, you’re gonna know how to take the first steps to actually fix some of the building blocks and the foundations in your business if you were spread maybe a little bit too. . So if that sounds good to you, let’s go ahead and dive in. 

    [00:03:29] So the beginning of this is, let’s talk about why we need business foundations. So, Whether you, you’re just trying to hit your first consistent 10 K months. Most of you guys are, are well past that here, that listen to the show now, but it doesn’t really matter what it is as far as how, how well you’re doing financially. Sometimes clients come to me when they had built a business and they, they kind of don’t love it. Or they’re making a lot of money, but maybe they had like a lot of offers cuz they listened to what [00:04:00] everybody told them and they launched all this stuff everywhere and it’s just really not working. Okay. So no matter where, what I’m saying is no matter where you are in business, we need to kind of come back to home base. And it doesn’t matter how much money you’re making in these 10 business foundations, I want you to imagine them like we are building a house. These are the bricks that go underneath your house and there are 10 of them and they have to fit well together. All right. If your bricks don’t fit well together, if they don’t play well together, if the, if the, well, I can’t even imagine to even know masonry words.

    [00:04:38] So if the bricks don’t fit, your business is not going to be able to be built up structurally as high as it can be. Oftentimes, there are so many bricks laid in a foundation of a business that it’s spreading you thin as a business leader, and it’s causing you to, um, have things [00:05:00] that aren’t working well and functioning well in your business.

    [00:05:02] So today on this show, I’m breaking down all of these 10 bricks, these 10 business foundations. I’m gonna define them for you high level, and the goal is for you to take a pause, listen to each one of these foundational bricks, and to determine whether or not your bricks are fitting together well. Or maybe you have too many bricks and we need to get.

    [00:05:24] maybe you’re missing some and we need to pay attention to building some. So the 10 foundations that I have defined for building a million dollar online coaching business are as follows. The first foundation is, Business design. This is a unique term that’s unique to me. It’s unique to the Sweet Life Company.

    [00:05:44] We actually call it strategic business design. What this is is awareness of your business model and your ecosystem of offers and how they play together, and how they come together to form [00:06:00] the life. Uh, that you want in your business. So what do I mean by that? We can’t just launch anything. Your business model is what controls your entire business and your life.

    [00:06:11] Your business model is how you serve clients and how you make money. So your business model could be a membership, it could be. Uh, uh, a mastermind. It could be a combination of retreats and a subscription model. There are millions of different business models that we can customize for you, but the first foundation that you need to be aware of is the understanding of how to engineer your perfect business model with the culmination of all of your.

    [00:06:40] Do they all play well together? And does your business model, is it designed to give you that lifestyle and the profit that you want? This is so incredibly important and that’s why it’s foundation number one. It’s the first thing we do with our clients is unpacking what we want their strategic [00:07:00] business designed to look like.

    [00:07:01] Even if we don’t have a built yet, sometimes we’ve gotta tear things down to rebuild. All right, so if this isn’t thought about first, what happens is people just launch a bunch of offers because they could be profitable, and then we end up with a whole bunch of things that aren’t really strategically designed in your business, and that really sometimes maybe you’re overworked, maybe you aren’t making enough money, maybe you have too many teams.

    [00:07:25] There’s just, it’s kind of a hot. So the first foundation to building a profitable million dollar online coaching business is understanding how to do and how to conduct strategic business design. But in your mind right now, for the sake of being in this podcast, I want you to think is, are my offers collectively brought together in such a way that is design?

    [00:07:47] the business and the life that I want. Am I working the way that I want? Am I getting my time off the way I want? Am I making the profit that I plan to make when I launch that business? That is number one. So always [00:08:00] the first foundation and everything else goes out around that. The second business foundation is the engineering of your offers and your programs and your services.

    [00:08:09] So the second. Foundation is making sure that your programs are engineered to give what I call predictable, transformational, measurable results. We have a very, very special proprietary process that we teach businesses called transformational program design. And it’s the process of extracting your genius and making sure that your offers are guaranteed people as long as they follow the steps as you have laid out, are going to achieve the results that you promised.

    [00:08:38] So foundation number one is the whole design of your business foundation. Number two is the correct engineering of your offers. Did you just throw something up there, begin? I say this a million times. Nobody needs more content. They need a transformation. As a matter of fact, as we dive into all the shows going in the years to come, we’re really diving into the nitty gritty of offer engineering and how to deliver a [00:09:00] high value result, possibly in less time.

    [00:09:03] So I want you to really, really think about that. Foundation. Number three is your branding and your messaging. Once we have your offers. and your business ecosystem is created the way that we want it designed. We need to make sure that you have made a strategic decision of what message are you giving, what are you known for?

    [00:09:22] What do you want people to understand about your company? And that obviously holds hands with foundation. Number two, offer engineering. After your offer is engineered and your messaging is very clear, we also wanna talk about your marketing and your content. It’s an extension of making sure your message is clear.

    [00:09:42] Many businesses are out there and they’re putting stuff on social media, but they actually haven’t nailed their messaging. Or what they wanna be known for. And so they are constantly posting things across social media that kind of seem like a hot mess because there is zero messaging or known for strategy engineered behind it.

    [00:09:58] The marketing [00:10:00] and the content comes after identifying what you wanna be known for. And for some of you guys, this is such a review. I totally know that. Okay. But even those of us have been in business for decades. We come to these points of time where we gotta change up what we wanna do. We’re designing this next level of our business, and sometimes what we were known for before, we don’t really wanna be known for anymore.

    [00:10:25] Maybe it’s something new. So stop and take a pause even if you’ve done a really great job of this in the past for where you are professionally and where you are personally. And make sure that your messaging and your marketing aligns with the where you wanna go for the next 10. If that is a review for you.

    [00:10:45] The third thing that we wanna review and make sure it’s all aligned is your sales. Now, this is your sales process. This is how you’re bringing people into your ecosystem. There’s many different ways we can sell, right? We can just open up a shopping cart and somebody can buy it. You can hold [00:11:00] an application process.

    [00:11:01] You can meet with people even face to face. You know, we’re kind of coming back to more of that personal relationship with people. You know, your sales process. Is a natural extension of your messaging and your marketing and what you wanna be known for and the offer you deliver. So that fifth foundation, your sales foundation should be strategically designed to play well with your marketing and your messaging and your.

    [00:11:33] So to recap, we’ve covered five different business foundations that you need to strategize, or again, you’re welcome to apply to work with us. This is what we do strategize to make sure that they are playing well together. Number one is your business design. Number two is your offer engineering. Number three is your branding and messaging.

    [00:11:51] Number four is your marketing, and number five is your sales. We’re halfway through. We have half of the foundation of that house that you’re [00:12:00] gonna build up. However big you want it, your house is custom to you. We have half the foundation laid. Now these Knicks five are equally as important, but usually businesses can’t come to the determination of how to execute these until the first five are answered.

    [00:12:15] All right, so the next five are, number six is thought leadership and pr. Now, how are you then becoming known as a leader in your space? How are you going and sharing your message in changing the way people think? What sort of disruption of are you causing? We don’t, we don’t ever wanna cause disruption to be disruptive.

    [00:12:39] Let me just say that, you know, we hear this like disruption all the time doesn’t mean you’re like some big jerk that’s gonna come out there and just like make everybody upset to get attention. That’s. That’s not you. You’re listening to this show. That’s not you. That’s not me. We all know that, right? But we want to challenge the way people are thinking because the way that you teach [00:13:00] is maybe better, more innovative.

    [00:13:03] You know, we work with clients at the Sweet Life Company that are doing things that nobody’s done before or they’re changing the way things. , and those are also our podcast listeners, right? So I already know that because you’re listening to this show, you are challenging the way things have been done, or you wanna improve it or you want it to be better.

    [00:13:23] You know, you have a methodology or a process that is totally different than what other people have, right? You don’t fit into that copy cat cookie cutter stuff. . So when we’re going back to your business foundations, how are we making sure that the world knows that and that six foundation, that thought leadership PR goes hand in hand?

    [00:13:45] The strategy we use for that to get you out there goes hand in hand with the offers that we’ve engineered for you and the messaging and the sales process in your marketing foundation. Number seven is your tech stack. Okay? Here’s the. [00:14:00] Everybody loves their tech, but they love their tech that they know and they love.

    [00:14:03] We don’t endorse any one tech stack, right? So I don’t kid your, I don’t care if it’s Cajabi or ClickFunnels or go high level or whatever it is. How you communicate, how you deliver your. Services in the, in the experience that you create for your clients should be a custom engineered tech stack to you and to your business.

    [00:14:25] And just because something works for somebody else doesn’t mean it’s gonna work for you. So that Seventh Business Foundation is the strategy of building a tech stack that aligns with the experience that you wanna give people, what you wanna be known for, how your offers are engineer. And just aligns and, and speaks to your whole business culture.

    [00:14:48] And by the way, it’s totally okay if you are not super techy. Not everybody has to have an app. You know, one of the trends that we’ve seen, especially over the last three years, cuz everybody and their cousin [00:15:00] has now decided they’re an online business coach, right, is that people are paying for more personal curated experiences.

    [00:15:09] So maybe your tech stack is figuring out how to have a more personal curated experience. Foundation number seven is taking a look back at your tech stack and making sure it’s it’s laid out correctly. Two, accomplish what we’ve set out to do in business design, offer engineering, branding, and messaging, marketing, sales, and thought leadership.

    [00:15:29] See how they all stack on each other and these bricks are fitting together underneath your house. The eighth Business Foundation is teams. Now with scaling businesses, usually we see around $30,000 a month when businesses hit that $30,000 a month kind of threshold, anywhere from 20 to 40. So we call it 30 in the middle, is that if we don’t have our teams in place and we don’t know how to delegate, we start running into some bottlenecks.

    [00:15:59] I can [00:16:00] personally say that you guys, and I’ve said this a bunch, um, on the show in the past, I am not naturally a good. I suck at it. Okay. Let’s just be really, really honest. It is something that I’ve had to diligently work at stopping and thinking and, and deciding what I want things to look like before delegating it out to my team.

    [00:16:22] So entrepreneurs, you know, we’re kind of control freaks. We kinda like having control, but when you get to that 20, 30, 40 K a month reoccurring revenue, if you do not have teams in place and you don’t know how to step into a leadership role, in a leader role, instead of a doer role, we’re gonna run into problems.

    [00:16:45] So wherever you are in your business, we wanna have an assessment of that foundation, your team foundation, which is foundation number eight. And making sure that you have teams in place that are the right teams to start getting things off your plate. [00:17:00] Frankly, people that are better than I am at doing certain things, I should not keep things to myself, right?

    [00:17:07] There are a lot of people that are much better than I am at doing things in in you, and that’s what leadership is. Foundation number nine, amla Air are your. . Okay. Do we correctly have your operational systems, your client onboardings, your client experience, your billing systems, your client off onboarding systems, your marketing systems, you know your bill paying systems, your financial systems are your systems in place to get your business to a million dollars?

    [00:17:37] what systems are you missing? Literally, like systems are everything in your business. We have systems for everything. We literally have onboarding and off onboarding, podcast production systems, content marketing systems, coaching systems. Your systems are also part of. How you teach people to do what you teach them how to [00:18:00] do, or your strategy or consulting.

    [00:18:02] So how well are your systems engineered and are they in place? And then the last foundation I do not teach on, but you need to have, and the last foundation of a million dollar online coaching or consulting business is lifestyle. That is the, in my opinion, one of the most important bricks, and you can only decide what that looks like.

    [00:18:22] We talked about business design in the beginning of being the summary, the culmination of all of your products and services that you sell, working in a way that is, is going to get you what you want in your business. But the 10th Foundation lifestyle, this is all about. This is about making sure that you are continuing to grow as a leader.

    [00:18:44] Are you getting fed? Are you getting mentorship? Are you getting coaching? Is your body well and healthy? You are the greatest asset in your company. Are you taking care of yourself? Are you getting sleep? Have you pushed yourself to physical limits in the most amazing [00:19:00] way? Are you in flow state? Are you adventuring?

    [00:19:04] Are you spending time with people that light you up? That is lifestyle, and we have to very carefully make sure that your lifestyle is one of those 10 different business foundations. Otherwise, what we’ve done is we have built a business that might make a ton of money, but at the end of the day, the end of the day, Is that the way you really wanted to live your life?

    [00:19:27] And so that 10th Business Foundation is not less important than marketing. It’s not less important than offer engineering. It’s just one of the foundations that you need to strategize. So let’s recap the 10 foundations of building a million dollar business. Number one is business design. Number two is offer engineering.

    [00:19:44] Number three is messaging and marketing. Number four is, excuse me. Number three is branding and messaging. Number four is then the marketing of that. Number five is your sales, your sales processes. Six is thought leadership and pr. Seven is tech. Eight is teams, [00:20:00] nine is systems, and 10 is lifestyle. Now, what do we do with these things?

    [00:20:05] You’re like, okay, bro, this is great. These are all good to know. So I want you to write each one of these down, and I want you to make sure that each one is playing well with the other. If you have a marketing campaign that is not an extension of your messaging, then something’s wrong. If you have messaging that is not an extension of communicating well, what you deliver in your programs or your.

    [00:20:29] you’re gonna have trouble selling it. If your programs and your offers are just like a shot in the dark, cuz somebody told you you should, I don’t know, launch a certification program or whatever it is, and they haven’t truly been engineered as part of an overall business design ecosystem that’s gonna get you what you want in your life.

    [00:20:46] You’re not gonna be very happy. Even if you make a million dollars, well maybe you’ll be happier for a little bit. . But again, where did that time go? The one thing that we really, really, really can’t buy is reversal of time. And so time in my [00:21:00] opinion is more valuable than all the money you can pay me, and I think that’s probably the same for you.

    [00:21:07] So with that being said, all of these 10 business foundations have to fit together like a perfect puzzle to build. The ultimate million dollar online service consulting or coaching business. Can we build it other ways? Sure. But if one of the foundations isn’t well considered and strategically planned to fit well with the other one.

    [00:21:33] If you haven’t really given yourself permission to unpack what you’ve done and what you wanna do and what you wanna be known for, if you’re to that place where you are designing the next level of your business, the next ecosystem of offers. That next level of who you wanna be in your space and to yourself and to your family, and to the world, then now is the time to stop and do that.

    [00:21:59] I wanna [00:22:00] encourage you to do that because when these 10 business foundations are engineered to play well together, and they all are a function of the overall creation of a profitable, thriving, purpose-driven online business. I promise you, then you are finally going to be able to get exactly what you wanted when you first launched this baby.

    [00:22:23] Okay? And this is how we do it, and I’m so excited to be able to unpack this for you guys. So if you found this podcast helpful, please share it. I decided to, like, again, I, this is what I’ve been coaching. Clients privately on for over a decade, and I felt like it was really time to bring this out here into the podcast to share it with you.

    [00:22:43] If you’re at this place and you’re ready for next level business strategy and consulting, you can apply to work with us. You can go over to sweetlifeco.com, or you can visit the show notes for this episode by visiting sweetlifeco.com, clicking on the podcast, and this is episode number [00:23:00] 268. Or you can just very simply, Text the word apply to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0 and we’ll send you over an application and jump on the phone with you and chat a little bit more about this.

    [00:23:17] Regardless of what you do with this, the awareness of the 10 business foundations should hopefully, Give you an opportunity to now assess where you are and make sure each one of the bricks lays well together so we can build your house up instead of spreading new thing. I hope this was helpful. Thanks again for tuning into the show and I’ll talk to you next.

     
     

    Episode 258: The Business Focus Framework – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

    Episode Bonuses:

    Join the 2022 Sales, Marketing and Calendar Fill Up Event

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    Established entrepreneurs in all phases of business development.

    Summary:

    There’s a key to success that you’ve heard before, but it’s harder to implement than it sounds. This key is “simplicity”. When you’re able to clarify and simplify the punch list that needs to be done in your business, your implementation will be faster, you’ll be less overwhelmed and you’ll make your life as an entrepreneur much happier. 
    This week on the show, I’m sharing the simple framework I give to our clients, to get fast clarity and immediate results. When you what to focus on, when to apply that focus, and how… you’ll make massive business gains. 

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Get April Beach’s secret framework for focus and success
    2. Know how to think about business focus in a new and faster way
    3. Understand what you need to do to implement this framework and start taking action in your business

    Resources Mentioned:


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    Episode 257: How To Create More Time Freedom As An Entrepreneur – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

    Episode Bonuses:

    Download: The Ultimate Guide to Choosing the Online Business Model That’s Right for You

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Start to Scale Up System™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz
    Small business owners who are looking to gain control of time and manage family and company growth. 

    Summary:

    Growing a company while raising a family is a lot of work. Oftentimes entrepreneurs feel maxed out, and “Cat’s in the Cradle” by Harry Chapin breaks your heart. You started your company for freedom, and you know you can obtain it, but you don’t want to wait to sell or years more of hard work before reaping family life’s rewards. 
    In this episode we break down 3 practical systems you can implement this week, that require minimal work and will gain you maximum time freedom.

    At the End of This Episode You Will

    1. See how you can tweak your business model right now to create more time
    2. Know the power of messy days, how to schedule them and why you’ll love them
    3. Know more creative ways you can connect with your #1 team (family)

    Resources Mentioned:


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi, you guys. And welcome to episode number 206 of the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, and Merry Christmas to those of you who are listening to this live and happy holidays to everybody, regardless of what you celebrate here,
    we are celebrating family, and I just hope that this show reaches you and that you’re blessed by what we talk about today. Thank you so much for tuning in with us over the holidays. We’ve never missed an episode so far. And this year with all that’s happened in 2020 is no exception. And so today we are talking about three simple ways to put family first as an entrepreneur and create more time.
    So whether you’re listening to this live and it is Christmas week here in 2020, or you’re listening to this down the road, everything we’re talking about is a proven business strategy that you’re going to be able to take to the bank and create more time in your life, whatever you want your life to look like. I know that many of you who’ve listened to this show for years.
    You know, that half of the time my teenage boys are walking in and out of the door. On the other side of, of my office recording here, you know, with their friends or to the skate park, you know, wherever it is that you are doing life, we need to create a business model, a lifestyle around enabling that. And so this show fits really well into what we’re talking about right now with the holidays,
    with, you know, really cherishing life. I think the one thing that for us, it was just such a hidden blessing that came out of 2020 is just really loving being together at home and cherishing time. The one thing that money can’t buy is a second of time. And so a lot of things we’re talking about here on the show we’ve been talking about for years,
    but in this episode is all strategies to control time into a create as much time so that you are enabling family first in your business. This episode is for those of you guys who are in any phase of my start to scale up system. And so that’s phase one through five, whether you’re just thinking about starting a business, or you are a seasoned entrepreneur,
    that’s making a huge impact this show. And what we’re talking about here applies to all of you guys who are looking to gain control of time and manage family and company growth. Because the reality is, is a growing a company and raising a family is a lot of work. And oftentimes we as entrepreneurs feel super maxed out right in that song, cats in the cradle,
    I’d sing it to you, but I’ve a really terrible voice that song comes on and it’s like heartbreaking. And, and I was actually just listening to it last week with my boys. And one of my kids asked guys, you know, I love song, but what does it actually mean? And I was like, ah, you know, it’s about this dad that worked so hard that he never had time for his kid and he regretted it.
    And it was like, Oh, that through the gut, I know we feel that as entrepreneurs. So that’s how we were talking about some strategies here on the show. At the end of this episode, this is what you’re going to know. So you are going to see how you can tweak your current business model right now to create more time like instantly right now,
    as you’re listening to the show, we are going to talk about the power of messy days, how you can schedule them and why you will love messy days. And I’m going to share with you some behind the scenes about how I schedule these types of things. And you are going to know more creative ways that you can connect with your number one team,
    which is your family. And if you don’t have kids in your listening to this show, this family, your family is your support system, your network, whatever that looks like to you, all of our lives are beautifully different. And so whatever that looks like to you, you’re going to be able to take the strategies that we talk about here on this episode and apply them right away to your business and for all the show notes and the resources we mentioned here in the show,
    cruise over to Sweetlife co.com. Again, that Sweetlife co.com click on podcast. And this is episode number two, zero six. Okay. Let’s dive into today’s strategies. It’s going to be a real quick show cause it’s a holiday week, but really powerful. So stick with me.<inaudible> Step number one, in order to create more time in your business for family and lifestyle freedom,
    we need to look at your business model. So your business model can either bury you or save you. So the first thing I want you to look at is really how you’re serving clients. How much of that time does that of your time, does that take within a week and understand the demands of delivering certain projects or services places on your time, energy and your ability to focus.
    First of all, what do you do? Take a look at what you do. Just kind of picture your, your week and how you’re working with clients. Do you work with people? One-on-one do you work with people, one on group? How does that really look in your life? And right now I want you to assess that. And I want you to understand the time that’s required,
    that you are spending currently working with your clients and take a look at this current business model that you have. What does that look like? How do you work with people? Is it one-on-one? Is it one on group? How frequently in the first thing you want to do is you want to ask yourself, you know, Hey, is this working for me or is the actual amount of time that I’m spending with my clients taking away time from family?
    Now one might say, well, wow, isn’t that great? You know, you’re, you’re so busy. Your business is so busy. You have so many clients. Yes, that is true, but busy doesn’t equal. Good. So we’re going to give you some tips here to take a look at turning busy-ness into profit and time. And so the first thing I want you to do is I want you to ask yourself,
    what can I change right now? So that would be, are you seeing clients five days a week? You and these are just some suggestions for you. Can you block and tackle your client days as an example, I only work with clients privately on Thursdays and Fridays. And I’ve shared this with you guys on the show before, and I’ll share with you again,
    because I just get great feedback from this time. Number one, I think, I think best when I consolidate my work. So if I know that Thursdays and Fridays are, or my business coaching days, when I work with entrepreneurs and small businesses, then I get in that mindset and I know what I’m doing. I also then can look at my business model and I can say,
    okay, all of these businesses are in this same type of need, this same type of area. And so now I’m going to create groups and I actually scale my business model and I always do this again, reassess it. So I have, if I have five clients that are in the same place and need the same things, I actually will offer a group strategy call for those clients.
    It’s great for me, it’s great for them to network with other people and everybody gets the same results. So I want you to look at your business right now and ask yourself, can I number one block and tackle my days. And then within those days, what sort of smart scaling can I do for my business model? So can you create group offers?
    Can you create some on-demand content that your clients or your customers might want to absorb, instead of saying the same thing to different people? One-on-one can you create maybe an online resource center for your clients to tap into some of your more, more frequently asked questions to help save some of that time or even create a course or an actual program for them to go through online.
    Other strategies for you are creating maybe a membership committee, unity, or an online forum this year can be done with Slack or something easily with boxer, where you create a group of people that you want to connect with and you want to help them Connect with each other, but you don’t want to launch a full-blown membership site because that might not really work with your actual business model.
    So those are some suggestions of things that you can look at right now in your business, so that you can say, Hey, listen, what can I actually change immediately? What can I actually group together to save my time? And what are the dates phase where I would like to serve my clients? Another reason I haven’t mentioned it here, but why I serve clients on Thursdays and Fridays is because of the entire beginning of my week is on business building content creation and actual strategy.
    And so I take care of the business building inside in the beginning of my week, when my mind is fresh. For example, I’m recording this podcast episode on a Monday, usually record on Mondays or Tuesdays. When I know that I can put really powerful, highly impacting content. And then I take care of serving my clients because once I go in and I start immersing myself in my client’s businesses,
    it fully takes over all my thought processes. So that’s one of the reasons why I serve clients towards the end of the week. And then I have that weekend break in between. So action item. Number one is take a look at your current business model. Can you group together the days that you serve your customers, serve your clients, and can you make some changes to how you’re serving your clients?
    Creating group offers a membership community, or even just an online forum and really take a look at controlling instead of spreading yourself out throughout the week, consolidating your work into different types of work that you were doing at a time. That’s really strategy. Number one, within that same strategy. We talked about this a few episodes ago on the show within that same strategy,
    you should be planning your year in advance. So planning what you’re selling when you’re selling it. So, you know, we have a big macro plan and then we have a micro plan week by week. So you really should be taking a look at what’s happening for the year to come. Regardless of when you’re listening to this episode, you can do this at any point in time and really know what you’re selling when you’re selling it and what demands that’s going to put on your life and your family,
    okay. Strategy, or I should say, tip number two is my favorite. And I call it for the love of messy days. This is what a messy day is. A messy day is a day that I have scheduled in the middle of my week. My messy day is always Wednesday. And that day is a break between my strategy and my content creation at the beginning of the week.
    And my client service at the end of the week, messy days are totally to be spontaneous. And this is an amazing thing. It’s especially amazing if you have teenagers like I do. So on my messy days, I really don’t schedule any client meetings, but this is the day I schedule like the kids’ teeth cleaning, or if I need to stop by the grocery store or any appointments like I would have for myself,
    like going to get my eyelashes glued on or a haircut, all of those things are always scheduled on a Wednesday. This is also the day where I am completely able to be spontaneous with my kids. Do I have to get work done? Yes. I still work on messy days. So Wednesday is my favorite day to be this day. But it’s also the day that,
    you know, if my kids just want to sit down and, and have a cup of coffee and hang out where I always don’t have somewhere to be, I always can make sure that that is in that day. And they literally throw the plan out the window again. Do you have a list of things you have to get done on messages? Yes.
    Are they so regimented and scheduled? Not at all is one of the things I love doing with my kids on messy days is we have this taco wagon down the street and it’s just this amazing Mexican food that’s here in Lafayette, Colorado love taco wagon, and the kids will just be hungry. I’ll say, Hey, let’s, let’s go to taco wagon and grab some tacos and it’s super spontaneous and they love it.
    We listen to music. We play music messy days are the days where I can just stop and walk out of my office and share songs with the kids and listening to what they’re listening to, or watch YouTube videos or sit down and play call of duty, which by the way I suck at on Xbox. But I try, you know, those are the things we do on messy days.
    And so messy days are a day sometime in your week, if you can’t fit it in every single week, maybe plan and schedule a messy day every two weeks. And again, this is the time for you to know this is when you can fit in your haircuts teeth, cleaning, having to run an errand, maybe go to the post office. But it’s also the day where you can totally stop and have a cup of coffee with a friend who just might really need you call your aunt on the phone,
    who you haven’t talked to in forever. And all those things that get scheduled out because the schedule is too regimented. Messy days is totally to not be regimented, but you will love it because you’ll actually get more work done in the other days. When you know, you have your messy day, wherever that may land in your week. And then the third tip I have for you is to really over communicate with your family over communicate with your team.
    Again, whoever that is, it can be, you know, young, old, it can be your dog. You know, I used to communicate with my toddlers, my boys, when I was working from home and say, okay, you know, mommy really has a lot of work to do for the next two hours. But after that, we’ll sit down and we’ll watch Mickey mouse together or whatever.
    And so as long as you’re over communicating, what’s about to happen with your team. Then everybody is going into that with open eyes and they understand how they can support you in that process. Again, it doesn’t matter if they’re three or if they’re 35, they all understand that. So some suggestions on how to over communicate with everybody, but in a way,
    that’s not going to take you too much time because that’s would be against the point of this whole entire episode is number one. Every single Sunday night, just have a quick weekly powwow. We do this all the time. We go through the week, we look at our calendars, see what’s coming up and everybody’s just on the same page. It literally takes five minutes and that’s for a family of five to do,
    but it helps to just communicate and what’s to come. It also helps us all mentally prepare for the week ahead and how we want to show up in that week. We also have a nightly pregame. And so a nightly pregame again, literally takes like one minute saying, okay, this is what the morning is going to look like. This is what I have today.
    This is what you know, you have going on this next day. This is what this looks like for our family. Let’s again, have everybody be on the same page. It’s also the place where I can take a minute. If my kids need to talk about school or things they’re struggling with and help them strategize a plan to, you know, maybe make up some schoolwork,
    which frankly has been a lot since everybody’s doing online school and it’s a freaking mess. I won’t go down that rabbit hole, but it’s a time for me to really connect with my boys and hear like, yeah, I just have this, I have this math test tomorrow. I have no clue what I’m doing and really be able to focus in on them.
    And I know that they really appreciate this nightly pre-game as well. Couple of things we also do and we’ve done for years and years and years is we calendar share. We’ve also taught our boys how to add things to our family calendar. So we have one Gmail address where we manage all of our kid and family things. And so anytime one of our kids has something they want to do.
    They want to ride to the skate park or they want to go sleep over with a friend or whatever it may be. My boys can add that event and share it to our family calendar. So without even talking, we all know what everybody wants and needs over a period of time. And so everybody’s on the same page without taking any time whatsoever. And you might be asking like,
    okay, how do I do this? My kids are five. Well, of course this is age appropriate, but I will say that we started teaching our boys to add things to our family, shared Gmail calendar when they were as young as nine years old. So these kids can do anything with tech, right? So you would be very surprised at the wishes we receive on our family calendar.
    And it’s really cool. That’s how our kids get to do things because it’s planned in a way that works for everybody. And then the last suggestion that I would have for you is a family chat or a family WhatsApp channel or family Voxer. If you’ve never tried any of that, those are all awesome places to create a group chat where everybody’s on the same page.
    And you as the business owner can even just shoot, instead of calling this person and telling this person to pick up that person, you can just get on your boxer and just say, okay, you know, I’m running 10 minutes late from this meeting. We’re having chicken for dinner. I’ll see you soon, whatever it is that you need to say,
    you can, you can put in a box or chat to your family. And it’s a really efficient way to actually create more time. Again, if your family is, is a roommate, if your family is, you know, your other business team, or if it’s friends, whoever your people are, these are three simple ways to put those people,
    to put your family first as an entrepreneur and create more time in your business. And so here’s what we talked about today. We talked about how does your current business model and know how to group your days together and what you can tweak and scale and your business model right now, in order to create more time each week, we also talked about messy days,
    why you need messy days, why you’ll love them, why your family will love your messy days and really why it just frankly, it’s going to make you think, wow, I’m so glad I’m an entrepreneur instead of wow, crap. This is way harder than I thought it would be. Is there ever going to be a light at the end of this,
    you know, constant tunnel of demands, messy days, fix that, like in an instant. So if any of these things I can say, I love my messy days the most. And then the third thing is think of more creative ways to connect with your family, whether it’s calendar share or Voxer and different ways to communicate, whether it’s a weekly powwow or a nightly powwow.
    We talked about that as well. I hope you found some of these suggestions helpful to you and your team, your people, all the people that love you. And you know what it’s really special to have people in your life that love you so much. They just want more of you and they need more of you. That’s a gift. And you know,
    I know we’re also grateful for that. So it’s really important as small business owners that we take strategies like this business model, calendar share and more practical lifestyle strategies in order to create this time and in life freedom, I’m here to help. I’m here to support you. It’s what I do here on the show. I’m a business strategist, but I’ve built multiple companies with kids.
    I think I launched my first business when my youngest was six weeks old. So I totally get it. Whatever phase you’re in of parenting. Thank you so much for listening to this show. Again, happy holidays. Happy new year, let’s kick 2020, like to the curb behind us. And I’m so excited to start 2021 with you. We have a lot of amazing things coming up on the show,
    including commitment week 20, 21, five days. I’m only 10 minutes a day to completely lay out your entire 20, 21 business plan coming up here next week. And so I dive into commitment week 2021 with us next week’s episode number 207. All right, you guys, I will talk to you soon. Have an awesome day.

    Episode 254: Should You Launch A Membership Program? – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

    Episode Bonuses:

    Grab the FREE Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models and Virtual Services

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for businesses who are investigating the idea of launching a membership community.

    Summary:

    This is a great show for businesses who are investigating the idea of launching a membership community. If you want to increase profit and serve more people at a time in the form of a membership community, this show will give you more clarity on how that type of program structure will work in your business and your life. 
    Membership programs deliver reoccurring information, content, trainings and/or engagement to clients on an ongoing basis. But, to create an excellent membership program that keeps people engaged, with ongoing monthly reoccurring revenue, you need to do a few things right. In this episode, we’re talking about those things…

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Understand membership offer structures
    2. Get insider help on how to keep your members engaged
    3. Have a structure to scale your time for more money with less work

    Resources Mentioned:

    Text CALL to 805-254-0880 to Receive a Free Business Priority Mapping Call


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    Episode 253: How To Launch Group Coaching – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

    Episode Bonuses:

    Grab the FREE Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models and Virtual Services

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for coaches and consultants who are ready to grow and increase sales.

    Summary:

    When it comes to the business of coaching or consulting, 1-1 services dominate the market, However, coaching people 1-1 takes a great deal of time and you’ll hit a financial and physical ceiling. This mistake often causes coaches to stay stuck in busy work and lifestyle cages and then many burn out completely. Instead, we’re diving into the business model of group coaching and how to shift your business from 1-1 to 1-group.

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Hear how easy it is to go from 1-1 to 1-group
    2. Know why your 1-1 clients will like group coaching better
    3. Have the steps to move into group coaching services 

    Resources Mentioned:

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 65: Doing Things That Don’t Scale – with John Lee Dumas

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 252: How To Launch Your Coaching or Consulting Business – with April Beach


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    Episode 251: The Ultimate Guide To Launch Online Courses – with April Beach

    251 SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

    Episode Bonuses:

    Grab the FREE Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models and Virtual Services

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who want to level up and stop copying others. Listeners who tap into this show want to get the formula to choose the perfect online business offers, courses, masterminds or coaching programs that give them the life they want.

    Summary:

    This is the second episode in our series called  “The Ultimate Guide To Your Perfect Business Model; For Experts, Coaches and Consultants”. In these shows we unpack the process of intentional business design, offer engineering, and business architecture to build a business for high-profit, deep impact, lifestyle results. 
    In this show we break down the structure of online courses and how to use them to grow and scale your business. We talk about the history of online courses, why many today are failing, the types of online courses you may want to consider and how to use online courses the correct way to increase profit. 

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Know the two primary ways online courses are delivered
    2. Know what audiences are currently buying online courses
    3. Know if online courses should be part of your business model architecture

    Resources Mentioned:


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    Episode 242: Should Live Virtual Events Be Part Of Your Offer? – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Grab the Ultimate Guide To Online Business Models 

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for coaches, consultants and service based experts who want to grow their leads and increase their sales with pre-qualified buyers. 

    Summary:

    In this show we unpack the online business model of “live virtual events” and help you determine if they should be part of your business strategy moving forward. 
     
    Live Virtual Events are not new. In fact, we’ve been hosting them for years. They’re an upgrade from sales webinars and could be a good option to increase sales in your business. But, like all business models, Live Virtual Events aren’t for everyone. In this episode we dive into the model of Live Virtual Events and how offering them can impact your business and lifestyle both positively and negatively. 

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Understand the structure of a Live Virtual Event
    2. Compare Virtual Events to Sales Webinars 
    3. Know the most common way to fill your Virtual Event
    4. Have complete clarity as to if Live Virtual Events are the right strategy for you

    Resources Mentioned:

     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach I, you guys, and welcome back to the show. We have a little bit of housekeeping to do before, before we dive into tonight’s episode. And so let’s go ahead and talk about that first,

    For those of you who are faithful, sweet life podcast listeners, thank you so much. You may have noticed that the previous episode, 241, which dropped on August the 23rd, 2021 was removed. And I want to talk about that. I’m always honest with you guys. And I want to just cut right to the chase. Our guest, who is an amazing human was asked by a former business partner to remove the episode out of respect for our guests.

    We removed it, but in almost five years of podcasting, we have never removed an episode or we have never not produced an episode. So first and foremost, I want to apologize to you. This was an amazing episode. It was so good. I want to tell you this, that if you would like to have a recording of this episode, you can get a recording of it by emailing podcast@sweetlifeco.com.

    It was an incredible episode, and I will release a recording to you. As long as you send the request to podcast@sweetlifeco.com. So there was a previous episode that was titled how to build a million dollar business with live virtual events. It is incredible. And if you still want a copy of that, I will release it to you. However, we did pull it off of iTunes,

    out of respect for our guests and frankly, a very, just messy situation that I’m not going to take our time to talk about what I will say, learning moment here. This is exactly why I don’t like partnerships. You guys is because shit like this happens. So that’s all I’m going to say about it, but I want to thank you for being a listener to this show.

    Again, happy to give you a copy of that episode. If you missed it, as long as you email it, the request for episode number 2, 4, 1. Now what’s happened because we had to remove the episode is that our numbers got a little messed up. So last week’s episode, you’ll hear me referring to the show notes as going to episode number 242,

    but our numbers kind of squished back one. So this episode that we’re going to talk about here, and yes, I’m talking about live virtual events. It’s a really hot topic we’ve been talking about for almost a year. This episode is officially numbered, 242, but there’s a little bit of some confusion in there because last week’s episode was supposed to be 2 42.

    I hope that makes sense to you. You can find all of the show notes for all of the episodes by going to sweet life co.com. Even the show notes for the previously removed episode. And there you have it. So let’s go ahead and dive into what we are going to talk about today. So we’re going to talk about today is answering the question should live virtual events,

    be part of your offer. And we’re going to be talking a lot more about live virtual events here on the podcast. We’re going to continue to talk about it and clubhouse with live event, amazing leaders like Barry and blue with Sage and all these great entrepreneurial leaders who are hosting live virtual events. And so we’re going to continue to talk about this here on the show.

    So this is definitely not the end of the story. This is the beginning of a, I don’t want to say a launch, an awareness of an amazing way to warm up your audience and pre-qualified buyers, and to increase your sales. So on today’s show, this is for all of you who are ready to scale your business online, and you’re considering maybe webinars in the past.

    We’re going to talk about the status of webinars in this show. And we’re going to talk a little bit about how live virtual events compare to webinars as well. So it’s a great show for those of you guys who are coaches and consultants, who are all of our listeners, are your service-based expert who want to grow your leads and increase your sales with pre qualified buyers.

    In this show, we unpack the online business model of live virtual events and help you determine if they should be part of your strategy moving forward. So here’s the deal live. Virtual events are not new. In fact, we’ve been doing them for years. They’re an upgrade from the previous old-school sales webinars, and they can be a good option for your business,

    but like all business models, they’re totally going to affect your lifestyle and your time. And you know that I geek out on those things for you. There’s nothing worth building. If it’s not going to give you the lifestyle and the time and the profit freedom that you want. And so we’re going to dive into those discussions on two day ship. At the end of this episode,

    you will understand the structure of live virtual events. You will compare live virtual events to sales webinars, and know really which one, if either could be a good fit for you. You’re going to know the most common way to fill your live virtual event. So how do we get people in there? And you’re going to have complete clarity as to whether or not this business,

    this business model is for you. So again, all this show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com and just click on over there. And this will be the most, most current podcast available if you’re listening to this real time. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show So the first question we have to talk about when we’re talking about live virtual events is to answer the question are webinars dead.

    If you are in business and you are selling to other entrepreneurs, webinars have been not converting well for about two years. Let me give you some history on this. We first started selling our courses and programs through webinars back in 2008. I mean, that’s like ancient times. That’s like the dark ages of online business. Okay. So webinars and sales conversion,

    Weber’s about it had been around for a really long time. So if you are selling to other entrepreneurs who are used to being in webinars all the time, you’re going to have a hard time filling your webinars and converting from your webinars. And so inter live virtual events. Now, if you have a business that doesn’t sell to establish entrepreneurs that are new to webinars,

    webinars can work great for you. So we don’t want to totally throw the webinar baby out with the bath water, but I just want to address kind of the elephant in the room and like, Hey, what’s really happening to sales webinars. And so those are just some of the trends that we have seen. So let’s just take a moment of silence of gratitude for the sales webinars of old that have made many of us thousands and thousands and thousands of dollars.

    Okay. Moment of silence over at times are changing. And here’s the deal. When is the last time that you like raise your hand to be in somebody’s webinar funnel, right? And you’re saying, Hey, you know, please let me sign up for your webinars. So I know you’re going to sell to me. And the last 10 minutes, none of us want that over the last couple years,

    we have bond back, which I know when you’re thinking automation and, you know, press and go businesses where you do not want to be present webinars on demand. Evergreen webinars are great, but we’ve been moving back from so much on demand because people, especially in the last year and a half want curated experiences, they want personal attention. They want to know that you know their name or that,

    you know, what they look like or that, you know, their story or, you know, people frankly just really like to talk and they like to share what’s going on with them. And so they can’t do that in a webinar setting. But when we curate an atmosphere where people can share where they can talk, where they can share a little bit about why they’re there and what their story is,

    all of a sudden we have created an environment where they feel like they belong and that environment can be done in your live virtual event. And it’s magical. So let’s kind of talk about live virtual event structures. The first thing you need to about a leverage event is pretty much just like a webinar format, but instead of using a system like zoom webinar,

    where it’s just you up there on the big jumbo screen talking, some of the best live virtual events are where, you know, we can see all your others, attendees faces. So we can use zoom meeting and different software for that as well. Live virtual events are most commonly held in 1, 2, 3 or five day settings. Now these are live events, okay?

    These are not prerecorded. These are live events where you get to show up and you bring all your energy and you interact with people and they offer powerful strategies in a workshop setting. It’s like a duet with you setting. That’s what you do when you offer live virtual event. And what’s so cool about them is you can bring in your expert content that perfectly tees up your high end offer,

    which you sell at the end, kind of to the middle, to the end of your live virtual event. And because you’re weaving in these emotional journeys and these emotional connections for your attendees throughout your live virtual event, by virtual events, commonly have breakout rooms. People commonly get personal attention, and there’s a lot of implementation that happens within that, the event itself.

    So whether or not people actually choose to join your high ticket offer, I fill up virtual events, really give them an amazing transformation. And if you’ve been listening to me in any of my shows for the last four years, you know that I am an engineer of transformational offers. And so anything we do, I believe we need to deliver a transformation and live virtual events are one of the best ways to do this.

    Now let me peel back the curtain a little bit more for you. Like I said, we’ve been doing leverage events for years, but the king and queen of live virtual events and how to use live virtual events are Berry and blue with Sage. Let me tell you a little bit about them and I’m going to make sure that you have their information to connect with them further here in our show notes.

    So at first connected with barium blue and clubhouse, and they delivered some amazing masterclasses, totally free to hundreds of people throughout late 2020 at the beginning of 2021, when we first all got on clubhouse. And since then I’ve co moderated multiple rooms with blue. And so a lot of the strategies that we use, we have learned from them. This is very important to know like who is the king and queen and the live virtual event space.

    Currently. I know there are a lot of other people that are doing it really well. And my friend Eileen Wilder does live virtual events well. And so I just want to make sure that you’re getting all the resources and that you get to tap into and learn from the same amazing leaders that we have been. So we hosting live virtual events for years before this,

    in this same setting, but my IQ and how we do our live events is, has really changed. And we’ve been able to curate even better experiences because of these leaders. So I always want to give credit where credit’s due. And so I’ll make sure that you have their resources to some of these amazing leaders in our show notes. So let’s go ahead and we’re going to dive into three different areas of live virtual events.

    Now that we’ve talked about the structure of what it is as a business model, before we move on, if you have not yet grab my ultimate guide to online business models and offers, I just updated it to include the details of live virtual events. It’s totally free. It’s 18 pages of the ins and outs of all the different offers and business models that you can deliver in your business.

    And I tell you exactly how they will affect your time in your life and your profit. You can pause this podcast episode in just text the word guide to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. Or you can very simply go to the show notes@sweetlifeco.com and I’ll make sure that that is in there for you as well. Okay. We’re going to talk about live virtual event pros.

    We’re going to talk about live virtual event, mid considerations, and we’re going to talk about live virtual events, lifestyle considerations, because at the end of this episode, I want you to be able to answer the question, which is the title of the episode should live virtual events, be part of your offer. And this is how I’m going to help you do that.

    So let’s, first of all, talk about the pros of live virtual events, live virtual events, deliver an amazing customer experience. They build deep relationships with your leads and they build trust faster. Now, one of the things you need to know is live virtual events are not offered free. You sell tickets to your library to event or a library to event ticket.

    Currently at the recording of this, we commonly host a live virtual event is $77. So it’s not a ton of money. It’s just a little bit of change. But the thing is, is it helps people know that, Hey, you know what, I’m going to show up because I paid for this and I’m expecting to get value. So at the recording of this,

    the most common price for live virtual events that are used as conversion tools into higher ticket offers are anywhere from $47 to $97. We picked 77 right in the middle, just so you know. So they’re super fun and high energy. I mean, it feels so good to interact with people and get them results in people really feel like they belong. Live virtual events are answering the need of isolation for a lot of people over the last year and a half.

    And they’re different from Sydney to the zoom. They’re just not sitting there in a zoom, you know, having a chat, having a boring chat engineered, just like in person events, live virtual events are engineered and laid out just like we’re there in a room together having this amazing interaction at time live local event, but we’re engineering them to be hosted virtual.

    And they’re very, very special and very powerful when you do them, right? And they establish you as an expert and the solution holder for what people need. And they do that in a really fast way. And so therefore live virtual events pre-qualify and they disqualify your perfect buyers. So those are some of the pros of live virtual events. And I want to make sure we just head out the gate with those,

    you know, live virtual events for us, again, pulling back the curtain for you in order to host our library to events, we lay out our 12 month calendar of when we’re going to host our live virtual events multiple times a year, and they lead into our signature offer and program. And so it’s really powerful and people love it. And we even have huge faithful fans that chose not to purchase our signature higher ticket program because they got amazing results in our live virtual events.

    And they are lifetime fans. They love us because our engineer or the way we engineered our event was so powerful for them. So that’s great. Again, there are some of the pros of live virtual events. Now let’s talk about some of the mid consideration. So these are kind of like lukewarm, not hot, not cold. I just want to make sure you’re aware of these.

    If you’re thinking about doing live virtual events, they are alive. They are not pre recorded, live means live. So you have to show up in. So does that align with your personality? Does it align with your schedule? Is that something that you feel like doing? Are you like somebody with high energy energy that loves to interact with people or does that not really align with,

    with your personality as a leader? So those are some of the things yeah. You really need to consider when you’re considering this type of business model. Are you good live, are you good on the fly? Can you stand up in front of anybody in teachers zone of genius and how easy is it for you to flow in that? Even though obviously your content is planned,

    you’re still alive. It’s like you’re speaking for an extended period of time. And so you need to be comfortable with that. And the other mid consideration before you just go and start launching a live virtual event, is that the architecture of the rest of your funnel. So your marketing in your ads, your lead magnet, and then after your live virtual event,

    your call to action into your higher ticket offer has to be nailed. You don’t want to host a live virtual event all by itself until all of the, of the rooms in that house are built. Okay. So it’s, it’s something important I want to mention, because I don’t want you to leave in this show and being like, oh yeah, I’m going to get a live virtual event on the calendar.

    We want to reverse engineer your success. If you’re one of my clients and you’re listening to this, you hear me say this all the time. First, we have to know what you’re selling, right? What is that signature program and an offer. And then we can go a little bit closer in, so, okay, what’s a conversion tool in this case,

    we’re talking about live virtual events, and then we can go a little bit closer. We can say, okay, what’s that lead back that that’s going to lead into that leverage hold events, lead magnets can be challenges that can be quick little videos. They can be downloads. They could be quizzes or assessments. There’s a variety of lead magnets that people use to feed into leverage events.

    The most common lead magnet that everybody is using is a challenge. Just so you know, everybody is using that right now. And it’s working really well. We use that ourselves. Okay. And then you reverse engineer that little bit closer, and what’s your marketing strategy. What’s your ad spend and how are you, how are you filling your live event?

    So those are some mid-level considerations that I want you to think about. You know, first we talked about the pros, like the high highs, and now we’re like, okay, let’s come down to earth a little bit here. What actually has to happen in order for you to pull this off and nail it. Okay. Want to make sure that I’m uncovering all of that for you,

    and you need to have a consistent flow of new leads to run this model more frequently. So if you want to run a live virtual event every single month, you need to make sure that you have an adequate ad spend or another source to generate leads, new leads into your business to continue to continue to fill your live virtual event every single month. Okay.

    Now let’s talk about how this is going to affect your life. And again, this is my favorite thing to talk about because, well, you know, I just came back from taking like all summer off, going around and adventuring and traveling with my kids and, and moving my oldest son back to college and all the things that we do or all of the things we want to do.

    Right? And so every time we consider a business model, we first want to consider what is this going to do to your life and your time? And so when we’re talking about live virtual events, it is definitely going to affect your lifestyle and your travel and your family time. And there are some ways around that. As an example, I host zero live virtual events in the summertime because I’m Mia,

    right? And you can do that too, but just know that if this is going to be part of your flow, it is going to affect your family time positively or negatively. This could work great for you. Number two, plan your live virtual event, calendar 12 months in advance. You can always then plan your travel, your adventure, your other business operations,

    your passion projects, your philanthropy, whatever it is you do, right? So you want to take a 12 month calendar and you want to plot when you are selling or opening your signature program. And then prior to that is when you want to host your live virtual events. So how often are you selling or opening your signature program? Is it available all the time?

    Those are some of the things that you want to consider. Number three, many live virtual events that do well are held on the weekends Friday, Saturday, Sundays. How does that work for you? I work on weekends quite often during the months of the year that I work and I love it. My brain works really great. And then some weekends,

    I don’t feel like working at all and I totally check out, you know, what does that look like for you? Are you okay with having a business model where the people that are going to attend really need to be there on a Friday, maybe even a Friday night and Saturday and a Sunday. How does that work with you and for your life?

    Number four live virtual events that are currently performing well are done in one, two and three day segments. We have shorter live virtual events that do well. So our current live virtual event is a half of a day. It’s awesome. We’re in and out. You’ll love it. Other friends of ours host live virtual events that are for five days. It really depends on what your signature program is and what you’re selling and what content or what transformation needs to happen in that live virtual event.

    If you’re talking to Barry in blue with Sage, they love three-day live virtual bats, but just know for you. Are you cool with doing leverage events that could be three days straight or five days straight? What does that look like to you? Number five, really think about scheduling these on repeat for your lifestyle considerations. These do need to be on repeat.

    So some of our clients, and we have a lot of clients right now that we’re coaching and working with them to design and build their live virtual event. Some of our clients are doing them every six weeks hosting their live virtual event. Every six weeks, some of them are doing them quarterly. So what does that look like for you? Do you want to host a live virtual event every month or every quarter or every trimester,

    whatever that works, whatever that looks like for you, just make sure that you are looking at that 12 month calendar. Like we talked about before and scheduling them on repeat, do you have to do this? No. I’m just teaching you and sharing with you, how we scale businesses for higher profit, right? You can host one live virtual event and it can be just one little Allah cart event and it’s great and you’re done,

    but that becomes more like a signature offer program that changes your live virtual event from being a conversion tool into your signature offer or program. If that makes sense. And then the last thing, just being really honest, what does that really look like? As far as your energy and your personality, are you like the super high energy person and you love engaging with others or you,

    somebody that is like, wow, you know what? I just don’t know if I can be at that higher energy for that period of time. Now let’s dive into that being very real. First of all, your live virtual event is going to be yours. It does not mean you have to have dance parties. Can I just say for the record?

    I hope I don’t hurt anybody’s feelings. I can’t stand the dance parties. If you get me on your live virtual event and have me dance, I am not liking you very much. It’s just not who I am. So what I’m seeing is you do you in our live virtual events, I will never make you dance, but I do like have you get up and have you get a drink and have you get a snack.

    And we do put on music. We do a lot of music, but I’m not going to make you dance on zoom. And I’m a dance mom. Okay. So you do you, your leverage events don’t have to be like super high energy.<inaudible> I’m not like that. You don’t have to be like that. And you can still have an amazing event.

    You can have a three-day meditation prayer event. I don’t care what it is, but just make sure that whatever event you are curating, that it aligns with your energy and that you want to do it. Because if you’re building something that you don’t really want to do, number one, you’re going to suck at it. And number two, your sales are going to suffer.

    And that is a fact, okay. Keeping it real here on the show. Okay. So let’s recap today. We talked about should live live virtual events, be part of your offer. We talked about what they are, the structure of live virtual events, the pros and cons of library, virtual event, and some mid tier business model considerations. We talked about the current format of the funnels that are being built into live virtual events.

    We talked about, who’s doing them. We talked about how we do them. And we uncovered, you know, and pulled back the curtains about our live virtual events. And we also covered whether or not you should be selling with webinars. We actually covered a lot of ground in this episode, and I’m meant for this to be more of a foundational episode about live virtual events,

    but we’re going to be talking about them a lot more. We teach our clients in our wave makers program about live virtual events and we help people engineer live virtual events. If you want to work with us to learn how to engineer and layout your live virtual events, you can find us@sweetlifecoat.com and apply to work with us at any time. We would love to meet you.

    And if you just want to take this information and run with it, awesome, please do it. Take a screenshot of this episode. Let me know if you’re thinking about doing live virtual events, I would love to follow you on Instagram and cheer you on. You can find me at April beach life. All right, you guys. And again, all of the show notes for this can be found@sweetlifeco.com

    to recap. This is technically going to be number two for two, but last week’s episode was also talked about being number 2 42. And that was only because we had to take down the episode the week before that lots of drama. I hate drama. Okay. So we’re cleaning this up for you and moving forward next week, moving into fall. So excited for fall here to be here on the Northern hemisphere.

    And then for those of our friends, and we have so many of you guys that listen that are down and under, first of all, praying for you guys that you’re all well and thinking about you guys, and hopefully as the seasons change for you down there, that circumstances will change for you as well. Okay. You guys have an awesome week and I appreciate your listenership and I appreciate your subscribing and I appreciate Your sharing this episode,

    and I will talk to you. Bye for now.

    Episode 241: How To Make Money While Having Fun – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Download the free Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models, Offers, and Lifestyles

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    As a lifelong entrepreneur, I can’t imagine a life where someone else directed my time, energy, location and schedule. So this episode like all others, is geared for people like me. The dreamers and doers. 

    Summary:

    Money doesn’t buy happiness. Yes, it definitely takes the edge off… but when it comes to being truly happy and fulfilled, most people consider time, family, health, love, giving, helping, and adventuring as the real prize of life. 
     
    In this show, I’m breaking down the two-punch formula for a profitable business that makes you really REALLY happy. 
     
    This episode is dedicated to my oldest son, who asked me this exact question over breakfast. He’s grown up in our lifestyle entrepreneur family and was the special guest in episode #84 “Inside The Life Of An Entrepreneur’s Kid”.  But now, two years later as a college student, he’s determining how he wants to design his life, and this question is at the forefront of his mind. 

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. What is a lifestyle entrepreneur? 
    2. How to engineer your offers so people always buy
    3. How to know if an open and close cart is really for you

    Resources Mentioned:

     
     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    You’re listening to the life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach, Come back to the show. I’m April beach. And today we are talking about how to make it money while still having fun. Now, I know that sounds like a Super cheesy title, and you might think that we’re not going to talk about anything very serious here,

    but that is definitely not the case in this show. I am breaking down the strategies to actually make this happen. So let me go ahead and set the stage for what we’re going to talk about today. First of all, this is episode number 242. So if you’re a new listener, all the things that we talk about, all the links that I share,

    oftentimes we give away these huge free resources with episodes can be found by going to sweet life co.com clicking on podcast. And you can just search by episode number 2 42. So if you’re on the go, don’t worry about missing any of this because we will have it waiting there for you in the show notes at our website. This episode is great for those of you in any stage of business.

    So our company, the Sweetlife company, we consult entrepreneurs who are launching, scaling and amplifying a coaching consulting or service focused business. And usually I’d like to break up the episodes because we give you step-by-step business strategies that other coaches charge thousands for here on the show, totally free, but not every business strategy is great for every business, right? So where you are in your business tells us what strategies you need to be using to get to the next level.

    And so oftentimes I break up these episodes saying, okay, if you’re in this phase of business, listened to this show, or if you’re in this second phase and listen, honestly, this show is great for everybody. So regardless of where you are in our business growth system phase, this show is going to be really good for you because there are a lot of people that are making a lot of money that are not happy at all.

    And we talk about that on the show today. So your bonus resource, which is really powerful, which you can just pause and grab right now is the ultimate guide to online business models. Okay? So this means online offers. We have a massive ultimate guide that you can grab just by going to Sweetlife co.com forward slash ultimate business guide. Okay? So that’s available for you now,

    again, anybody in any phase of business, this show’s going to be a great one for you as a lifestyle entrepreneurial lifelong entrepreneur. I seriously cannot imagine a life where somebody else has directed my time and my energy and my location, my schedule. So this episode, like all others were talking about how to make money while being happy, but it’s just for entrepreneurs.

    You’re not going to catch a drift for me here on the show about how to do this by working for corporate America. So the summary of what we’re talking about is the fact that money doesn’t buy happiness definitely takes the edge off. I hear you for sure, but when it comes to being truly happy and fulfilled, most people will consider time. Family health love giving,

    helping others, adventuring and traveling as the real prize of life. And so in this show, I’m breaking down a two punch formula for a profitable business that makes you really, really happy. And here’s a really quick behind the scenes. Okay? This show is dedicated to my son, Tim, and he’s actually been a guest here on the sweet life entrepreneur podcast.

    Before years ago, I interviewed my son, Tim beach on episode number 84. You can go back and listen to it about what it’s like growing up in a lifestyle, entrepreneur and family. But this morning we’re literally packing his car right now to take him back to college. I’m about to, I’m literally recording this episode. So funny share with you guys like ultimate beside the seeds.

    I’m recording this show because I didn’t get a chance to batch because we’ve been out having so much fun this week, I’m recording the show, sending it to my amazing producer. And I’m getting in the car with him and driving him all the way from Colorado to Delaware to go back to college. And so we’re sitting here and I’m thinking to myself today,

    man, I really need to record this great show. And I have this other show totally lined up that I was going to record for you guys today. And he asked me the question, which is the title of this show. And so this show is dedicated to him. He said, how do I make money while still being happy, mom? And I was like,

    yeah, it’s such a great question. And I will teach you. I’ll teach you how to do it. Just like I’m going to teach you guys here on this episode. So anyway, this show is dedicated to Tim. And by the time you listened to this, I will be somewhere in a car halfway across the country or on my way home from dropping him off.

    So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show today. We’re going to talk about what is a lifestyle entrepreneur, how to engineer your offer so that people always buy them and how to know if an opening close cart is right for your lifestyle and your business. Ooh, that was a long intro. Thanks for hanging. All right, let’s go ahead and do it.

    So, first of all, how to make money while having fun. All right. So to answer that question, it’s also asking the question, how to become a lifestyle entrepreneur. All right. So how to make money while having fun, AKA, how to be a lifestyle entrepreneur. So, first of all, we need to dive into the definition of a lifestyle entrepreneur.

    If you go right now on Instagram and you search the hashtag lifestyle entrepreneur, you are going to see like Ferrari’s and like half naked girls on the beach, all the things. I’m not sure where we went wrong, but expensive cars and huge mansions do not me, lifestyle entrepreneurship. So somebody hacked that hashtag, but I’m telling you, I grew up in a true lifestyle,

    entrepreneur family. I have a true lifestyle, entrepreneur family, and it’s not driven primarily by money. So what is a lifestyle entrepreneur, a lifestyle entrepreneur designs, their business in such a way that it enables the lifestyle they want to live true. Lifestyle entrepreneurs are not driven by profit. They’re driven by the ability to have the freedom lifestyle that they want.

    Oftentimes this freedom lifestyle is centered around action, adventure, sports traveling, and a flexible schedule. And while some lifestyle entrepreneurs have a primary business location, other lifestyle entrepreneurs want to be location independent. So it has to do with what you’re doing with your time. There are ways to make money working for other people, working for corporate America, but a true lifestyle.

    Entrepreneur is one where no one else is directing your energy, your location, your schedule. And so this lifestyle entrepreneurship is how we engineer your business to actually give you the lifestyle that you love. And so to answer this question, I am breaking this episode into two parts within this one show here where it’s just two punch right here. Okay. So first of all,

    we’re going to take on the question, how to make money, and then we’re going to dive into the question about having fun. Okay. So first of all, let’s talk about how to make money. So how you make money as an entrepreneur is by designing and delivering a highly valuable offer. Okay. So I’m an offer architect. I know that sounds so geeky,

    but it really all starts with your offer. You guys, right? All the marketing in the world cannot save you if you have a shitty offer and you’re not good at giving people amazing results. All right. So number one is designing this highly valuable offer and here are some steps to do that. First of all, you need to solve a big problem.

    So my, one of my amazing clients, I love her so much. Her name is Lauren lavender. She says it is a painkiller, Lauren lavender calls the solution to somebody’s problem, the painkiller like the medicine. And so I love that analogy and it just helps a lot of people see it clearer. And so I love to share that that’s what Lauren calls it.

    So solving a big problem. And this goes with identifying your ideal client’s struggles as it relates to your area of expertise. So really pinpointing this. And if you were new in business and you’re listening to this episode, this is also what we call your M P your minimum buyable product, okay. Or program, because we’re not, you know, making physical products here.

    In most cases, most of our listeners don’t do that. So this is the first solution that you need people to understand that you deliver and that they’re willing to pay for. So how to design a highly valuable offer, you have to solve a highly important problem, or you can fulfill a highly desirable solution. Okay. Number two, design, a winning customer experience.

    This is huge you guys. And especially as we’re seeing the evolution and the change in online business offers the growth in the coaching and the consulting industry over the last couple of decades, it’s really important that your offer is able to be personalized, that you have the ability to enable some sort of customization. That’s how we design highly valuable offers. It is not by doing it with cookie cutter solutions,

    unless your business model is to serve the masses. Some of the ways I know you’re probably thinking April, you know, highly customized offers. It’s really hard to scale. It’s actually not. When you break down your method and your framework, then you put it into a winning customer experience where that your customers, it’s kind of like those choose your own adventure books that,

    that many of us used to read as kids, your customers can pick their path and enabling things like artificial intelligence and bringing in like CX focused team members. For those of you guys that are scaling your business and allowing them to customize their journey through your signature program is how we design a winning customer experience. Even if you have 500 people in your program at once,

    we can still customize it. And I just challenge you right now, just if you have an existing offer to take a look at that and make sure that you are delivering that personalized, custom winning experience for your clients as much as possible within your content. The next step to designing a highly valuable offer is to determine your position on scarcity versus availability, right?

    So let me say that again, determine your personal viewpoint, your decision on scarcity versus availability. This is answering the question. Should I offer my product all the time, or should I offer my product on a limited time basis? This applies to those of you guys who are considering doing what we call an evergreen course or an evergreen program, or creating a program where somebody can join all the time,

    or is this something that they can only join once, twice or three times a year? And here’s why this is important when we’re talking about how to make money. If you are new in business, this is a warning to you. If you are new in business, open and close programs are tough for businesses that have not reached consistent 10 K months in businesses that have not hit list growth.

    Like you don’t have an audience yet. If you were brand new, open and closed programs are tough because it puts all your eggs in one basket and you can’t open your program and then close it. And then two weeks later say, oh yeah, I’m going to open it again because only two people joined scarcity versus availability. There is no right or wrong way,

    but I do want to make sure that you’re thinking about how that affects your life. And you have to determine, are you okay with only making money a couple times a year? Or does it bring you personally more peace to have a consistent revenue generation every single month or quarterly or whatever that flow looks like to you? So psychologically as a business owner,

    you need to think about how it affects you. But also if you’re a new in business, I just going to send a warning about being very careful about open and closed programs, because we need to make you known. We need to have you gain traction before you close the door and not letting any new clients in, just because some marketing person told you,

    you should do it for scarcity sales, the next thing nail your minimum viable product. Okay? So this is what you’re known for. You want to determine what it is that you really want to be known for. You can be known for all the things, but it’s going to take you a long time to get there, like a lifetime. We want to pick one.

    We want to pick one thing at first and I promise you, I promise you. You’re not going to get stuck at it, but you want to pick one thing at first that you want to be known for and you sell the heck out of that painkiller, you sell the heck out of that solution and you own that space. And then you can grow into other solutions and then you can grow into other ways.

    Here is an example of that. I bet you had no idea that my first consulting firm, oh my gosh. How long ago is this? Now about 17 years ago that I am the creator of the parent coaching and baby planning industry. The whole industry, I wrote the scope of practice for it. This company is still run. See, and you leave.

    You don’t even know that probably I have entire separate business consulting firm that coaches businesses, that market to new and expecting families. And we have clients in 17 countries. It’s crazy, right? I wasn’t stuck there. And so I’m just telling you this. I promise you when you nail one thing, right? It gives you a springboard to do all the other things.

    So make sure that you’re nailing this one thing that you want to be known for. And then you can grow into other things and really sit down the last step to designing a highly valuable oper is crunching your numbers. And we call this your profit matrix. You need to understand how many people you need to sell to at your determined program price. And then you need to decide,

    and these are kind of scary numbers that nobody really tells you. So I want to make sure, you know, you need to decide how many people that you need to reach in order to convert into sales at your goal number of people to sell each month, right? So if you want a 15 or 20% sales conversion, and you want to have 10 new people join your program each month,

    then that means you need to reach that total number with your marketing, taking into consideration, converting it 15, 20, 30%, whatever you believe based on your conversion strategy that you can convert at. And so you have to crunch the numbers. You have to know your numbers, and once you know how many people you need to reach, then that leads us into your marketing strategy.

    Do you do paid ads? Do you do affiliate partnerships or are you doing everything in sweat equity, content creation and posting, and it’s really going to give you some clarity on how you’re going to hit that highly valuable, highly profitable marker. You have to look at your numbers. And so that’s answering the first part of what we’re talking about today on how to make money.

    Again, we’re talking about how to make money while still having fun. So the money part is basically you need to have an industry leading rock star signature program. That truly leads the way. And as a complete side plug, don’t forget, we have our, your signature offer masterclass that is available for you to take@anytimecruiseovertosweetlifeco.com. And you can learn more about how to be involved in the,

    your signature offer masterclass. And we go through the whole process with you in developing industry, leading signature programs and offers. Okay, now let’s talk about the second part of this. How to have fun. Now I know it’s silly question, right? Like I’m not an expert in you. You’re an expert in you, but I’m an expert in the business modeling standpoint.

    So let me just give you some tips on how to understand how to really have fun doing what you’re doing and it all starts with your business model. Do you remember in the beginning of this episode, when I’m like go grab the ultimate guide to business models and online offers that is going to give you all of the answers that you have been looking for on what’s going to make me happy,

    what I should launch. So your business model is how you work with clients and deliver your services. So examples are one-on-one coaching group coaching hybrid coaching live courses on demand courses, hybrid courses, memberships, or re occurring revenue programs, live virtual events, local events, retreats, masterminds, accelerator programs, incubator programs, licensing programs, certification programs, train the trainer programs,

    just straight business consulting. This also helps you how you want to deliver your services. Are you delivering services that are done with you done for you or consult you? And what I mean by that is how are you taking the content that you’re giving to your amazing clients? And are you giving it to them in such a way that you’re actually doing the work for them?

    Are they hiring you just to do it all and say, here you go, fix it for me. Is it a hybrid way between you helping them figure it out and doing a little bit of the work with them? Or is it strictly where you were showing up and telling them how to do it? And they have to go out and do it all on their own.

    And so the very first thing to determine how to have fun is that it all starts with your business model. And let me pull back the curtain some more and share why I know this. So I have run successful programs and profitable programs in every single one of these business models. And I’ll be honest. It affects my life as a mom. They affect my life.

    As you know, just leading my family and wanting to travel. Each business model is going to affect your life. So your choice on whichever one of these, you want to release as your signature leading profit making program. Again, you know, courses, coaching memberships, masterminds in your ability to create your blueprint. So your suite of offers and bringing it together is totally going to affect your life.

    So we want you to start at the end and inside that ultimate guide, I break down each one of these primary leading online coaching and consulting business models for you. But then what you’re going to read in there, as I tell you how it’s going to affect your life, how it affects your time, how it affects your cadence, how it affects your family,

    how it affects your travel and how it affects your bottom line and your profit. So you’re not only going to get a list of those offers that you can choose from. I tell you literally how it will affect your life and you can bank on that because I have done it. And I want to make sure that what you’re building you’re really going to love.

    So I want to save you years of building something that you hate, because somebody told you to, or because it looks sexy on an Instagram ad. So first go grab that guide. Secondly, determine your weekly cadence. Okay? So this is how you flow through your perfect week. What do you want to be doing? And I know this kind of sounds a little pie in the sky,

    but this is very serious work. You need to determine what do you want to be doing in your perfect weekly cadence when your business is where you really want it to be? Do you work out in the morning? Do you work out in the afternoon? Do you go for walks? Do you go ride your horse, you know, to go surfing,

    whatever it is, what is your family time look like? What is your time in personal development? Look like? Do you want to be reading a book or reading a book? Do you want to be helping other people? Do you want to be really active in philanthropy and giving back to your community? What does that perfect weekly cadence look like to you?

    And then also ask yourself, how do I want to be working with clients? How do I want to be connecting with my team? How do I want to be connecting with my colleagues and other business partners? The answer to this is going to give you super power, vision and clarity on what business model is going to equal that for you. How many days a week will you work?

    How many months, a year do you work? There are some business models that are so powerful. This is content licensing that literally, I only work one month, a year in my other consulting business because of the fact that we license out our courses and our content to others, the companies and companies line up literally the way for me to work one month,

    a year to approve releases of content. You can do that. You can grade that business model. If you only want to work one month. Great, let’s build that for you. And so I want you to know that that is available to you. And you know, really another question I think is really important that isn’t discussed so much is we talked about it again a few minutes ago,

    but are you comfortable only making money a couple of times a year? That can be pretty scary, you know, needing to have a six figure launch because that’s, what’s going to sustain you for the rest of the year. How does that really work for you? Does that really work for you? Is that the way that works best for your clients?

    If it does awesome. We have so many clients that love their live launch business models. I’m telling you personally, I hate them personally for me, but it doesn’t mean that my clients aren’t great at them and they love them for them. That’s what’s the power of business design is deciding what works best for you and reverse engineering it to make sure it’s making you money and really diving into those questions and getting really real with yourself about how you feel about those.

    And then the next question I want you to ask yourself is what actually makes you happy? Like, what do you love to do in your work? Do you love working with people? One-on-one do you love hosting zoom meetings where your whole community is coming together? Do you love delegating and empowering all this stuff to your team? And what do you love to do outside your work?

    What are your sports for hobbies? What hobbies did you used to have when you’re a kid that maybe you and you haven’t done? And you’re like, man, I really wish I could take up this thing again, because I was really great at it. We want to that into your business future so that you will actually be able to do that. So to be happy in your work,

    you need to design your work to make you happy to make money in your work. We need to design your offers to make you money. And that’s how we go about it. So it’s offer plus business model equals how to make money while having fun. And it’s a simple formula and it’s super surprising how many people don’t do it. And so I want to make sure that you have the power and the insight and the knowledge so that you can do it.

    You know, most people think, gosh, if I make money, I’m just going to be happy and that’s not oftentimes the case. So we want you to make a ton of money and do it in such a way that you’re going to be super-duper over the top happy. And it’s going to be no big deal for you to jump in the car and drive halfway across the country.

    After recording a podcast episode, after taking three weeks off work, just to go play with your kids or whatever it is that you want to do, I’m here to support you and give you the proven strategies to do that. The truth is honestly, when you’re happy in your life and your work, that’s when you make the most amount of money. And so to recap,

    we talked about how to make money and be happy. We broke it into two parts. We broke out, offer architecture as the primary part of this, your offer is going to be the driver. And then your business model is the part that makes you happy. The offer strategy, the value of your offer. That’s how we get you to the profit benchmarks that you want to be at.

    Your business model is how we design it within your life in a way that you’re super going to love everything that you’re doing and the ultimate guide to online offers and business models. Just go grab it. It’s totally free is going to save you years and years and years of time by seeing behind the scenes of how each one of these business models has affected our family.

    And I just lay it all out there for you, for you to consider how that could affect yours as well. You can grab that by going to Sweetlife co.com forward slash online business guide, or you can also get it by texting the word guide. So just one word guide to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. Again, text the word guide to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0.

    And of course we’ll have all this in the show notes for you as well. All right. Thank you so much for tuning in. I have a very eager college student waiting outside in the driveway with his car, packed, waiting for mom to pile in and take another road trip adventure. So with that, I will talk to you guys next week.

    Be awesome. And I can’t wait to hear how you guys are using your business model and what you’ve chosen to be best for you. If we aren’t connected on Instagram yet hit me up. I’m April beach life on Instagram, and I would love to know your ultimate business model in the one you are building For high profit. All right. You guys be awesome.

    Talk to you soon.

    Episode 231: Getting Over The Fear of Hiring – with April Beach and Theresa Loe

    Theresa Loe SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Join us live in Clubhouse and bring Theresa your questions! 
    June 16, 2021 12:00 ET
    Follow the SweetLife Entrepreneurs™ Club to get the notification and exclusive room access 

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs and who are ready to grow to the next level.

    Summary:

    You know you need help. You’ve been doing most of the work in your business and it’s time to move your valuable time to the CEO role. To do so, you need a team, or at least one person to begin your delegation process. But you haven’t moved to take action for a variety of reasons but they primarily all come down to mindset. And, you’re probably thinking one of these thoughts: 
     
    “I can’t afford to hire help.”
    “I’m uncertain of which role to hire first” 
    “I don’t have systems in place yet to delegate to someone else”
     
    If you’re thinking one of these things, you’re not alone. You should already know these are very common issues for many leaders… or we would not dedicate a whole show to discuss it. You’re in good company, but let’s get you into the right company with next level leaders who know how to manage their high-value time, delegate tasks to others, and give you the steps to find the right people to bring on board. 
     
    In this show, Theresa Loe, founder of streamlinedandscaled.com, talks you through proven solutions to overcome hiring hurdles so we can take your business from 6 to 7 figures. 

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Know the most important mind shift you must make – and by doing so, everything falls into place
    2. Know how to hire the right person, not just any person with a skills

    Resources Mentioned:

     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate Friends. Thanks for tuning. In this episode, you are listening to this sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast. As my friend, Alexa, so beautifully introduced in our intro for this show. I’m April beach,

    the host here on the sweet life podcast. And thank you so much for being listeners big announcement. I can’t believe I’ve been forgetting to tell you guys this for the last, actually couple of weeks on the show, I was just named one of the top 50 moms in podcasting. And I just want to say, thank you so much to all of you guys,

    because you are the ones that made that happen. So many of you voted so many of you voted for me and voted for this show. And I just wanted to say, thank you so much. I appreciate you guys so very much for being honored out of all the moms to be in the top 50 in podcasting, you know, this isn’t a moms podcast,

    but having somebody recognize that it is hard to be a mom and run the businesses that we do and produce a show, especially for so many years consistently. I just want to share that with you guys and share with you. It’s all because of you. And I just thank you so very much. So just had to take a moment to appreciate all of the listeners here on the show.

    This is episode number 231, as I said, and today’s guest is somebody who’s going to really help you get over the issues that may be in your way from scaling and growing your business to the next level. Today, we are talking about getting over your fear of hiring people. So first of all, let’s talk about why the heck this is a fear.

    What is the deal? What is the matter with us? Here’s the issue as an entrepreneur, we have amazing ideas in our mind. And I’m saying, we, because this is definitely me. You guys, I have struggled with management over the years. It’s not my strength. I have had to work very hard to learn, to become a better leader and manager and delegator.

    And so we have all these ideas in our head and we think it’s so much easier. It’s so much faster if we just do it ourselves, but I’m going to tell you that. And I learned this the hard way your business is not going to get to the next level until you know how to create systems delegate. And most importantly, find the right people find the right people.

    You know, you need help. You have probably been doing most of the work in your business, and it’s definitely time to move your value time. Your dollar, your time is high is worth higher dollar, and we need to move you to that CEO role and to do so. You need a team or at least one person to begin your delegation process.

    But if you haven’t moved yourself out of a mindset blockages to the place of taking action for a variety of different reasons and you know, that it’s time to do so then this particular episode is definitely one that you want to hang out and listen to. You might be saying things to yourself, like I can’t afford to hire help, or I’m uncertain of exactly who to hire and what role they should fill,

    or you might be thinking, wow, I don’t even know how to help them onboard. I don’t have any systems in place. This is not just a beginner, entrepreneurial problem friends. We have so many clients that we can’t scale you guys into higher level online services until your delegation is in place until it’s not going to be a bottleneck. When we bring more clients into your business with higher level amazing programs and offers,

    this is a problem that my multiple six figure clients face as well. It definitely something, as I said, that I have struggled with over the years and I’ve had to force myself to work through and you’ll hear a little bit of kind of some of my struggles and some of the things I do behind the scenes when we talk about this episode. So if you’re thinking about these things,

    you are not alone. That is why we are recording a podcast this week about it. So let me go ahead and introduce you to our guest expert today. Her name is Theresa LOE and Theresa is a leadership and business coach for overworked entrepreneurs. She helps them streamline their operations to build self-managed teams so they can finally get their time back in scale with ease Theresa guides,

    people through that sticky transition from wearing all the hats. Raise your hand if that’s where you are right now, to just wearing the most important, how to evolve the CEO in the visionary hat. Nobody else can wear that hat, but we can help you get some of the tasks off your plate with other perfect people. And Theresa specializes in cultivating small,

    but mighty teams for online course, creators, coaches and other creatives. She’s amazing. And we’re going to be diving into all of this today here on the show. In addition, as you know, now, Theresa is going to be live with us on Wednesday, June the 16th, taking your team building questions in clubhouse. So join us under our club for this podcast.

    It’s called sweet life entrepreneurs, of course, and join us at 12 o’clock Eastern time on June the 16th, 2021. If you’re listening to this show live this week, and we’re going to roll up our sleeves with you. And so what we’re talking about here on the show, then we take it on to clubhouse and we workshop it with you. That’s what we do here on the podcast to really make sure that you are getting implementation for the business strategies here on the show that you know,

    you can’t take to the bank. So without further ado, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode with Theresa Lowe.<inaudible> Hi everybody. And welcome to episode number 231. My friend Theresa LOE is with us today. And you guys are in for a huge tree, especially if you are to the point where, you know, you’re ready to grow, but you felt like you have this bottleneck.

    And the bottleneck is, is that, you know, you can’t do everything. You know, you need to hire help, but there are some fears around that and I can personally attest to these feelings. So I’m so excited that Theresa LOE is here today to help you streamline and scale your business by growing your team by overcoming these fears, Theresa, welcome to the show.

    Will you please share everybody your background and a bit about you and how this became your area of expertise? Absolutely. Well, first of all, thank you so much for having me. So what I do is I help people, entrepreneurs who are overworked, they’re stressed, they’re stretched to the limits. I help them streamline the back end of their business so that they can get their time back.

    But also I help them build self-managed teams. And it doesn’t matter if you are just starting out or you are multi-six multi seven multi-age you always want to have your team be self-managed so that you’re not doing all the managing and you can, instead of wearing all the hats, you’re just wearing the most important hat, which is the CEO hat. And so I work with people at different levels because the sooner you can start this the better.

    And the way I got into this was I was a co-executive TV producer for nine years for the top organic gardening show on PBS. And as the co-executive TV producer, it’s what we would call in the digital industry and integrator or a chief operational officer. So I was second in command and I had to run multiple episodes at the same time. So it was a very project management heavy,

    but at the same time, I had to have teams filming around the country and they all had to be completely self-managed. They had to understand what their jobs were. They had to be able to get all the episodes out the door, which is like little mini launches in our world of digital marketing. And so when I started my own business, six years ago,

    it took off really rapidly because I started getting a team right away. And as I started coaching other people in the industry, I realized that team was one of the things that was holding people back, though. We all start out with our laptop and a dream, and we start out doing all the things and wearing all the hats. Well, the sooner you can bring in a supportive team and not just anyone but a self-managed team,

    and you can have everything streamlined and clean on the backend that allows you to scale. So I help businesses scale with ease by streamlining and having self-managed team. Wow. And you’re right. I mean, I can imagine just the thought when you said that of all these little mini launches just gave me like a little like, oh my gosh, that sounds,

    that sounds terrible. To me, 96, We did 26 episodes a season. So it was A lot. Oh my goodness. So you’re constantly living in this mode of like getting this produced, making sure our systems are streamlined and that people are doing what they’re supposed to be doing at each phase along the way. And I can only imagine how many different moving parts that that would take.

    Yes. So you and your history, your experience, your expertise coming into online business totally makes sense. Why you can see things that most online entrepreneurs can’t in a way that it can make it completely easier. And I imagine really simplified compared to your project plans that you were managing and what you were doing. So one of the things that oftentimes we run into with new businesses is the fact that they either don’t know when it’s time to hire,

    or they think that it might not be time to hire, but they’re really dealing with some mindset issues around hiring. And we talked about this a little bit behind the scenes and how I personally struggled with this for a very long time. But talk to us about what are some of these mental blocks? What is the mindset of an entrepreneur who’s ready to scale?

    Absolutely. And before I even dive into that, sometimes like what you said, how do people know that they’re ready? So let me just address that. You know, that it’s time to get help when you are stretched too thin, you’re overworking, or you’re sacrificing yourself for the business. You’re sacrificing your time, your health, your marriage time with your family,

    your weekends, your evenings. We all have these ups and downs in our business where it might grow. And we have little moments of that. But when it goes on for long periods of time, that’s when you absolutely need to get more support and structure in your business because you didn’t start the business to be working 18 hour days. That was not your goal or your dream.

    And yet we can get stuck there because we don’t know how to fix this. And one of the things like you said, it’s a mindset issue. And I should also probably say right off the bat, that it doesn’t matter what level we’re going to be talking about, what the different things are that you can do in your business to get help. But it doesn’t matter if you’re just starting out,

    there are different ways to hire. So you can hire someone overseas. If you are really strapped on money, you can hire a virtual assistant that’s part time. It can be a working mom who maybe used to work in corporate and has incredible skills, but when her kids are in school or go back to school and aren’t, she’s no longer homeschooling, then she was going to be looking for something that she can do in those other hours.

    And so you can bring in someone part-time, but it can also mean when you are a multi-six multi seven multi-asset that you’re bringing in a full-time employee. So what we’re going to talk about here happens at all levels. So the first thing that happens with most people is they get stuck in a solo preneur mindset, and it doesn’t matter how much money you’re bringing in.

    You can get stuck thinking too small. And so what I mean by that is that they’ll say to themselves, when my business gets to the next level, then I will bring in the next help that I need in my business. And then my business will allow me to be a higher level CEO. And what I want you to do is flip the script on that.

    The truth is that you’re never going to feel ready to take it to the next level that doesn’t just magically happen when you wake up. So you have to start thinking differently. You have to step into your future self and start making strategic decisions. And so the truth is that when you start acting and making decisions as a CEO, then that means you would realize that you need to bring in help.

    And that is actually what gets your business to the next level. So rather than just waiting for the next level to happen and then bringing in help, you need to bring in help to get to the next level. Can you Say that again? Yeah. Say that again. This is really please, as you’re listening to this, you guys are, you know,

    hit, rewind on this or just hit pause Theresa. I want you to say that again in the reason why this hits home for me and I, I just appreciate it so much learning from you on the show as our listeners are learning right now is because I literally have on a whiteboard. I have my very own little whiteboard of what I’m eating each day and today’s intentions and kind of little notes to myself.

    But on that whiteboard, just like two weeks ago, I put on there for my things I need to do each day was millionaire mindset. And I realized this. So I have built a 7, 6, 7 figure business in the past. But this company that we’re working with right now, the Sweetlife company is on our way to seven figures consistently. And I realized that this was,

    I was not having that mindset. You guys, this is so important. And since I wrote this on the board, like Theresa is saying, and I’ll go and look at what I’m eating every day. And my goals, my workout plans, it’s all right there. That’s what I wrote. And I think that people think, oh, well, that’s just like a weird note thing,

    a weird mindset thing, but it has shifted my activity significantly in my business over the last couple of weeks. So can you say that again? So people hear that. Absolutely. So what we’re talking about here is the be, do have model. And that means that you need to be the CEO of your future and do activities that they would be doing in order to have what your goals are,

    your business that you want. Right? So people go, okay, well, how do I do that? Here’s a real, simple thing. Every single morning. When you’re looking at your list, I want you to ask yourself your, to do list. I’m talking about when you’re looking at your to-do list, I want you to ask yourself, what does my business need from me today?

    Who do I need to be today? And which activities on this long list are going to get me to the next level that I’m trying to get to, rather than working in those smaller activities, those things that you could actually hire out for it makes you realize that you’re spending a lot of time in the mundane and not in the 20% that moves your business forward.

    In fact, you’re so busy. You have like a 1% little sliver that you’re trying to fit. All those CEO activities in and the rest of your day is taken up with other things. So that’s why I started with this one. You want to be the CEO of your future. And so everything that you do needs to be aligned with that so that you can reach your goal.

    Yes, Yes, yes. And you should see my notes behind the scenes. You guys like a million million Teresa low notes already from this episode. And I think that, you know, people look to strategies, they look to benchmarks to accomplish. They look to be able to check off this list when in fact doing exactly, as you say is going to then reverse engineer what those activities are each day.

    And it’s just such a powerful thing. So I just wanted to pause there for a second. It’s a good one. Okay. Like this is not like, woo you guys. This is like, this is a set solid strategy. That is very important. And I can personally attest to it. So what’s next after we do that. So another belief that can hold people back,

    because we want to hit people from all different angles. Maybe that was it. Maybe they were waiting because they’re waiting for their business. A lot of times we’ll say, and this is probably the most common one. They’ll say I can’t afford to hire anyone. Right. It doesn’t matter what level you’re at. You might say, I can’t afford to hire the next person or a high level person.

    And so the analogy I like to give here is if I were to come to you April and I were to say, I’m going to open a hotel and I just want to tell you all about it. And you’re like, cool. Tell me all about the hotel. And I said, well, I am going to be the person who checks people in at the front desk.

    And then I’m going to help everyone carry their luggage up to their room. I’m going to be the maid. I’m going to do the cleaning. And then when they come back down, I’m going to be at the restaurant and I’m going to take their order. And I’m going to cook the food and deliver the food and then run back out to the front desk for the next person.

    You would think I was a nut. And you’d say, you can’t do all those things well, and you can’t grow. And yet that’s what we do in our businesses, because we started with just us. And we were doing all the things and we kept getting spread thinner and thinner and thinner. So when you’re saying, I can’t afford to hire a team,

    what you’re really saying is that you aren’t putting yourself first and you don’t want to grow. And what I want you to do is realize that there are different ways to hire at different levels. So if you are just starting out, you can hire someone part-time. If you already have a business, then you can hire someone who is virtual, but maybe works more hours.

    And if you’re at a higher level, you can bring in someone as an employee. But the truth is that you can always hire. It’s a matter of finding the right person for the right seat to do the right things so that you’re not wasting your time or your money. And we’re going to talk more about that as we go through the other ones.

    Great. Thank you for that. And that’s a great analogy. So after this is established, right, we’ve established that you absolutely cannot grow without help. And this is very important. And certainly there are, some of you are listening who want to be solopreneurs. And this episode probably is not for you when you are ready to grow this, isn’t it.

    These are important strategies. So what comes next, Theresa, after we have gotten over these mindset hurdles that we’ve discussed so far, Right? So then the another thing that can hold you back is that you’ll say, well, good. People are hard to find. So let’s talk about that piece right there. Because if you are holding yourself back, because you think you can’t like,

    okay, maybe I understand that I will never feel ready. Maybe I understand that I need to hire, but I don’t even know where to start in hiring. And what I want people to understand is that there are good people out there. The trick is that you have to hire the right person by looking at character over resume. So a lot of people teach how to go out and hire,

    and they’ll tell you to put a post out a job listing, and then you bring in the person and you’re just looking at their resume to see if they have experienced. And I actually teach hiring in a very different way. I want people to be really, really clear on the type of person that they want to bring in. And I’m talking about character,

    what type of person do they need to be? Because even if you only have a team of one other person besides you, you’re building something here. So you want to start doing that right out of the gate. And as you get bigger, you want everyone on your team to have a certain character level. So when I’m hiring, I’m looking at character because the truth is that if I can get someone who’s a go getter,

    a problem solver, they’re excited about my work. They’re excited about my mission. I can teach them anything. They don’t even have to have the experience on their resume. So when you are going through the hiring process, be looking for the type of person who can grow with you and can learn, even if they don’t have experience, if you just feel right about them,

    because they’re like pumped and excited, then you were hiring more to character than to resume. Hmm. That’s such a good point. And that is, that’s how I hire is with, with an established skillset. But one of the greatest things that I, if I can just share for those of you guys who are listening, one of the greatest things that I have,

    I decided to do about 10 years ago, when hiring was, I decided to hire people that wanted to see their future in my business as well, could see their own, what, anything they’d life they wanted to build the time they wanted to be working, the kind of work that they were fired up. And although it might not have been the actual activity that they wanted yet,

    what was really helpful and how we’ve grown. Our teams is listening to them, trying to figure out what they want to do. What are their big, huge moonshots? What are their dreams and how can they accomplish those dreams underneath our brand. And I think that that’s why we have had a team who’s worked with us for so long is because of that now definitely skill set as well.

    But then I will also pay to have the right people trained in this skill set. So I’ll pay to have the right people in my team learn a skillset that I want them to have, even if they were just totally clueless, because it’s more about the person Kelly Buckner who’s our director of operations is that she is like my dream COO. And I just don’t know where I’d be without her,

    but the things she’s doing, don’t always align with her biggest dream, but she knows her biggest dream is within the future of our company. And so just wanting to kind of add that in there, as it is an example, for those of you guys who are listening. Yeah. Having lifelong learners is one of our core values. So we do the same thing.

    I have had different members go through courses so that they could get up to speed and it’s a game changer and they feel even more committed to you because now you are helping them grow as a person. So we’re all about growth and stepping into a bigger you. And sometimes someone on my team will find a course and they’re like, I really think this would be helpful.

    I would love to take it. And I’m all for it. I will pay for them to take that class. Yeah. Yeah. I love that. And, and I think that what we’re talking about is the future of culture of small and micro sized businesses. And it really is true that so many people look for the skillset we’re in clubhouse rooms.

    You and I both are in clubhouse rooms all the time where people are talking about how do I hire and how do I do this? And how do I do that? And they’re getting great advice. Like, we’ll go to this and search for this skillset, but I love a warhead, the conversation we’re having here too, because you can have a person who’s really great at something,

    but doesn’t fit into the culture in the future. And, and I think the hardest thing, and I’ll just share kind of this fear since we’re talking about the fears of hiring, one of the hardest things that I had to deal with before I really started hiring for the right person, rather than the skillset was hiring somebody, training them, investing that time.

    And then they leave and being so fearful of so much time lost. And I know this isn’t just a, an April problem or a Teresa problem. These are problems that corporations deal with, you know, at this replacement costs in this replacement time. But I just, I remember feeling so fearful of going, gosh, I’m going to invest in this person and they’re just going to ditch me,

    You know? Yeah. And will, that can happen. And so one of the things that I work with people when I’m, I’m helping them streamline their business, there’s really three pillars we go through. And it’s the structure, the support piece, which is what we’re talking about here. But what you’re talking about is the scalability piece and that is having contingency plans.

    So that’s really having the structure behind the scenes so that if someone steps out, someone else can step in and having systems and processes. So that, that happens. But absolutely, we are also investing part of our heart when we bring someone in because we’re small businesses. So it’s a very small but mighty team. And there’s a lot of heart that goes into bringing someone in.

    But here’s the way I like to look at it. When someone is leaving for me, it’s happening for me rather than to me. And I want them to grow and go find a better fit because something that was not a good fit for them. And if it’s not a good fit for them, they’re not going to thrive. Just like if we take a flower and put it in the desert,

    that flower might be beautiful somewhere else, but in the desert, it’s going to wither and die. Right? And so if we have someone on our team who really is not aligned with staying with the team, it’s better that they go sooner rather than later. So sometimes we’ll have signs. And that’s some of the things that I coach people through. There’ll be little signs that we missed or along the way that we weren’t really paying attention to.

    But when someone is going to leave, I’ve had people leave to go on and start their own business. And I actually give them some of my coaching programs because I want them to do well because we’ve built a relationship. But if someone is stepping out, it’s actually happening for you because there’s going to be someone else that can step in that will take you even further than that person ever could.

    What a great set mind you have to read it. Yeah. Mindset is like everything. Yes. Thank you for sharing that. That is an amazing different viewpoint on that. Thank you for sharing that. I think that’s so incredibly powerful. So let’s get back to some of these fears that our listeners might be feeling. Some of these, almost like we could have named this like that,

    the four, the five lies you’re telling yourself, but you really need to be hiring by now. You know, what are some of the, what are some of these other thought processes that people need to overcome to really get into this let’s scale? This business let’s hire I’m ready for the next level. Absolutely. So one of the other roadblocks and this actually tends to happen with people who have,

    are already a little bit more further along is that they worry that they have to manage the team, or they are currently managing the team. And that’s why I specialize in self managed teams. If you are managing the team, as the CEO, something is wrong, you should never be managing the team. You want to be bringing in people who are in the right seats,

    doing the right things. And they are self-managed. So the way that you can tell if you are in the management, rather than the CEO role is if you are helicoptering them, right. We know we all know what a helicopter parent is. There’s also a helicopter CEO and it’s where you’re hovering. Like, are they doing it? Are they doing it?

    Are they doing it right? And some of that can be your systems that you have set up. Like maybe, maybe you don’t have touch points where you can kind of keep your finger on the pulse without being in the weeds. That’s something that I help people set up so that they don’t have to be in the weeds to know what’s going on. But sometimes it’s really a matter of learning to let go and let go in the right way.

    So what I want you to realize is that what we want to do, what we want to be stepping into is mentoring our team, not managing the team. This means having real clear expectations and results that we’re looking for. So they have a very clear lighthouse and we can have like, you know, 30, 60, 90 day check-ins and be able to say, okay,

    you know, we’ve got a little off track here, but as long as they know what lighthouse is, we shouldn’t have to helicopter them. They should be able to figure out how to get there. Does that make sense? Absolutely. Helicopter CEO. I’m definitely, I’m definitely writing that down. It’s so it absolutely makes sense. It was a great analogy.

    Yeah. And this is a random question. Just putting you on the spot here for our listeners. Is there a favorite team software for communication that you have that you like to recommend to your clients? Absolutely. So most of the industry uses a sauna and a sauna is great. I have used a sauna, but for project management, I really like monday.com.

    That’s actually my favorite. And the reason is because not everybody adapts well to a sauna and monday.com is much more visual. And I find for entrepreneurs, they’re very creative and they tend to have a lot of creative people on their teams and the team. If you have never used any project management software, and you currently have a team, it’s a much easier transition onto Monday than it is to a sauna.

    Now that said a sauna is great. I’m not saying a is bad. If you’re already using a sauna, don’t switch. If you love it. And it works for you. Great. But if you’ve never used project management software or you’re intimidated, or your team is Monday works really well. It also is very intuitive. And so it makes it easy for the team to,

    to adapt to that. If that makes sense. It does make sense. Thank you for sharing that. Our listeners always want to know everybody’s software stack of what we’re using. And I know a lot of our listeners use Trello air table is where we manage our, our podcast production. But back in the day, we used to use Smartsheet and Gantt charts and all these things that were just not user-friendly at all.

    And they were so detailed that we would send it to people and they would just be like deer in the headlights. And they’re just done. What is this? W w what is this? And so I absolutely loved Monday. We’ve had a guest recently who is talking about, is it like click up? I mean, whatever works for you guys. And I think that is the thing here,

    but I’d love, you’re an expert in this. And so I love hearing of what, what you recommend and what works for you. So thank you for sharing that. And any, yeah, go ahead. I was just Going to say what’s most important is that, is that you use it. So if you try something and it doesn’t work, try something else because everyone’s brains work differently.

    So it’s okay. If something else works for you, right. Perfect. Yes. The great advice. And then any final thoughts to, you know, this hesitation to hiring that you want to leave with our listeners, any like actionable steps. You’re saying, okay, listen, you’re listening to this episode because you know, you need to be hiring,

    but there’s a wall. There is a mindset shift that needs to happen, but there are actually things that you, as a leader are putting in your own way. And those are the things we talked about today. Like, I can’t afford to hire a team or what if they leave, or, you know, how do I actually go through the process delegation?

    And you shared some really important thoughts that people are already having. I know our listeners are hearing being like, oh yeah, that’s me. I’m thinking this in this process, what do they do now from this episode, from listening to the show, what are some actual actionable items right now where they can leave in that they can start fixing this problem today.

    Right? Well, if we circle all the way back to stepping into being a CEO and thinking like your future CEO self, what I want you to do is start doing a time audit. Now, when I say time, audit people’s eyes glaze over and they go, oh, that sounds so corporate. And I have to write down all the things I did all day,

    but here’s what I want you to realize. You may think, you know what you’re doing every day, but you’re probably doing some things you shouldn’t be doing, and you don’t even realize it. And you keep thinking, oh, I’ll just do it real quick myself. And it ends up taking an hour, or I can just whip this together. And you end up your whole day is totally shifted because you got down a rabbit hole in Canva or something.

    So what I want you to do is to do a time audit on yourself so that you can see, where am I currently spending my time and then put on your CEO hat and take a hard look at that. Are those the things that I should be doing? Which of these things do I know I just shouldn’t be doing, or I’m not very good at them?

    Which of these things could I hand off to a current team member or do I need to bring in a team member? So really doing a time audit should be your very first step. And then absolutely every single morning looking at that to do list, do I really have to do these things, which of these things are going to move the needle the most in my business,

    which of these things are the moneymakers, which of these things are driving me to my goals and make sure that you’re working on the right things, because we can very easily get busy, busy, busy doing the wrong things, and nothing can slow down your growth faster than doing that. Great. Teresa you’re you are so wise, thank you so much for your leadership in this.

    And you coach entrepreneurs who are in six figures, seven figures to eight figures, and you have a couple of different programs. So if you guys are listening here, you know, this isn’t a podcast where we sell you anything. We don’t even accept advertisers on this show. The deal is, is we want you to have the next steps to take action.

    So Theresa, can you tell people how they can connect with you and based on where they are, what phase they’re in, what do you have available to get them to that next level with their teams? Absolutely. So where people can connect with me is streamlined and scaled.com, all one word. And on the website, I have information, lots of free resources.

    What I have in the way of programs is if you are just hiring your very first team member, or if you have just hired poorly and you need help hiring the next team member, I have a program called team up like a boss. It’s a very low, very inexpensive program that has all my templates and processes my whole methodology for hiring to character first.

    Okay. Then the second program that I have is a group coaching program, multi multi figure, and multi seven. And that’s where we streamlined the backend of your business and get your team to be self-managed and make your set you up to be scalable so that you can scale with ease and have your time back. And that is streamlined and scaled. And then I do consulting for multi eight figure businesses who already have major teams and headaches going on,

    and they need someone to come in and check out where are the issues? And I do that as well. Theresa, thank you so much. So based on where you guys are, there is a program, there is a solution start like Theresa said with going through your activities today, really focusing on the things that only you, and you can only,

    you can do, maybe like me write on your whiteboard or a sticky note or on your mirror and lipstick or whatever it is that you need to be honing in on the millionaire activities in your business. And that is, it starts, it sounds very basic, but this is truly, I can personally attest to this. This is truly where it all starts rolling from there.

    And we do have a very special tree for you guys, as you know, that we promote and share in network with you and help you link arms with you and coach you in clubhouse now. So if you’re an active subscriber to this show, that means it drops on Monday. This particular episode is dropping on Monday, June 14th and Theresa and I are going to be live answering your questions workshopping with you,

    taking your specific team, building questions, helping you strategize through the struggles or your concerns or your fears or your issues of growing your team on Wednesday, June 16th at 12 o’clock Eastern time. It’s totally free for you to be in there. If you’re really ready to take your business to the next level, it starts by taking action. And that starts by joining us at 12 o’clock on June 16th in our clubhouse room about this topic and to find the clubhouse room,

    you can very simply follow our club, join our club, even all you Android users now, by going to sweet life, community.com, again, that Sweetlife community.com. You can talk to Teresa, she’s there for you, and we’re, we’re all here to support you and all of the show notes of course, to reach Teresa beyond. What we talked about here will be in the show notes for this episode.

    This is episode number 231. Thank you so much Theresa for your time and your wisdom and your expertise and pouring into us on today’s show. We really appreciate You. Thank you so much for having me. It was fun. It was fun. Thanks.

    Episode 228: Unlocking Your Potential To Achieve Your Goals and Dreams – with April Beach and Ashlye V. Wilkerson

    Ashlye V. Wilkerson SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Join Ashlye live in our weekly SweetLife Podcast Clubhouse room on Wednesday, May 26th 12:00 ET

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for women who know they are called to lead and need a plan to accomplish their goals.

    Summary:

    Goal setting is only as good as the plan you have to achieve them, your personal drive, and self-ownership of your goals to assure they come true. When it comes to building your future, you are the driver of that car and sometimes life and business get off track. In all cases, to get where you really want to go, you need a map that’s customized to your personal destination. On this week’s show Ashlye V. Wilkerson, empowerment and leadership coach for women, shares her Phenomenal Women Leading Pink Print Process™: 4 proven steps to get from where you are to where you want to be.

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Have framework of Ashlye’s Pink Print™ Process and know how to apply it to your life
    2. Have immediate steps you can do today to make positive change in your future
    3. Get tips on ways other entrepreneurs measure their goals to create your very own success measurement system

    Resources Mentioned:

     
     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

     

    You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate Welcome to episode number 228 here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. I’m April beach host and founder of the Sweetlife company, where we give you proven tools and strategies to design, launch, and scale your business online for 26 years collectively with our business and four years here on the podcast.

     

    Thank you so much for joining us everything that we’re going to talk about. All of the resources, if you’re a listener, you know that you get a lot of gold from this show. This show is known for delivering business trainings and strategies that you can take to the bank, but business coaches charge thousands for you. Get them all here, free on the show.

     

    So because of that, I want to make sure you know where to find the recap and the links and the resources mentioned on today’s episode, you can cruise over to sweet life co.com simply click on podcast. And this is number 228 today on the show. This episode is for entrepreneurs in the first three phases of my sweet life business system of the start to scale up online business system.

     

    What does that mean? If you haven’t yet? We have a very short self-assessment that you can go take very simply by going to Sweetlife co.com forward slash quiz. And it will tell you exactly what phase of business growth you’re in and based on the base of business growth you’re in, there are certain things you should be focusing on this particular show falls into an appropriate tool for you to be focusing on if you were in phases one through three of that business system.

     

    So that’s where you can access it. Make sure you’ve done that all the resources are of course, proven, trusted, and they are available to you completely free again@sweetlifeco.com forward slash quiz. So today on the show, this is what you can expect. We are talking about unlocking your potential in achieving your goals and dreams with the one and only Ashley Wilkerson. I can’t wait for you to meet this powerhouse woman.

     

    She truly is dedicating her time and she’s dedicated her life to teach and elevate other professionals. And so she is such a gem and a treasure, and you are going to walk away with tangible tools. You’re even going to get access and understand her proven method to help women walk into empowerment and unlock their potential to achieve their dreams. She actually gives that to you here on the show,

     

    and we dive in a little bit deeper to help you implement that process. So there’s a lot of great things coming to you today. So let me give you a little bit of an introduction. Ashley has received distinguished honors, such as being named the who’s, who among professional women, the state 2040 Columbia business, monthly best and brightest 35 under 35 national council of Negro women living a legacy award,

     

    the ramp foundation education trailblazer Midlands chapter, the American business women’s association business associate of the year, Brooklyn Baptist church, millennial magic award, South Carolina, black pages, 2040 Columbia metropolitan magazine, top 10 Columbia young professionals, alpha Kappa alpha sorority incorporated. South Atlantic region married the vote in outstanding graduate member incorporated cluster seven leadership award United way of Midlands live United cheeky award and Columbia regional business report,

     

    2020 phenom. Wow, she’s amazing. Let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show<inaudible> Hey, you guys welcome back to the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. I am so excited to be joined here by my new friend, Ashley Wilkerson. And yes, we met on clubhouse actually is an absolute rockstar. As a matter of fact, she’s one of these people that,

     

    you know, those people like you’re in a room and that’s the person walks in the room and everybody just gets happier because they’re there the whole atmosphere and the room is just like, Ashley’s here. Well, that’s what it’s like on clubhouse. You’re watching the video. You’re going to see this, you know, behind the scenes in this episode. And I’m so excited to have her on the show.

     

    Ashley, welcome to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast. Tell everybody about you, what you do and your superpower. Thank you so much for having me. It’s such a pleasure, thankful for the opportunity. Love you April beach. And thank you clubhouse for club because I’ve had the opportunity to meet some phenomenal women such as yourself. So I greatly appreciate the here with the sleep life.

     

    So I am a health and thought leader of the phenomenal women leading a community. It is a women empowerment community where we strive to help women become better versions of themselves, unlock their full potential and achieve the goals and dreams that they have for themselves and their lives personally and professionally. So it is an honor to serve as a coach, to the ladies in my community,

     

    as well as a mentor and a friend, everyone in the community does not necessarily need coaching itself. They may be a part of the community for the support for the empowerment for the connections network with others is so there are different reasons why people join the community, but they do have the option to utilize the coaching services if they need to as well. And you know,

     

    I know it’s such a fantastic resource because on clubhouse people actually come in the rooms that you’re hosting and talk about, oh yeah, I’m in your community. And I love it there. And I mean, there, there’s nothing more powerful as a coach than having other people who you didn’t even ask to be there, show up and be like, oh my gosh,

     

    I love Ashley’s stuff. I love being part of this. So kudos to you for truly designing an engineering it place that is so real and safe for women to grow. So it’s amazing. The stories that I’ve heard people say about this community, and we’re going to be making sure you guys know how to tap into Ashley here. So let’s go ahead and talk about what business training,

     

    you know, this, this show is known for business trainings and strategies that other coaches charge thousands for. And so our listeners I know, are fully excited to come and show up here and be like, oh my gosh, what is Ashley going to teach today? And so today you and your area of expertise, you are going to guide us through your framework.

     

    And let me set you guys up for this framework because yes, I, I get to get a little peak to it before Ashley walks us through it today. But you guys listeners, you guys, you know how a lot of those coaches out there are saying, Hey, listen, you know, really live your dream life or walk into who you are.

     

    And there’s a lot of motivation. There’s a lot of amazing inspiration out there, but there is a gap between where we want to be and actually how to get there. Well, what is so special about Ashley is she has a method and she has a framework to actually guide you to that process. And you’re going to get a sneak peek of that framework here today.

     

    Actually, can you tell us just a little bit about how long you have been working with people and how you really got into this space of, of guiding women to empowerment and achieving their goals and dreams? Absolutely. So my background is actually in early childhood education and psychology child psychology. And so I’m a former kindergarten, first grade teacher and that’s how I entered into the space of education in the field of education.

     

    But then as my career evolved, I became a teacher trainer. My first year teaching the school district hired me to lead a series of professional development sessions, teaching other teachers how to best teach reading. And a lot of the teachers were senior level teachers, meaning they had over 10, 15 years of experience and I was a first-year teacher leading and conducting those sessions.

     

    And so in that moment, that’s when I developed a love, not only for children, but a love for adult learners as well and the entire continuum of education. And so that is really the core part of everything that I do. I believe that education is my true framework. That’s my pillar, that’s my foundation. And I bring that into everything that I do even as I facilitate and moderate sessions on clubhouse education is a part of my moderating style on clubhouse.

     

    So that’s where I started with bringing adult learners into the fold of what I do. And from there, I ended up transitioning into higher ed. And so from teaching those professional development workshops, hosting conferences, leading seminars, developing curriculum, I then transitioned into the higher ed space. And I became a adjunct professor, a professor, a sitting on a university board of trustees and being really ingrained in higher education and the adult learning process.

     

    And so transitioning into that, I initially taught in the college of education, but then I was approached by our local women’s college. And they asked me to do something that no one ever asked me prior to them, which was, Hey, can you develop a course for our women in leadership studies? Hmm. Interesting. You want me to develop that course?

     

    Because my background is in education. So the courses that I usually develop are pertaining to education it’s early childhood and elementary education and they say, yes, well, your background is education, but you’re elected to a university. It’s a state level board. You’re the youngest, you’re the only woman of color. You lead leadership initiatives in the area you’ve completed different leadership preparation programs.

     

    You would be ideal to lead the charge for developing this course and you’ll serve as the inaugural professor. And so I said, okay, I’d be happy to do that. But know that if I do that, I need the autonomy to develop the course as I see fit. And they said, sure, that’s totally fine. So I said, okay.

     

    So I developed the course and I included an educational component. My husband always says that learning happens in a conversation. That’s what I sought to do in that course. So in that course, I didn’t structure it as me being the instructional authority for 14 weeks, I actually developed the course to include a panel discussion 10 of the 14 weeks. And what we did was I focused each week on a different topic.

     

    And I feature women leading the charge in that topic area, in that area of expertise. And so one week it was women in religion. Another week, it was women in medicine. Another week, it was women in politics with another week. It was women in media. And so for 10 weeks I had women from all over the state of South Carolina,

     

    come in, we had CEOs, we had senators, we had mayors, we had everyone doctors, attorneys, everyone from all backgrounds come in and they share their trajectory. They share their journeys, they share their teachable moments. They share their backgrounds. And that is where the true learning takes place. When we can glean from the insight of others, where we can learn from their experiences where we can ask them it real time questions that we have,

     

    that’s how we then answer and unlock our full potential. That’s how we then develop ways that we want to improve, enhance what we do, what we offer, who we are or identify who we’re trying to be. So that’s how I entered into the space, but the course was for two semesters, it lasted for one year. And then that department was downsized in that course was not offered again after that.

     

    And I became a mother of two during that second semester. And so I transitioned my schedule and I transitioned my life. And when I did that, the ladies missed the community because I actually opened up the courses. I opened up the sessions of the course for people in the community who weren’t students of my class. I made it open to the public and free admission.

     

    So we had women coming in from all over to sit in and listen to these conversations. It’s a really grow and learn with the attendees and the participants and the feature speakers. And so I did that and they did not want the community to end. And so, as a result of them not wanting the community to EDD four years ago, it didn’t transition over into a Facebook community,

     

    a small intimate Facebook community, a few hundred people. And then from there, it evolved into mentoring sessions and webinars offerings and our conference, our women empowerment conference. And so it just kept evolving and evolving based on the needs of the members of the community. And it grew even more so as a result of COVID and clubhouse, I say the two CS COVID club app.

     

    And so I grew as a result of those two days, and now we have a platform on clubhouse. We have a platform on Facebook, we have touchpoints on other social media processes. And then we also have a targeted group on mighty networks through our mentoring circle. So it’s really evolved over the past four years. It’s evolved significantly. So over the past year,

     

    as a result of COVID in clubhouse and yeah, that’s how we’ve started. Okay. So many this could go in a million directions from there. I’m going to, I’m going to hold to the promise of stain so that you can teach everybody your, your method here. A couple of things about this for our listeners. I think it’s really important for you guys to pick up on,

     

    and I want to just highlight this. And what Ashley was saying is that you see the evolution of the process of business development. So often it is tempting to think that you want to start at the very end that you want to launch this thing. And it’s just going to be what it is. As a matter of fact, I had a client this morning that was struggling to move forward because she wanted it to be perfect.

     

    She wanted it to be at the end, but it wasn’t an evolution of the business. And Ashley’s story is a perfect example, how your ideas and your intellectual property evolves and grows. And so this is just such a great example of such a powerful story. And so want our listeners to take that away. We could have just end the episode right there and just say,

     

    see what Ashley did. It’s it’s so cool. So I, I just appreciate you sharing that so much. It’s just a lot of wisdom and business growth and development there. So as we’re sitting here right now, we did meet on clubhouse. I actually remember now, I think we’re in one of John Lee’s rooms and you were asking a question about mighty networks,

     

    which is a whole nother conversation that we can have. And I think that was the first time that I ever saw you. And I love how you have curated a bunch of different places for conversations to happen. So smart, the way you’ve done that in here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, we’re extending the conversation too, as well with your method. This is an very important topic because of the fact that this is what every woman really wants,

     

    but yet again, they lack the framework to get to this injury result. There is an idea there is this picture painted and there’s a feeling inside women of, of what they want to be and who they know they’re called to be. But there’s usually these barriers to get there in this process. So start guiding us through your process. First of all,

     

    what is your process called so that everybody knows the phenomenal pink print? Yes. Okay. It is absolutely amazing. So this pink Framp process is Ashley’s and you ladies can bank on it. I will tell you, so, you know, kicking this off, you said the very first step in this process is really helping women to identify their goals. Can you walk us through the first step in this process?

     

    Yep. So oftentimes, and I work with women on all ends of the spectrum. I work with a women who are transitioning out of college and they don’t know exactly what they want to do to begin their adult lives in their careers. I work with women who moms and significant others, and they spent a lot of time pouring into their children and their family so much so that they feel they’ve lost themselves,

     

    or don’t quite know what they want to do next in their lives for themselves. And then I work with women who have had amazingly successful careers. They’ve achieved all the goals, they’ve done all the things, and they’re still stuck with what’s next, right? And so those are three different age points, but it’s really the same pain point that they’re experiencing.

     

    Who am I, what do I want to do? Who do I want to become important aspect, an important element of our journey. And as women, we experience that element several times through, out our lifespan, our lifetime, our journey. And so really, really focusing in on what goals do we have and what do we want to do next is so important.

     

    And you have to really map out what those goals are. And those goals are not just for your professional side, it’s for your personal side too. So what are your personal goals? What are your professional goals? Where do you see yourself in the next year, two years, three years, 10 years, 15 years. Where do you want to be?

     

    What are the goals you want to achieve during that time period? Where do you want to go? That is so critical. And that’s the first step of the pink print is identifying. What are those goals? I have a question for you. Do you find that when women come to this place and they want to identify their goals, do they ever feel,

     

    I guess guilt is the word I’m thinking of? Do they ever feel guilty or shy or embarrassed? Because sometimes I know the women have huge goals. Like I want to be a TEDx speaker, or I want to do these really big things. And are women sometimes afraid of actually sharing how big they really want to be, because they feel bad about that.

     

    Is that something that you see very often? So I see a couple of things. I see the confidence. Isn’t always there to work towards or to go towards those things. And so they’re not confident in who they are, their abilities, their value. They don’t feel worthy of attaining certain things at high levels. They feel embarrassed sharing. They get caught into the comparison trap of,

     

    I don’t have what this person has. I haven’t done what this person’s done. I haven’t attained with this person hesitate. So I must not be able to get those things. And so they get sucked into that comparison trap that happens oftentimes. And then ultimately, sometimes the issue really is being able to name exactly what it is that you want for your life,

     

    what that desire is, and then be able to walk towards that safe. And that’s why the pink print is so important because it helps you to name it. It’s to identify. What’s a part of it. What are the components of it what’s required to achieve it. And then it takes you through that roadmap of identifying strategies for doing that thing in achieving that thing.

     

    Wow, it’s so powerful. Absolutely. And I can imagine that that is you have a great deal of experience in all these different situations, all these different reasons why women come to the table with a big heart’s desire, but yet all the excuses are the reasons why that they maybe shouldn’t or don’t deserve to achieve or do those things. So again, why your pink print is so powerful.

     

    So after somebody goes through this process of really identifying what those goals are, what’s the next step? What do they do? So then the next thing I have them do is to get focused, gain clarity, because it’s one thing to have all of these goals. But if you are actively trying to accomplish all of these goals, but they don’t contribute to each other,

     

    or they don’t compliment each other in any way, then you’re going to find yourself And Running all over the place. Right? And so you have to gain clarity and you have to get focused in, in order to do that. I walk them through prioritizing their goals. All right? So all of these are goals. Ours. I have a lot of goals,

     

    but let’s put these goals into priority. And that priority is up to how you see fit, the priority that you set for your goals. So it could be a time priority. It could be a finance priority. It could be whatever it is, whatever way you define that, how already system it’s neither right or wrong, it’s yours. So you identify how you’re going to define that.

     

    And then you prioritize it that way. Once you do that, once you prioritize it, then you go through and you get focused and you gain clarity on these are my goals. This is how I prioritize it. This is my roadmap. Because now that you have this, guess what the books you read are going to be determined by this rooms you attend on clubhouse are going to be determined by this.

     

    The conversations you participate in are going to be determined by this, the things you watch and listen to, they’re going to be determined, this, the actions that you take, they’re going to be determined by this. And that’s what clarity and gaining focus for you. Woo that’s Right. That’s so great. So powerful. So powerful. I mean, just,

     

    I had somebody called the other day a shiny squirrel. So it’s this, it’s this shiny object and squirrel absolute fix. And I think also when women can, I don’t know, everybody relates and sees things the way I do, but I know a lot of us are visual and we need to see things. And when we actually see that pink print,

     

    we can actually see it there. And there’s just so much power in, in having something come to life in this very clear action plan. Okay. So somebody has gone through this process, they’ve gone through the process. They have this clarity, they have their roadmap that you’ve guided them through. They are seeing things the way they have never seen it before.

     

    Almost a simplified way. A very, like all the noises calmed down. They’re hyper-focused, their goals are crystallized what now? So this is the step where we actually develop the pink print itself. One of the words that I use in, within my framework is called smart goals. Okay. And so for smart goals, you’re breaking down the acronym, smart.

     

    You are making sure you have all of the components that are a part of that goal. So you have the specifics, you write specific details, information needed for that goal. All right. And then the M is for measurement. How do you measure if you’ve achieved that goal? How do you measure your progress? If you are on track towards completion of that goal,

     

    what’s the measurement that you’re going to use? The a is for achievable. Is this goal achievable for you with the time, with your effort, with your skillset? Can you achieve it? The next letter R is for realistic. All right. Is this something that’s realistic for you to do? Is it realistic within a time frame? Is it realistic within your skill set?

     

    Is it realistic based on the measurement? Is it realistic based on the specifics of the details you’ve identified. And then the T is for time, you set a time for when you want to start this goal and you set an anticipated time for when you would like for this goal to be complete so time. So I use smart goals, which is a framework within my framework of developing your peat print.

     

    And once you’ve already identified those goals, you’ve gained clarity. You’ve prioritize those goals. You’ve made sure that those goals are smart goals. Now it’s about developing your strategy within your pink print. So what are your strategies for achieving each one of these smart goals? What are those action items that you need to complete for each smart goal to be achieved? And that’s the pink print that is genius.

     

    That is absolute genius. As someone who teaches people, how to develop frameworks, this is why people in your programs are so successful is because you have taken the time to truly create a transformational program for them using these frameworks and frameworks within frameworks. And I have a lot of listeners that are laughing. Cause we talk about frameworks within frameworks and methods within frameworks here on this show all the time.

     

    And sometimes they get our listeners are like really confused about that. Cause they’re trying to do it. What’s the difference? What comes first, a method or framework? Well, this is a perfect example of how Ashley has brought this to life in her transformational program. So great, amazing explanation and job. So I have a question for you also, because this is constantly a topic you’re on the show.

     

    Totally random question. How do you find people tend to measure their own results? What are some examples of the way people? Obviously the goal is different. So that’s going to dictate the measurement, but just generally speaking, if some of our listeners are like, gosh, you know, I really, I really want to start measuring my results. What are some examples of the ways people can measure their own results as you’ve seen your students do in your programs.

     

    And so some of this is a probing thing and I have to probe out of them, what I really want, what I need to know about what they want to achieve. And so for instance, one of my clients, they knew that they, they wanted to sell their new book project, right? And some question for her was how many units do you want to sell?

     

    And I said, Hmm, let me think about it. And I said, well, you need to identify, you need to know how many units you’re trying to sell. Because knowing how many units you trying to sell will help guide you when you are utilizing your strategies. And you are really targeting in on your book promotion, you’ll know exactly how many people you want to target.

     

    How many groups you need to speak to. If you’re on track for selling the number of books that you’re trying to sell. And then I challenged her to take it a step further. Now that you know how many books you want to sell. I want you to break that down into three categories that you offer. How many paper book, back books,

     

    how many hardback books, how many Kindle versions? No, what you are striving to do, and then identify the measurement. So if a business owner says, I want to increase my revenue. By how much, if a business owner says, I want to sell more products, how many units, if someone says, I want to lose weight, how many pounds,

     

    if I want to save money, how much do you want to say? If I want to eliminate debt, how much debt do you need to eliminate? Knowing what that number in that measurement is helps you to then target in, right? If you’re trying to make an additional $20,000 a month and you have services and products that are 1000, 5,000, 10,000 a year,

     

    trying to make an additional $20,000 a month. Okay? It’s different to say, I’m trying to make an additional $20,000 a month versus saying, I’m trying to close two, $10,000 clients, right? Close $4 clients to close $21,000 clients. Great example. We took our goal from I’m trying to make more money a month. I’m trying to make an additional $20,000 a month.

     

    I’m trying to close $21,000 clients too. I’m trying to close five of four or $5,000 clients too. I’m trying to close to $10,000 clients. Yes. Yeah. A hundred percent. What a great example of that. What Ashley just shared. So bring it down, down, down, down, ask yourself more specifically, more specifically, more specifically such a great example.

     

    Okay. So your students, they’ve gone through this point. They have their pink print, by the way, such a cool name of your signature framework. I love it. And they have, they have their phenomenal women leading pink print. Yes. What happens next? And I already know what you’re going to say. And obviously our listeners are probably like,

     

    okay, well then they need to do it. But like, let’s actually talk about what this really looks like in real life. What’s what’s next. So all of my clients will tell you that I’d say three things to them. Number one, take action. Number two. Don’t let me work harder on your goals than you’re working on your own goals.

     

    And number three, I will fire my clients. Meaning I will fire you. If you’re not taking action, I will fire you. If I don’t see you committed to your process, I will fire you. If you’re not making progress, I will fire you. If you’re not doing your homework, which are whatever the action items are. I will fire you.

     

    If you’re not honoring your commitment in yourself and your investment in yourself a year time needed support into yourself, into things that you want to achieve. Make absolutely that you’re taking action that you’re working hard on your goals is that you’re honoring the commitment with yourself. Amen. That is so important. And I love that you fire your clients. I think that is such an important thing to do.

     

    It’s almost like you’re, there you go. I’m going to fire you because something needs to change here. And I, and I, and what was your second thing? Don’t let me work harder on your goals than you. We’re going to, we’re going to get that out. That’s going to be an Ashley Wilkerson quote that goes out how good This podcast episode.

     

    All right. So my team, as you’re listening to this, pull that quote out of that is like the winner. It’s just amazing. And there’s one other point you said, you know, as we’re wrapping this up in the beginning is that you said to me before, behind the scenes, before we started recording and I wrote it down, cause I was like,

     

    it’s just so important. Is it? You said, we, we bring all of what we are to what we do. We buy all of who we are to everything we do to everything we do that is also so important because I think that especially those of our listeners that are transferring from corporate and really getting into entrepreneurship or those people who have been entrepreneurs for a great deal of time,

     

    which is a lot of our most registers. Now in that scale phase of their business, there is this division where people think, okay, well this is life and this is business, but I love your philosophy. It’s a philosophy that my husband and I abide to as well and our family. It really is. It’s everything who you are, is brought into this.

     

    And I love how you teach creating this cohesive harmony between everything we were designed to do for the people that we were called to serve. And so I, I really love everything that you teach Ashley, and I love you being here on the show. I appreciate it. Thoroughly enjoyed myself. You just a gem. I absolutely love it. So let’s talk about how you guys can connect with Ashley.

     

    So as you know, now we have our regular weekly Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast room on clubhouse happening every single Wednesday at 12 o’clock Eastern time where you guys get to jump in and jam with our guests. Talk about the topic of this week. So this week, especially if you’re alive subscriber to this show on all of our podcasts listening channels, which is everyone,

     

    as you guys know, even Pandora and apple music, now we’re everywhere as you’re listening, make sure you join us on Wednesday and you get to connect with Ashley directly as an extension of this podcast episode. So she is going to be there like she always is on clubhouse. Totally. They’re pouring into you and taking your questions and workshopping with you beyond what we’re talking about here on the episode of this show.

     

    And besides that, okay, so those of you guys are like, oh my gosh, Ashley is exactly what I need. I’m ready to move. I want my pink print right now. Ashley, how can people move forward and get in line as far as joining your program or working with you privately? Absolutely. So they have a few ways they can do it.

     

    They can connect with me personally. It’s a S H L Y E V on all social media platforms. You can connect with me at Ashley B on all social media platforms. They can also go to my link tree slash Ashley B. And when they go to my link tree slash Ashley B, they will be able to see, they’ll see the community group that’s on Facebook,

     

    the free community groups. They’ll also see the option to get registered. So tin our second annual moving and leading phenomenally conference taking place on October 23rd, they will see details for coaching with me. They can join the group, mentoring, coaching circle community, or they can register to sign up for a free consultation with me for one-on-one coaching services. So either way,

     

    whether they are in the free community, whether they are joining us on clubhouse. They’ll also see my, all of my social media connections on my late tree, so they can email me directly. They can tap into any and all of my social media pages right there on that page. Everything is right there, easy peasy for them to access me and access the phenomenal women leading.

     

    Awesome. Thank you so much for being a guest on the show. I just have to send, or it’s my pleasure. Absolutely. For everything you’re doing and thank you, clubhouse for our listeners already been on there yet. So they’re Android listeners. So I promise you guys, you guys are getting on there soon in the meantime, connect with us on Instagram here.

     

    And of course this is episode number 228 of these two great live entrepreneur podcasts. So we will make sure that all of the show notes are available for you@sweetlifeco.com click on the podcast and you guys know the drill episode two 28. We’ll have all the goods. All right, thanks again, Ashley. Appreciate you.

    Episode 225: How To Structure Your Suite Of Online Offers – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Download the Ultimate Guide To Online Business Models

    Who This Episode is Great For:

     

    Summary:

    Online services, courses, memberships and coaching programs are a great way to scale your business. However, how you structure your suite of offers can make or break your business. In this week’s show April Beach shares her Strategic Business Design Method™ and how you can design your company for long term lifestyle and profit goals now, and why launching any program outside this method is a risk. 

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Get the high level steps of April’s Strategic Business Design Method™
    2. Know where to start when considering your offers
    3. Have clarity on what you should be working on right now

    Resources Mentioned:

     
     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

     

    You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate guys, and welcome to So number 225 here on the sweet life entrepreneur podcast. We’re going to go ahead and dive right in today. And we were talking about how to structure your suite of offers.

     

    I know this is a common question. I’m literally in clubhouse rooms every single week, talking about this, because there’s so many things that you could do that you could launch in your business to scale, but who knows is that the right thing for you? Is that what we really need for you in your company? And that’s is that really what’s going to equal the profit plan that you want.

     

    So in this week show, I’m actually breaking down a process that I take entrepreneurs through called strategic business design. And so we’re going to dive into all things, how to structure your suite of offers to give you the results that you want. So let’s do a little bit of housekeeping first, and then we’ll go ahead and get started. This episode is for established entrepreneurs.

     

    So this is for those of you guys who are in phase three of my suite life business launch system. It’s also called the start to scale up system. Basically it is a roadmap of five different steps and you know, which phase of business that you’re in, it’s really important. You know, where you are. So you know what you should be working on,

     

    so you can scale your business faster. And so if you’re in phase three, this episode is for you. So keep tuning in here and we’re going to go ahead and dive in if you aren’t really sure what phase of business you’re in simply go to Sweetlife code.com forward slash quiz, and you can take the quiz there and get your exact download customized to where you are in business right now.

     

    So this is what we’re talking about on today’s show. We’re talking about the fact that online services courses, masterminds, coaching programs are all a great way to scale your business. However, how you structure your suite of offers can make or break your business, your lifestyle and your profit plan. So on this show, I am breaking down my strategic business design method,

     

    and I’m giving it to you high level, because frankly, it’s so simple. You can run with it high level right now. And I want you to leave this show with exactly what to do to get started to design your suite of offers. At the end of this show, you are going to know exactly the high-level steps of what that method is.

     

    You are going to know where you can start right now in considering your suite of offers. And you’re going to have clarity of what you are going for in the future and how that actually equals the lifestyle results that you want. So if that’s what you’re here for this show is for you. Let’s go ahead and get started. Okay. Welcome. Thanks so much for hanging out with me today.

     

    This is episode number 225 here on the sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast and all the show notes and everything that we’re going to talk about on today’s show can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com, simply click on the podcast. And this is episode number two 25. And today we’re talking about how to structure your suite of offers. So I’m going to give you three high-level steps and within each step,

     

    we’re going to break them down. So if you have a piece of paper and a pen, take notes, if you’re on the go join me in clubhouse live this week, because I’m going to be taking your specific offer design questions on Wednesdays at noon Eastern time. And if you’re not yet, you can follow me on clubhouse at April beach. You’ll get notification of that room.

     

    And I would love to include you and workshop this with you. So let’s go ahead and dive in. First of all, let’s talk about why this is important. I coach entrepreneurs obviously all the time. That’s what I do. And what we’re seeing is a huge trend of companies coming to us, new and established companies coming to us who have launched a course or launched a membership,

     

    launched a grouping of offers because everybody else is doing it. And a couple of things are happening. Number one, they’re failing, they’re falling on their face and nobody’s showing them number two, what they’re doing for the people that are successful, doesn’t really align with what they wanted to do and why they became an entrepreneur in the first place. And what happens is they are tapped out.

     

    They haven’t designed their offers strategically in a way that is going to deliver a couple of things. Number one, the profit that they want. Number two, the lifestyle that they want and number three, the transformation that their clients want and need and deserve from them. So they’re tapped out. They don’t know how to do more. They don’t know how to create this,

     

    what we call a suite of offers. And this is how we build profitable million dollar coaching businesses that if you want, if you do it right, you can turn around some day and sell it. And so what I’m going to do is I’m going to take you guys through high level. These are the three steps of my strategic business design method. And people fly to me here in Colorado,

     

    all the time to meet with me for one day to go through this process with them. This is a very important process. And I really want to make sure that it’s in your hands. To course, I would love to have you join me here in Colorado or a virtual strategic business design session, but let’s get you started where you are right now and make sure that,

     

    you know, the steps of going through this. When you go through a process called strategic business design, you’re going to end up in three to five years from now with a company that you really, really love. You’re going to end up walking into that brand influence that you’ve wanted. So what you want to be known for how you want to be seen,

     

    and really in my opinion, one of the most important parts is you’re going to end up with the life that you you’ve listened to this show before. If you’re new, welcome. Hi, it’s nice to meet you. I travel with my kids four to five months a year, and it’s broken up. I’m always on a plane. We’re always somewhere adventuring.

     

    And that is because I learned at a very young age from my parents, how to design businesses for lifestyle freedom in this as a process, really high level. And so I want to make sure you have it. So let’s go ahead and dive into step number one. And I’m sure this sounds so crazy. You’re like, Oh my gosh, this isn’t,

     

    this isn’t revolutionary April. When I tell you what step number one is, but it’s really important to most people skip it. So step number one is starting with the end in mind. See what I said? You’re probably thinking, Oh great. I’m listening to this podcast. And I’ve already heard all this before everybody says, start with the end in mind,

     

    but let’s, let’s actually talk about what this means for you and why this is important. So starting with the end in mind means that you’re going to take a second. And I really mean take a second, just sit for a minute and stop in envision. What do you want your average week to look like in three to five years, that means who do you want to be working with?

     

    What do you want that to actually look like? So I want you to dive in. I want you to close your eyes unless you’re driving, don’t close your eyes and I want you to picture yourself, what are you doing on an average week? And in an average day, what does your average day look like? And perhaps what is your average month look like?

     

    And here’s some questions I want you to see in your own mind when we’re going through this exercise, how are you working with your clients, for your customers? What does your interaction between you and your customers actually look like? Where are you working from? Are you working from an office space? Are you working from your home? Are you working from a sailboat?

     

    Where are you working from? I want you to really feel both of those things. Cause both of those things that equals the business model, we need to design for you. And then, I mean, it’s not just a pipe dream and that’s why this is pretty crazy deep, strategic business planning. This is not a business coach coming in here and saying,

     

    decide that you want to be on a boat. You’ll never get that from me. We need to talk about where you want to be. And I’m going to give you the exact steps to actually make that happen. The next process is I want you to go through and who are you talking to? Who are you working with? Who flows through your day with you?

     

    Who flows through your activities, who is on your team and how, what, how are they operating? What does that look like to you? The next question, after you go through and imagine that I want you to figure out what is happening. That is not work-related and this is where the lifestyle entrepreneur aside comes into play. What are you doing?

     

    That’s not work-related. How are you interacting with the people that you love? What does that look like in? What do those relationships look like? And then when you go through this process to actually envision this three to five years from now, really want you to see it because these answers equal the business model and they are going to lead to the suite of offers that you’re going to want to create in your business.

     

    Along those lines, I do have a tool for you. Go grab it. It is a 17 page ultimate guide to online business models. If you have not grabbed that yet, grab it. It breaks down every single type of offer structure that you could do for an online business. And I tell you exactly how it’s going to affect your life. You can grab that simply by going to sweet life,

     

    co.com clicking on podcast number two 25, and we’ll make sure there’s a link here for you in the show notes. So that’s step number one is starting with the end in mind, but I need you. Most people actually don’t go through this process because of the fact that they think it’s just this pipe dream they’re building. Now we’re going to go a step deeper.

     

    We’re going to reverse engineer it even more. So hang with me here. Okay. So after you’ve gone through that process to really figure out what that looks like for you, what you want that to look like for you? Step number two is curating your suite of offers, programs and products. So here is what I mean by this. What programs do you offer under your business and your brand?

     

    What types of programs do you want to offer to people? What do you want to be serving them? In what regard? How do you want to be coaching them? What type of results you want to give to them? So what programs plural make up your suite of offers? The next question to that is what are the business models of each one of those programs you could in your business only have one signature program that brings in half a million dollars a year.

     

    You don’t have to have multiple programs, but most companies do. I’m a big advocate for multiple streams of income. And frankly, you know, if you only have one program, we’re not really creating a journey for your clients to grow with you and to keep clients long term. And so I am a big advocate of creating a suite of programs that creates a journey for your clients to work with you for years and years to come as they grow.

     

    So in your mind, what programs are you offering when you imagine yourself, five years down the road from now, and what is the business model of each offer and what I mean by business model? These are the common terms is one of course is one, a membership site is one a live virtual event. Do you have retreats? Do you offer one-on-one coaching?

     

    What is the collection of programs and the business model of each that is going to help you get to where you want to be doing in an average week, in an average month and an average year in here’s one thing I want you to lean in on. And we do talk about this a lot in clubhouse. This is what we teach in my masterclass on how to create your signature programs is I don’t want you to be afraid to create a custom business model and deliver your programs in a way that meets your needs while also still delivering a transformation to your clients.

     

    If you want to do a hybrid mix of models, which every single one of our clients are now, don’t be afraid to do that. Don’t be afraid to think outside the box. And of course, what you create here and what we’re thinking about and workshopping in your brain right now in this podcast, it’s going to change as technology changes. And you know,

     

    we get three, five years down the road and we bring in artificial intelligence and virtual reality and all these other cool, amazing things. But we need to start with somewhere and I want to make sure you have the roadmap to do this. Next question I want you to ask is what digital or physical products also make up your offer suite? Do you have any,

     

    do you have a book? Do you have t-shirts that you sell? You know, what sort of digital or physical products might also be in that suite of offers? Are you writing your third book or your fourth broker? Are you launching a podcast? What other ways are you contributing to the excellence of your clients? And then here is where the hard work comes in.

     

    And this is where most of you guys are going to totally do. But those keep listening are going to be the ones that actually build the life that you want it, your business. The next part is to value and create a profit forecast for each one of your offers. So you need to sit down and write the forecast of sales for each one of your offers and the value each one of your offers holds separately and collectively in crunch those numbers and make sure they’re going to equal that lifestyle you want.

     

    And then the third step is to Herman, what do you need to build right now? What do you need to start building right now in the next 30, 60 or 90 days? What’s the top signature program that you want to launch or gain traction on first? What do you want to be known for first? And most importantly, how does this first program,

     

    we are launching fit into that longterm suite of offers. And that’s what I want you to lean in on. And those are the questions that you should be able to answer. If you can not answer those questions, you know where to find me, this is my jam. This is what I do. You can send me an Instagram DM. I would happy to be happy to set up a strategy session with you.

     

    But the first thing is we need to do one thing really, really well. We can’t do all the things at once. And it’s also really hard with all the noise across marketing to become known for something. So I want you to lean into this one first signature program that you are building, and you need to see and understand how that fits, how that one brick,

     

    if you will fits into the bigger house that you’re building with all the other bricks or signature programs that you will create. And once you nail your signature offer, once you’ve scaled, this first that you’re doing in that includes the program delivery, you’ve reached your first benchmark of your profit goal. Then you can move on to developing the next program in your suite of offers.

     

    And as you go, and as you grow, your clients go and grow with you. It’s an amazing thing. And when it’s well thought out, and there’s a strategy, I guarantee you, it works every single time when we don’t add in strategy and tactics to creating business design, that’s where entrepreneurs run into trouble. And so I wanted to download you on this today,

     

    and I wanted to give you these really three high-level steps. Literally people fly to me in Colorado to spend a day with me to go through this and design this for their company. And I want you to have these tools to your you’re my people, you’re my podcast family. And thank you so much for listening to the show. And I’ve been getting a lot of questions about this lately.

     

    And so I really wanted to make sure that one of these shows here, as soon as I could fit it in, we were talking about these high level steps. So this is my strategic business design process. And I want you to have it. Let’s go ahead and recap. They’re very basic, right? It doesn’t have to be complicated to build a profitable business is a matter of fact,

     

    simple is what creates traction, both for you and for your followers and for your students, your clients, your customers. So number one is starting with the end in mind, but in a much deeper way than you have done before, it’s understanding how, what you want your life to look like is controlled by the business model. You choose. Number two is curating your suite of offers programs and products,

     

    and not only doing that, but then going the extra step to creating a profit forecast for each of them and understanding and making sure that the hard work you’re doing is in fact, going to equal the profit that you need in order to create the lifestyle and the impact that you want to make. And then the third step is to understand what you need to do first and build right now and the next 30,

     

    60, 90 days, what you need to be leaning in on what signature program that brick and the, in the big building of your whole house has to happen. First. What’s the first brick that has to be laid. And this isn’t for new businesses. As a matter of fact, if you are a new business, thank you for listening to this,

     

    but these are the things that we work with with established companies, established experts that are scaling offline to online, or who have just done a lot of things. I think one of the biggest confusion, places in this are companies and entrepreneurs that have launched a whole bunch of things. And it’s all just a bunch of things thrown out there. There’s no strategic business design plan.

     

    And so it’s taking what, you know, what you&